Panasonic Mobile Communications 208006A UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID User Manual 000 P906i

Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID 000 P906i

Contents

User Manual Part 2

200MailOperate receiver(Change rcv. type)Change rcv. typeSelect a type of address.To . . . . .  This is the direct destination address. “To” recipients are displayed at the receiving ends.※Cc . . . . .  Specify to let parties know the mail contents in addition to the direct recipients. “Cc” recipients are displayed at the receiving ends.※Bcc . . . . Specify to hide the recipients from others. “Bcc” recipients are not displayed at the receiving ends.※They might not be displayed depending on the mobile phone, device, or mail software of the receiving end.Operate att. file(Activate camera)You can shoot and attach an image or i-motion movie.Activate cameraSelect a shooting mode.pSee page 155 and page 158 for how to shoot.Operate att. file(Attach file)See page 210.Operate att. file(Delete att. file)See page 212.Template(Load template)You can read in a Deco-mail template and compose a Deco-mail message.Load templatepWhen the text has already been entered, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the text.Select a template.The contents of the template are entered into the text.pWhile selecting a template, press l( ) to check the contents of the template.pSee page 202 for composing Deco-mail.Template(Save template)You can save the Deco-mail you are composing as a template.Save templateYESpSee page 186 when templates are stored to the maximum.pSee page 208 for how to check the stored template.Function menu Operation/ExplanationAdd header/sig. You can paste a header/signature at the beginning or ending of the text of the i-mode mail message.Add header or Add signaturepYou need to store the header/signature beforehand. (See page 235)Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Operate receiver>pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for “To”, “Cc”, and “Bcc” already contains five addresses in total or contains no addresses.pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the “To” field is blank.<Template (Save template)>pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the title of the template. If no subject is entered, the title takes the name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”.(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)<Add header/sig.>pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including the header/signature, would exceed 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.pIf the decoration such as font color or character size is set for the top or end of text, the header or signature will be decorated as well.Function Menu of the Message Entry DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationDecorate mail See page 203.Template(Load template)See page 200.Template(Save template)See page 200.Full pitch/Half pitch See page 439.Copy See page 442.Cut See page 442.Paste See page 442.
201MailUndo After entering or deleting characters, pasting data, or operating on a decoration, you can undo your most recent operation. You can do it up to twice.pYou can undo the operation also by pressing m().Pictograph/symbols(Pictograph)See page 439.Pictograph/symbols(Symbols)See page 439.Pictograph/symbols(Space)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(Common phrases)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(Kuten code)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(Input time)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(Quote phonebook)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(Quote own data)See page 440.Phrase/code/quote(By position loc.)You can obtain the current location information by using the GPS function, convert that information into the URL, and then paste it to the i-mode mail text.Paste locationBy position loc.Oo()YESPhrase/code/quote(From loc. history)You can convert the location information retained in Location History of the GPS function into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail text.Paste locationFrom loc. historySelect a location recordYESPhrase/code/quote(From phonebook)You can convert the location information stored in the Phonebook into the URL, and paste it to the i-mode mail text.Paste locationFrom phonebookSelect a Phonebook entryOo()YESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPhrase/code/quote(Bar code reader)See page 165.Char. input/dict.(Own dictionary)See page 442.Char. input/dict.(Learned words)See page 443.Char. input/dict.(Change input mode)See page 440.Char. input/dict.(Candid. disp. size)See “Character input (Candid. disp. size)” on page 129.Char. input/dict.(Predict)See page 439.Char. input/dict.(Candidate display)See page 440.Char. input/dict.(Character set time)See page 440.Char. input/dict.(2/NIKO-touch guide)See page 440.Help See page 440.JUMP See page 441.Preview You can check the contents of the text before sending.pYou can preview also by pressing p.Function menu Operation/Explanation
202MailWhen editing an i-mode mail message, you can change the size of the font and the color of the background as well as inserting images, thus composing your own original mail. You can compose Deco-mail also using the templates (patterns). (See page 208)1Perform the operations in step 1 through step 3 on page 198.Information<Undo>pOnce you use “Undo” to return to the previous status, you cannot cancel this by using “Undo” again.pIf you close the Message Entry display, you cannot return to the previous status by using “Undo” when you re-open it. (However, after you have exited “Preview”, you can return to the previous status by “Undo”.)<Phrase/code/quote>pYou can paste up to 512 half-pitch characters by Paste Location, and the pasted URL is counted as the number of characters in the mail text.p“ ” is inserted before the URL pasted by Paste Location. However, you can delete it while editing.Composing Deco-mail to SendEntering charactersActivated decorationPreviewingFont colorFont sizeSwingMoving font effect Word alignmentDeco-mailpictogramTickerBlinkBackgroundcolorInsert lineInsert image2Select the text fieldDecorate the text using Palette.pSee page 203 for how to use Palette.dSelect one of decorationsEnter text.Enter textd(Select area)Go to “Select area” on page 204.pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. (The number of characters you can enter decreases depending on the decoration.)pOnce you decorate the mail text, “ ” appears.pYou can preview the contents of the text by pressing p.Press i( ) to finish previewing and return to the former display.3Press Oo().The Message Composition display is displayed.Go to step 6 on page 198.To enter text after selecting decorationsTo set decorations after entering textInformationpEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the decoration data remain and the number of characters you can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then delete the characters. If you delete the characters by pressing and holding -r for at least one second, the characters as well as the decoration data are deleted.pWhen you reply with quote to the received Deco-mail or you forward it, the decorations or inserted images are displayed at the replying destination or forwarding destination.pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach to mail for sending, the image is deleted.pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000 bytes, it is received at the destination as a mail message with the URL for browsing Deco-mail described depending on the recipient’s i-mode phone. However, depending on the model, only the mail text without the URL for browsing might be received.pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send or receive Deco-mail to and from devices such as personal computers.
203MailYou can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette. You can set multiple decorations for one point.pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for one point.pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by Font Color.pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images and moving font effects are inserted with the specified state.pYou can enter Deco-mail pictograms using “Insert image”, and from “Pictograph” on the Function menu as well.■How to use PalettePress d from the Message Entry display to display Palette.pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed.Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo( ); then you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can release the area selection also by pressing r while the area is selected.pPress i( ) to close Palette. You can close Palette also by pressing r while you are operating on it.Switch operationsYou can switch between the operation of Palette and the operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed.pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns.When you use Palette in succession, press d and operate.pThe movement of Ticker/Swing, blink and animation playback stop when a certain period has passed.About DecorationsInformationPalette operation■How to operate DecorationFunction Operation/ExplanationInsert image(Font effect)You can convert characters to a mark and insert it into the text. The mark animates in various ways and conveys your feelings to the other party.Select a moving font effectEnter text.pTo delete the moving font effect, move the cursor to the moving font effect and press r.Insert image(My picture)You can insert the image stored in “My picture” into the text of mail.Select a folderSelect an image.pYou can select a Deco-mail picture by pressing and holding d for at least one second from the Message Entry display.pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and press r.Insert image(Camera)You can insert the image shot by the camera on the spot into the text of mail.Shoot a still image.pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), QCIF (176 x 144), QVGA (240 x 320) or CIF (352 x 288).pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and press r.pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 155 for how to shoot.Font color You can change the color of characters and lines to be entered.Select a colorEnter text.pYou can switch between “20 Color” and “256 Color” by pressing c().pIn the font color changing mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text.
204MailBackground color You can change the background color of the mail text.Select a color.pYou can switch between “20 Color” and “256 Color” by pressing c().Insert line You can insert a horizontal line into the mail text.The line feed is inserted automatically, and the line is inserted.pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the line and press r.Undo You can return to the previous status of the set decoration. You can do it up to twice.pYou can undo the operation also by pressing m().Decorate all reset You can release all the decorations.YESpIf you have inserted an image, the message “In-line image is deleted” is displayed.Function Operation/ExplanationSelect area You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size, Word Alignment, Ticker and Swing over the selected text you have entered. You can also change the set decoration, add another decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.Select a start point.pYou can select all text by pressing i( ) and selecting “YES”.Select an end point.Set, change, add or cancel each decoration.p“ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display during selecting decoration area.<Set, change, or add decoration>Select an icon and set, change, or add decorations.pSelect another icon in succession to change the multiple decorations or add decorations.pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set, reselect each icon and complete decorations.<Release Blink, Ticker, or Swing>Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or SwingSelect the same icon again.Font size You can change the size of characters to be entered.Select a font sizeEnter text.pIn the font size changing mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text.Function Operation/Explanation
205MailSelect blink You can make characters to be entered blink.Enter text.The set characters are blinking.pIn the blink setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.d (Reset blink)Select ticker You can make characters to be entered and images to be inserted flow (moving from right to left).Enter text.The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed before and after the cursor.pIn the ticker setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.d (Reset ticker)The line feed is inserted automatically.Select swing You can make characters to be entered and images to be inserted swing (moving to left and right back).Enter text.The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed before and after the cursor.pIn the swing setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.d (Reset swing)The line feed is inserted automatically.Function Operation/ExplanationWord alignment You can change the position of characters to be entered and images to be inserted.Select a word alignmentEnter text.The line feed is inserted automatically, and the alignment is set.pIn the word alignment setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display.pYou can set other decorations in succession.pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter text.Function Operation/ExplanationInformation<Insert image>pYou can insert up to 20 types of images within 90 Kbytes in total. However, you can insert up to 2 kinds of flash movie. Even if the inserted types of images are 20 or fewer, the confirmation display appears for some operations asking whether to re-edit the text because the maximum number of images has exceeded.pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a single type of file. If you copy/paste the image already inserted, that image is regarded as the same image and handled as a single type of file. However, if you insert the same Flash image, it is handled as the second type of files.pYou can apply Blink, Ticker, Swing, and Word Alignment to the inserted images, however, you cannot apply any decorations to Flash movies.<Font color>pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another color is set, the setting changes to that color.pThe color for pictographs is also subjected to the specified font color. To restore the color to ordinary one, select “指定なし/Default”.pYou cannot change the color of Deco-mail pictograms.<Background color>pYou cannot change the background color when editing the header or signature.<Font size>pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different font size is set, the font size is changed to that size of the character.pYou cannot change the size of the Deco-mail pictogram.<Select blink>pYou cannot make Deco-mail pictograms blink.
206MailDecome-Anime is a mail service which enables you to create expressive mail using Decome-Anime templates on which Flash images with messages and images are available.You can create Decome-Anime with pre-installed templates or purchased templates from IPs (Information Providers) site.1lCreate new Decome-Anime2Perform the operations in step 2 through step 4 on page 198.Creating Decome-Anime to SendEdit Decome-Anime displayPreviewingDecome-Anime Creation display3Select the text fieldPhone or microSDSelect the Decome-Anime template to be sent.pWhen a Decome-Anime template is already selected, the Edit Decome-Anime display appears. Go to step 4.pPress l( ) to display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.pOnce you select a Decome-Anime template, “ ” appears.pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you cannot edit contents.pWhen you send the contents of the Decome-Anime template as they are, go to step 5.pYou cannot edit the text in the Decome-Anime template when it has once been saved to the Draft, when you forward from the Inbox, or when you re-edit from the Outbox.4Select the contents field to be edited.Select the character entry fieldEdit characters.Select the insert image fieldSelect a folder, and select the image to be changed.pYou cannot set decoration when you enter characters. You cannot paste header or signature.pWhen you break a line, the number of the characters decreases for remaining space.pYou can edit total of up to 90 Kbytes of templates, characters, and images. When 90 Kbytes are exceeded, you can no longer edit them.pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you might not be able to insert the Flash movies even if its volume is even less than 90 Kbytes.pAs the fonts and display position of images and characters are fixed, you cannot edit them.5l()You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime.Go to step 6 on page 198.To edit charactersTo change images
207MailInformationpYou cannot create a Decome-Anime when the number of sent mail messages in Outbox has reached the maximum.pThe image you can insert is a GIF file (including animation GIF), JPEG file, and SWF file.pWhen an animation GIF file or SWF file is inserted, overflowing of the volume size for sending might occur.pEven when sending fails, you cannot re-edit it.pWhen you send a Decome-Anime, it is received at the destination as a mail message with the URL for browsing Decome-Anime described depending on the recipient’s i-mode phone. However, depending on the model, only the text of Decome-Anime without the URL for browsing might be received.pYou cannot use received Decome-Anime as a template.Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Creation DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSend You can send the Decome-Anime.Go to step 7 on page 199.Preview You can check the Decome-Anime by playback before sending.pSee page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works.pPress i( ) to go back to the Decome-Anime creation display.Save When creating or editing the Decome-Anime, you can save it to the Draft. After saving, you cannot re-edit the text of Decome-Anime.YESOperate receiver See page 199.Operate att. file See page 200.Template You can read in a Decome-Anime template and create a Decome-Anime.Phone or microSDSelect a Decome-Anime template to be sent.Go to step 4 on page 206.pIf any Decome-Anime template is selected, the confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the current contents to read in the new one.Function Menu of the Edit Decome-Anime DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationTemplate See page 207.Preview See page 207.Delete You can delete the insert image. Deleted insert image field becomes blank.Quit editing You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime.Go to step 6 on page 198.
208MailThe Deco-mail template and Decome-Anime template are available for the templates.Template is form data for Deco-mail for which decorations such as font size and image insertion are already specified.Other than those pre-installed in the FOMA phone, you can download templates from sites (see page 184). You can also save Deco-mail you sent, received or composed as a Deco-mail template (see page 200 and page 228). You can edit the saved Deco-mail template using Palette.The Decome-Anime template denotes the pattern data for Decome-Anime and is created by combining characters and animations.Other than those pre-installed in the FOMA phone, you can also download templates from sites.You cannot edit the Decome-Anime template.pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can re-download them from the “P-SQUARE” site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them.<Template>Composing Deco-mail or Decome-Anime by Using Template 1lTemplateDecomailSelect a template.pPress l() to compose Deco-mail using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 198.pEven if you set “Header/signature” to automatically paste the header or signature, you cannot paste it.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.Deco-mail TemplateDeco-mail Template listDetailed Deco-mail Template displayFunction Menu of the Deco-mail Template ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationCompose message You can compose a Deco-mail message using the contents of the template.Go to step 2 on page 198.Sort You can change the order of displayed templates.Select an order.Edit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters.Info You can display the file size, saved date and time of the template, and whether it contains images.No. of messages You can display the number of stored templates.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYES
209MailDelete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for templates to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction Menu of the Detailed Deco-mail Template DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationCompose message You can compose a Deco-mail message using the contents of the template.Go to step 2 on page 198.Edit You can edit the contents of the template and save it.Edit the textOo()YES or NOYES . . . Overwrites and saves.NO . . . .  Saves as a separate file.pSee step 2 through step 3 on page 202 for how to edit the text.pSee page 186 when the templates are stored to the maximum.Save insert image You can save images inserted into the template or Deco-mail text, and set them as the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.Select an imageYESSelect a destination folder.Go to step 3 on page 182.pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum.Information<Edit>pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm” (Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).<Save insert image>pDeco-mail pictograms are saved to the “お気に入り (Favorite)” folder in the “Decomail-pictograph” folder.1lTemplateDecome-AnimePhone or microSDpSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.2Select a template.You can display the preview of the template.pPress l() to create Decome-Anime using the contents of the template. Go to step 2 on page 206.The animation is played back automatically. Some Decome-Anime may sound effect tones, or vibrate the FOMA phone. Also, depending on the Decome-Anime, you can operate by using Bo, Oo, 0 through 9, s, or a on playback display or preview.pPress m( ) to pause the animation during playback. Press m() again to resume the animation playback.pThe effect tone sounds according to the setting of “Auto melody play”. When the message is previewed from the Decome-Anime Template list, the effect tone sounds regardless of the setting. However, when a melody file is attached, that melody is played back. The effect tone for Decome-Anime does not sound.pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.pThe FOMA phone vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator” or “Manner Mode”.pSome Decome-Anime refer to the phone-information data in your FOMA phone. To permit the use of the information in your FOMA phone, set “Use phone information” in “i-mode settings” to “YES”. (“YES” is set at purchase.)Decome-Anime TemplateDecome-Anime Template listPreviewingWhen you display the playback display of Decome-Anime or Preview
210MailFunction Menu of the Decome-Anime Template ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationCreate Decome-AnimeYou can create a Decome-Anime using the contents of the template.Go to step 2 on page 206.Preview You can display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.Edit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Copy to microSD See page 357.Copy to phone See page 358.Info You can display the title, file name, format, and whether it set with file restriction.Ir/  transmission(Send Ir data)See page 370.Ir/  transmission(  transmission)See page 372.Delete(Delete this)See page 208.Delete(Delete selected)See page 209.Delete(Delete all)See page 209.You can send an i-mode mail message with files attached.You can attach following files:・Still image ・Melody ・Moving image/i-motion movie・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event・ToDo item ・Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser) ・Word・Excel ・PowerPoint ・SD other filesYou can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total.pYou cannot attach files that are prohibited from being attached to mail or output from the FOMA phone to other devices.pRegardless of the “File restriction” setting, you can attach the still image or moving image/i-motion movie shot with your FOMA phone or the files received via infrared rays.pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on the Message Composition display.pDepending on the recipient’s i-mode phone, it receives only compatible files within the memory space of that model.pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the size of attached files. 1Message Composition displaySelect the attachment fieldDo the following operations.<Attachments>Attaching FilesItemOperation/ExplanationPicture Select a folderSelect an image.pHighlight an attached image and press Oo( ) to display the image. Press r to return to the former display.Melody Select a folderSelect a melody.pHighlight an attached melody and press Oo( ) to play back the melody.Press any key to stop the playback. imotion Select a folderSelect an i-motion movie.pHighlight the attached i-motion movie and press Oo( ) to play back the i-motion movie.Press r during playback or stop the playback to return to the former display.
211Mail2Go to step 2 on page 198.ToruCa When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details), it is attached as a ToruCa file (details).Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file.pHighlight the attached ToruCa file and press Oo( ) to preview it. Press r to return to the former display.PDF Select a folderSelect a PDF file.pHighlight an attached PDF file and press Oo( ) to display the PDF file. Press r to return to the former display.Phonebook Select a search methodSelect a Phonebook entryOo()pWhen you specified a search method last time, the Phonebook entry is searched by that method.Schedule Select a dateSelect a schedule eventOo()ToDo Select a ToDo itemOo()Bookmark i-mode or Full BrowserSelect a bookmark.Document file You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.Select a folderSelect a file.Other You can attach a file stored in “SD other files”.Select a folderSelect a file.ItemOperation/ExplanationInformation<Picture>pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode phones of the mova service; they are in the form of URLs for browsing images and automatically attached with expiry dates and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text that can be sent to an i-mode phone of the mova service is up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes). (When the acceptable number of characters of the mova phone is “250 full-pitch characters”) When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and just the mail text is sent.pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images.pYou can attach a Flash movie as well.pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be displayed or coarsely displayed depending on the model at the receiving end.<Melody>pMelodies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the melodies to the FOMA phone. (See page 360)pIf the receiving end is other than FOMA P906i, the sent melody might not be played back correctly or the attachment might be deleted.pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode phone of the mova service.<imotion>pSome i-motion movies cannot be attached to mail or their file sizes may become larger or smaller.pMoving images stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the moving images to the FOMA phone. (See page 360)pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion movies cannot be correctly received/displayed, might become coarse, or might be converted into consecutive still images.When sending moving images to other than the 2 Mbytes compatible model, it is advisable to shoot them with the following settings:File size setting: Mail restrict’n (S)Image quality: Normal<ToruCa>pToruCa files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the ToruCa files to the FOMA phone. (See page 271)
212MailYou can delete an attached file you are selecting or all attached files.1Message Composition display i()Operate att. fileDelete att. fileDelete this or Delete allYESpTo delete a single file, highlight the file to be deleted.You can send photos (still images) to the other party during a voice call. The photo is sent as the attachments of i-mode mail, and the receiving end can view it during a call.To send photos during a voice call, you need to store the phone number and mail address of the other party in the same Phonebook entry beforehand. Depending on the model of other party’s phone, the other party might not be able to view the photo during a call.During a voice call, you can send photos (still images) you shoot on the spot.1During a voice calli()Shoot/send photoPhoto modeThe camera starts up.2Press Oo().The photo is shot.pPress h from the Finder display to return to the “Talking” display.pSee page 160 for how to operate on the Finder display.Delete Attached File<Photo-sending>Using Photo-sendingShoot and Send Photos3Oo()Select a mail address.The photo is saved and sent.pYou can send it also by pressing i( ) and selecting “Save & send”.pYou can set “Set display” and “File restriction” by pressing i( ). (See page 157 and page 164)pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the mail address you send the mail message to.pWhen you select “Quit”, the photo is saved to the Draft as the image-attached mail.You can send the saved photos (still images).1During a voice calli()Shoot/send photoMy picture2Select a folderSelect a photoSelect a mail address.The photo is sent.pYou can select a photo (still image) of QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96).pWhen multiple mail addresses are stored, select the mail address you send the mail message to.When “Photo auto display” is set to “ON”, the photo is automatically displayed.If you have received multiple photos during a voice call, you can press No to switch them.pYou can display the received photo during a voice call by pressing i( ) and selecting “Display photo”.pYou can also execute “Check new msg.” during a voice call by pressing i(). (See page 215)InformationpThe image sizes of the camera are QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96).Select and Send PhotosWhen you received a photo (still image)
213MailInformationpPhoto-sending is not available in the following cases:・When the phone number and mail address of the other party on the phone are not stored in the same Phonebook entry・When the phone number and mail address of the other party on the phone are stored as secret data in the Phonebook・When a caller ID is not notified to the receiving end (User unset, PublicPhone, Unavailable etc.)(However, you can send from the calling end.)・When “Restrict dialing” is not set for the phone number of the other party on the phone during “Restrict dialing”・When the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the maximum and those messages are all protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full (You cannot send.)・When the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail (You cannot receive.)・During Call Waiting・In B Mode of 2in1pYou cannot send Flash movies by Photo-sending.pYou cannot send images by Photo-sending.pA photo sent/received during a voice call is saved to the Outbox or Inbox as a file attachment of the image mail (the subject is the phone number).When the FOMA phone is in the service area, you can receive i-mode mail, SMS messages and SMS reports automatically. (See page 214 for receiving i-mode mail after selecting it.)When a mail message comes in, “ (pink)” appears at the top of the display.You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS messages.1When i-mode mail arrives, “ (pink)” blinks and the receiving message is displayed.When receiving is completed, the display shows the number of received i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F.pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.pTo cancel receiving midway, select “Cancel” or press and hold r for at least one second while “Mail Receiving...” is displayed. However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing.pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.) Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.<Mail Auto-receive>Receiving i-mode Mail AutomaticallyReception Result displayInformationpYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an i-mode mail message including attached files. You can manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes from the i-mode Center. (See page 217)pWhen the total number or size of received messages stored in the FOMA phone has reached the maximum, the mail messages will be overwritten in the priority order of mail in the “Trash box” folder and older received mail. However, unread or protected mail is not overwritten.
214Mail1Reception Result displayMailSelect an i-mode mail message to be displayed.pFor Decome-Anime, the playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i( ) to display the detailed display.pPress and hold No for at least one second from the detailed i-mode mail display to change the size of characters. (See “Mail” on page 129.)pWhen the total number of unread or protected mail messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum, no new mail can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed. To receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread mail or release protection of mail until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new message”.pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or other files attached. You can receive incompatible attached files but you cannot display them.pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc and Bcc, you can check whether the message was sent to you as To, Cc or Bcc.pMail Messages for you are held at the i-mode Center in the following cases:・When the power is off ・During a videophone call・During Self Mode ・During infrared data exchange・During Omakase Lock ・During iC communication・When you are out of the service area・While connecting to the FirstPass center・During PushTalk communication・While copying to the microSD card・While connecting to the Data Storage Center・When the space of the Inbox is full with protected or unread messagespWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, “ (pink)” appears, and when they are held to the maximum, “ (dark blue)”, appears.Display Newly Received i-mode MailInformationInformationpUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc.You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held at the i-mode Center and select them to receive, or delete them at the Center before receiving.To use this function, set “Receive option setting” to “ON” beforehand.When “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot receive i-mode mail messages automatically. When a mail message comes in the i-mode Center, “ ” is displayed.You can set whether to select and receive necessary i-mode mail only.1lMail settingsReceive option settingON or OFF1lReceive optionOperate following the procedure described in “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “OFF”, the display to the effect that it will be set to “ON” appears.Press Oo( ) to set “Receive option setting”.pYou can bring up the Receive Option display also by iiMenuメニュー/検索 (Menu/Search)メール選択受信 (Receive Option).pWhen the number of characters in the text of received i-mode mail exceeds the maximum, “/” or “//” is inserted at the end of the text and the excess part is deleted automatically.pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not be correctly displayed. When the image is larger than the screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML mail) sent from a personal computer might not be displayed correctly.<Receive Option>Receiving Selected i-mode MailReceive Option SettingInformationSelect and Receive Mail Messages
215Maili-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at the i-mode Center are automatically sent to your FOMA phone. However, the messages will be held at the i-mode Center if your FOMA phone cannot receive mail because it is turned off or out of the service area, or when Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”.When “ (pink)” is displayed, receive mail by checking the i-mode Center.See “Receive option” when “ ” is displayed.1Press and hold l for at least one second.“ (pink)” and “ (yellow)/ (yellow)” will blink, the message “Checking...” will be displayed, and the i-mode mail and Messages R/F will be delivered.On the results of checking, the numbers of the received i-mode mail and Messages R/F are shown.pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at least one second. However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing.pYou cannot receive i-mode mail message and Message R/F even when you press and hold l for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display.InformationpEven when Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”, you will still receive all mail messages if you execute “Check new message”. If you do not want to receive all mail messages, remove a check mark from “Mail”. (See page 234)pWhen you bring up the Receive Option display, the “ ” icon goes off. Also, the “ ” icon goes off if you turn the power off or bring up the mail display.pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.<Check New Message>Checking whether Center Holds i-mode MailInformationpWhen icons such as “ (dark blue)”, “ (dark blue)/ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” are displayed, the FOMA phone cannot receive any more i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Delete unnecessary mail and messages, or read unread mail and messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected mail and messages are overwritten automatically from the oldest one.)You can reply to the sender. With “Rep.w/ i-mode mail”, you can compose the normal i-mode mail message, with “Rep. w/ Deco-Anime”, you can compose the Decome-Anime, or with “Reply with quote”, you can quote the original text in your received i-mode mail and reply to it. You cannot use “Reply with quote” for Decome-Anime and SMS messages.1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()Reply/forwardRep.w/ i-mode mail, Rep. w/ Deco-Anime or Reply with quotepYou can reply for i-mode mail message also by pressing l().pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found, you can choose whether to reply to the sender only or to all addresses.Select “To sender” or “To all”.pJust one quotation mark (see page 235) is added to the beginning of the text in the i-mode mail to be replied with quote. 2Enter a subject and text, and then send.When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on page 198.When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3 on page 244.After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, the “ (pink)” icon to that effect, or the “ (dark blue)” icon telling that messages are held to the maximum at the i-mode Center might not appear.(This happens if mail arrives at the Center when, for instance, your FOMA phone is off.)pYou can select items to be checked by “Set check new message”.pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages. Use “Check new SMS” to receive them.<Reply> <Reply with Quote>Replying to Received i-mode MailInformationInformationpFor the sender’s address that cannot be replied to (such as when the mail address exceeds 50 half-pitch characters), “ ” is displayed.
216MailYou can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others.1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()Reply/forwardForwardpYou can forward also by pressing m( ) from the Inbox list.2Enter an address and send the mail.When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 198.When you have selected a Decome-Anime, go to step 2 on page 206.When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244.After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.p“Re:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be replied or replied with a quotation. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess part is deleted. (When “Re:” has already been prefixed, it changes to “Re2:” and will be counted up to“Re99:”.)pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your reply. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function. See page 221 for pasted data.pIf the text of Deco-mail contains images that are prohibited from being attached to mail or being output from the FOMA phone to other devices, such images will be deleted when you reply to it.pFor Decome-Anime, you cannot reply with quote.<Forward>Forwarding Received i-mode MailInformationInformationp“Fw:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be forwarded. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess part is deleted. (When “Fw:” has already been prefixed, it changes to “Fw2:” and will be counted up to“Fw99:”.)pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you have not obtained yet, the file information is deleted. You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on your FOMA phone. However, you receive only the attached file information for the files in excess of 100 Kbytes, so you need to manually obtain those attached files from the i-mode Center. The FOMA phone supports following files: ・Still image ・Melody ・Moving image/i-motion movie・PC movie ・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry・Schedule event ・ToDo item ・Bookmark (i-mode, Full Browser)・Word ・Excel ・PowerPointYou cannot play back or display the files other than above. You can save them to any folder in “SD other files”, or use the i-mode mail to forward them.You can use “Attachment preference” to select the files to be received.pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be displayed.pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your forwarding mail. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DoCoMo keitai datalink or infrared data exchange function. See page 221 for pasted data.pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is attached to the mail message, the attached file returns to a ToruCa file before obtaining details.pWhen a mail message on the microSD card is forwarded, the attached file is deleted.pWhen you “Forward” a mail/SMS message received to Number B/Address B in Dual Mode of 2in1, the sent mail message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you switch to A Mode.When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is ReceivedInformation
217MailYou can obtain the receive option attached files held at the i-mode Center.1Detailed Received Mail displaySelect an attached file which has not been obtained.After obtaining is completed, files are played back/displayed.You can play back or display the attached/pasted files already obtained.1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail displaySelect an attached file.The file is played back or displayed.pFor a PC movie or document file, the confirmation display appears telling that you cannot play it back/display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the microSD card.pFor the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, bookmarks, and files which are not supported by the FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save them.Obtain Receive Option Attached FilesInformationpYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused memory space in the Inbox is smaller than the files.Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted FilesInformationpWhen the sender’s device is other than FOMA P906i, the received melodies might not be played back correctly.pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that still image only is automatically displayed when the mail message is opened. The size of a still image displayed automatically is up to 5M (2592 x 1944) size. pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is displayed shrunk.You can save the attached or pasted files that you have obtained. You can set some files for a ring tone, or an image on the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or other displays.1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail display/Detailed Message R/F displayHighlight an attached file and press i()Operate fileSave attached fileYESpPC movies are saved to the destination folder in “microSD” folder of “PC Movie”.pDocument files are saved to the destination folder in “Document viewer”.pThe files not supported by the FOMA phone are saved to the destination folder in “SD other files”.pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA phone, some of them cannot be saved to the FOMA phone depending on the file such as an invalid data file or whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save it to the microSD card. When you save it, it is saved to a destination folder in “SD other files”.pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part of the file cannot be saved depending on the attached file.pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes.pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes.Save Attached or Pasted FilesInformation
218Mail2Select a destination or folder to save to.For melodies, go to step 2 on page 183.For still images, go to step 3 on page 182.For i-motion movies, go to step 2 on page 194.pBookmarks are saved according to each information of i-mode or Full Browser.pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or there is no usable memory space when you save SD other files, PC movies, or document files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete unnecessary files and to save new files. Select “YES” to list the files in Data Box, then select unnecessary files and delete them. See page 186 for when files other than SD other files, PC movies, or document files are stored to the maximum.You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS messages. You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately from i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.You can check the received i-mode mail messages, SMS messages, and Area Mail messages.pThe mail message “未定” has been saved by default.1lInboxSelect a folder.pSee page 236 for displaying Messages R/F.InformationpYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone.pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone.pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA phone.<Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft>Displaying Mail from Inbox/Outbox/DraftDisplay Mail from InboxInbox Folder list2Select a mail message.pWhen you select an unread mail message, “(pink)” changes to “”.pFor Decome-Anime, the playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i() to display the detailed Received Mail display. See page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works.pUse No to check other mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message from the detailed Received Mail display, the Decome-Anime playback display does not appear.pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can press m()/c() or >/< to scroll page by page. You cannot scroll for Decome-Anime.Inbox list Detailed Received Mail displayInformationpThe mail message “未定” is not charged a communication fee.pYou cannot reply to the mail message “未定”.pThe effect tone sounds according to the setting of “Auto melody play” when a melody file is attached, when a Flash movie with effect tone is inserted in mail text, or when the  Decome-Anime text has the effect tone. However, when a melody file is attached to a mail message and a Flash movie with effect tone is inserted in the mail text or the Decome-Anime text has the effect tone, the melody is preferentially played back. The effect tone for the Flash movie or Decome-Anime does not sound.pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
219MailYou can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS messages.You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.1lOutboxSelect a folder.2Select a mail message.pFor Decome-Anime, the playback display of Decome-Anime appears. Press i( ) to display the detailed Sent Mail display. See page 209 for how the playback display of Decome-Anime works.pUse No to check other mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message from the detailed Sent Mail display, the Decome-Anime playback display does not appear.pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can press m()/c() or >/< to scroll page by page. You cannot scroll for Decome-Anime.Display Mail from OutboxOutbox Folder listOutbox list Detailed Sent Mail displayInformationpWhen the Decome-Anime text has the effect tone, it sounds according to the setting of “Auto melody play”.pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the Draft. You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including SMS messages.1lDraft2Select a mail message.When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 2 on page 198. When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244.Display Mail from DraftDraft listInformationpWhen you select the i-αppli mail folder, the mail-linked i-αppli that supports the folder starts.
220Mail■Mail menuIcons might have the following marks:■Inbox Folder listFolder status“ ” appears when unread messages are found, and “ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.Folder nameHow to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed DisplayUnread mail messages or messages are saved in the Inbox.Failed-to-send mail messages are saved in the Outbox.Draft mail messages are saved in the Draft.“Mail security” is activated. (displayed also for chat mail)Ordinary folderi-αppli mail folderMessage R folderMessage F folderTrash box folder■Inbox list and detailed Received Mail displayMail status and type“ ” appears when protection is set.Received date and timeThe Inbox list shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the mail received until yesterday.The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from the Center is displayed.Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail(pink) Unread mailRead mailForwarded mailReplied mail    Type of the received mail (Detailed display only)Sender’s mail address (Detailed display only)Sender’s mail address that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only) Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail (Detailed display only) Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only)Inbox list For “Date+sender/receiver subject”  Inbox listFor “Date+subject”Detailed Received Mail display
221MailSubjectWhen “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (“SMS” or “Area Mail” is displayed on the detailed display.)In Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” is displayed at the end of the subject or sender’s address of SMS/i-mode mail messages received to Number B/Address B.Attached or pasted dataThe detailed display shows the data volume as well.<For Inbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Received Mail display>“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).(blue) SMS messages in the FOMA phoneSMS messages on the UIMArea MailMelody fileImage fileInserted image file (List only)i-motion movie filePC movie fileToruCa filePDF fileDocument filePhonebook entry fileSchedule event or ToDo item fileBookmark fileOther filesAttached file before obtaining(Detailed display only)Attached file suspended to be obtained (Detailed display only)Attached file failed to be obtained (Detailed display only)i-αppli start information (List only)i-αppli mail (List only)Multiple files (List only)Multiple pasted filesFile set with the UIM restrictions<For Inbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>Feel*Mail iconWhen you press c( ) from Inbox list, the Feel*Mail image is played back. See page 122 for Feel*Mail.Text of mail■Outbox Folder listFolder status“ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.Folder name Ordinary folder i-αppli mail folderAttached filei-αppli mailFile set with the UIM restrictions
222Mail■Outbox list and detailed Sent Mail displayMail status“ ” appears when protection is set.Sent date and timeThe Outbox list shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail sent until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent. “ ” appears when the date/time is corrected.Recipient’s phone number or mail address(pink) Mail successfully sentMail failed to be sentSimultaneous mail successfully sent to all addresses(gray) Simultaneous mail sent to some addresses(pink) Simultaneous mail failed to be sent to all addresses    Mail address successfully sent (Detailed display only)    Mail address failed to be sent (Detailed display only)Outbox listFor “Date+sender/receiver subject”  Outbox listFor “Date+subject”Detailed Sent Mail displaySubjectWhen “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (“SMS” is displayed on the detailed display.)Attached dataThe detailed display shows the data volume as well.<For Outbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Sent Mail display>“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).<For Outbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>Text of mail(blue) SMS messages in the FOMA phoneSMS messages on the UIMSMS report received [List (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed display only]Melody fileImage fileInserted image file (List only)i-motion movie filePC movie fileToruCa filePDF fileDocument filePhonebook entry fileSchedule event or ToDo item fileBookmark fileOther filesi-αppli mail (List only)Multiple files (List only)File set with the UIM restrictionsAttached filei-αppli mailFile set with the UIM restrictions
223Mail■Draft listMail statusSaved date and timeThe Draft list shows the time for the mail saved today, and shows the date for the mail saved until yesterday. “ ” appears when the date/time is corrected.Recipient’s phone number or mail addressWhen the phone number or mail address is stored in the Phonebook, the name stored in the Phonebook is displayed. SubjectWhen “Mail list display” is set to “Date+sender/receiver subject”, the subject is displayed up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters. When set to “Date+subject”, it is displayed up to 7 full-pitch/14 half-pitch characters, however, for a mail message with files attached, it is decreased by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.(pink)Ordinary mailSimultaneous mail(blue) SMS messagesFor “Date+sender/receiver subject”  For “Date+subject”Attached data<For Date+sender/receiver subject><For (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>Text of mailAttached fileFile set with the UIM restrictionsMelody fileImage fileInserted image filei-motion movie filePC movie fileToruCa filePDF fileDocument filePhonebook entry fileSchedule event or ToDo item fileBookmark fileOther filesMultiple files (List only)File set with the UIM restrictionsInformationpSee “Mail list display” on page 233 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list.pWhen “Name in phonebook” of “Mail list display” is checked, the name stored in the Phonebook is displayed as sender or recipient. However, when the sender’s mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, the name is not displayed even when “phone number@docomo.ne.jp” is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook entry. Store the phone number part only to display the name. When a sender’s/recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as secret data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.Even when a sender’s/recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the name is not displayed in Secret Data Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name.pWhen “Message” of “Mail list display” is not checked, the text does not appear on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list.
224MailManaging Mail MessagesFunction Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationOperate folder(Add folder)You can add a new folder. You can add up to 22 folders to each of “Inbox” and “Outbox”.Add folderEnter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Operate folder(Edit folder name)You can edit the names of the added folders only.Edit folder nameEdit the folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Operate folder(Sort folder)You can sort folders. You can sort the added folders, Message R/F folder, and the i-αppli mail folders.Sort folderUse Bo to sort the orderOo()Operate folder(Delete folder)All the mail messages including secret mail in the folder will be deleted as well.Delete folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESOpen folder You can display the mail messages in the i-αppli mail folder without running mail-linked i-αppli.Read all[Inbox Folder only]You can change unread mail in the folder to read mail.YESSort(Auto-sort)See page 231.Sort(Re-sort)You can resort mail messages following the sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.Re-sortYESpWhen the folder applied with Mail security (see page 224) is found, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.Mail security You can set the folder to open only when you enter your Terminal Security Code.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESpTo release it, perform the same operation.Ir/  transmission(Send all Ir data)See page 371.Ir/  transmission(All  transmission)See page 372.No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail messages, Messages R/F, and sent mail messages.Delete(DEL all read mails)[Inbox Folder only]You can delete all the read mail messages including secret mail in all Inbox folders. All the read SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.DEL all read mailsYESDelete(DEL all recv. mails)[Inbox Folder only]You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in all Inbox folders. All the received SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.DEL all recv. mailsEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESDEL all sent mails[Outbox Folder only]You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in all Outbox folders. All sent SMS messages on the UIM are deleted as well.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Operate folder (Delete folder)>pYou cannot delete an i-αppli mail folder if corresponding mail-linked i-αppli exists.If the software program does not exist, you can delete the i-αppli mail folder, but this will delete both folders created in the Outbox Folder list and Inbox Folder list.<Sort (Re-sort)>pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the “Chat” folder and “Trash box” folder.pMail messages which are not applied with “Auto-sort” are sorted into the “Inbox” folder.
225Mail<Mail security>pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor edit its name.Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft ListInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationReply/forward(Reply)[Inbox only]See page 215.Reply/forward(Reply with quote)[Inbox only]See page 215.Reply/forward(Forward)[Inbox only]See page 216.Edit[Outbox only]You can re-edit the sent mail message and send it again.When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 198.When you have selected a Decome-Anime, go to step 2 on page 206.When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 244.Protect(Protect ON/OFF)[Inbox/Outbox]You can protect the mail message so that it is not overwritten and deleted. You can protect all the received and sent messages. (2,500 received messages, 1,000 sent messages)The protected one is indicated by “ ”.Protect ON/OFFpTo release protection, perform the same operation.pYou can switch between protected and unprotected also by pressing 1 from the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display.Protect(ProtectSLCT. ON/OFF)[Inbox/Outbox]ProtectSLCT. ON/OFFPut/Remove a check mark for mail messages to be protected/unprotectedl()pA check mark is placed to the mail already protected.Move/copy(Move)[Inbox/Outbox]MoveSelect a destination folderPut a check mark for mail messages to be movedl()YESMove/copy(Move to trash) [Inbox only]You can move mail messages to the “Trash box” folder. The mail messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are preferentially overwritten (deleted).Move to trashPut a check mark for mail messages to be moved to the trash boxl()YESMove/copy(UIM operation)[Inbox/Outbox]You can copy or move the mail message to the UIM or FOMA phone. (See page 422)Move/copy(Copy to microSD)See page 357.Move/copy(Store in Center)You can save mail messages stored in FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.Store in CenterEnter your Terminal Security CodePut a check mark for mail messages to be savedl()YESpYou can select up to 10 mail messages.pYou do not need to put a check mark for the mail messages on the detailed Received Mail display and detailed Sent Mail display.Function menu Operation/Explanation
226MailSearch/sort(Search sender/Search receiver)[Inbox/Outbox]You can retrieve mail messages with a mail address or phone number of a sender or recipient.“Search sender” for received mail and “Search receiver” for sent mail are displayed respectively.Search mailSearch sender or Search receiverSelect an item.Phonebook  . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Received address. . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Sent address . . . . . . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Enter address . . . . . . Enter the mail address or phone number.pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.Search/sort(Search subject)[Inbox/Outbox]You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.Search mailSearch subjectEnter a subject.pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.Search/sort(Search subject+msg)[Inbox/Outbox]You can retrieve mail messages with a subject or text.Search mailSearch subject+msgEnter a part of a subject or text.pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.Search/sort(Sort)[Inbox/Outbox]You can change the order of displayed mail messages.SortSelect an order.Search/sort(Filter)[Inbox/Outbox]You can display the mail messages only that satisfy the condition.FilterSelect a type.Search/sort(Display all)[Inbox/Outbox]You can re-display all mail messages in “By date↑” order after using Search Mail, or the Sort or Filter function.Display allFunction menu Operation/ExplanationMail history[Inbox/Outbox]You can display the history of sent/received mail from the sender or to the recipient being selected or displayed. Up to 1,000 histories are displayed in the chronological order from the most recent one.Select a sender’s or destination address.The target sent/received mail histories are displayed. . . . . Sent mail . . . . Received mailpSelect a history; then you can bring up the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display. Press r to return to the former display.pYou can display also by pressing 7 on the detailed Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display.Color label[Inbox/Outbox]You can color the characters on the Inbox list and Outbox list for classifying mail. Select “Default” to set ordinary character color.Select a color.List setting You can select the item to be displayed on the list. You can also switch between the name stored in the Phonebook and the mail address/phone number for the display in the sender’s/destination address field.You can set to list the mail messages by subject depending on the setting of “Mail list display”.Select an item to be displayed.pYou can switch each time you press c( ) from the Outbox list and Draft list.Ir/  transmission(Send Ir data)See page 370.Ir/  transmission(Send all Ir data)[Draft only]See page 371.Ir/  transmission(  transmission)See page 372.Ir/  transmission(All  transmission)[Draft only]See page 372.Function menu Operation/Explanation
227MailNo. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail messages, sent mail messages and draft mail messages.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for mail messages to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete read mails)[Inbox only]You can delete all the read mail messages in the folder.Delete read mailsYESDelete(Delete all SMS-R)[Inbox only]You can delete all the SMS reports. While displaying SMS reports using the Search Mail function or Filter function, only the displayed SMS reports are deleted.Delete all SMS-REnter your Terminal Security CodeYESDelete(DEL all frm folder)[Inbox/Outbox]You can delete all mail messages in the folder.DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESDelete(Delete all)[Draft only]You can delete all the mail messages in Draft.Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Edit>pTo use “Mail group” for destination addresses, delete all the entered addresses, press +l( ) to complete the deletion, and then re-select the address field. <Protect>pYou cannot protect mail messages in the “Trash box” folder.pIf you protect all the sent messages which are stored to the maximum, you can no longer compose i-mode mail messages.<Move/copy (Move to trash)>pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read mail.<Move/copy (Store in Center)>pYou cannot save the SMS messages stored on the UIM.pYou cannot save the files attached to mail.pYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of the service area.pWhen you have not signed up for Data Security Service, the message to that effect appears.pYou can download the mail messages saved to the Data Security Center from its site to your FOMA phone. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.<Search/sort> pEven if you set “No title” for “Search subject” of “Search mail”, you cannot search for the i-mode mail whose subject is not entered and displayed as “No title”.<Color label>pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when they are copied to the microSD card, copied/moved to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via infrared rays or iC transmission.pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is released when the UIM is dismounted and then mounted.Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail Display/Detailed Sent Mail DisplayInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationReply/forward(Reply)[Received Mail only]See page 215.Reply/forward(Reply with quote)[Received Mail only]See page 215.Reply/forward(Forward)[Received Mail only]See page 216.Edit[Sent Mail only]See page 225.
228MailResend[Sent Mail only]You can re-send the sent mail message.YESProtect ON/OFF See page 225.Move/copy(Copy)CopySelect an item to be copied.pSee page 442 for how to copy.pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail address or phone number to be copied.Move/copy(Move)MoveSelect a destination folder.Move/copy(Move to trash)[Received Mail only]You can move the mail to the “Trash box” folder. The mail messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are preferentially overwritten (deleted).Move to trashYESMove/copy(UIM operation)You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or FOMA phone. (See page 422)Move/copy(Copy to microSD)See page 357.Move/copy(Store in Center)See page 225.Operate file(Save attached file)See page 217.Operate file(Save insert image)See page 209.Operate file(Save D-pictograph)[Received Mail only]You can save Deco-mail pictograms in the mail text at once. You can save up to 20 of them.Save D-pictographYESpSee page 186 for when the Deco-mail pictograms are stored to the maximum.pSee page 330 for how to check the stored Deco-mail pictograms.Function menu Operation/ExplanationOperate file(Save as template)You can save the sent/received Deco-mail as a template.Save as templateYESpSee page 186 for when the templates are stored to the maximum.pSee page 208 for how to check the stored template.Operate file(Property)You can display the file name and file size of the image inserted into the text.PropertySelect an image.Operate file(Delete att. file)Delete att. fileYESStore(Store address)See page 96.Store(Add to phonebook)See page 96.Store(Auto-sort)You can store a sender or subject as a sort condition. (See page 231)Store(Add desktop icon)See page 127.Mail history See page 226.Color label See page 226.Display(Name/address)You can display the sender’s/destination address by the name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address/phone number.Name/addresspYou can switch also by pressing 5.Display(Scroll)See page 233.Display(Character size)See “Mail” on page 129.Display SMS report[Sent Mail only]You can check the result of the SMS message you sent, or the date and time it arrived at the destination. To receive the SMS report, set “SMS report request” to “ON”.Function menu Operation/Explanation
229MailIr/  transmission(Send Ir data)See page 370.Ir/  transmission(  transmission)See page 372.Delete YESpYou can delete the mail message also by pressing 0.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Resend>pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as the sent mail message. If you re-send the failed-to-send simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as the sent mail message.Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS messages are stored in Sent Address and Received Address, up to 30 messages each. You can check the list for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When you exchange mail messages with the same mail address or phone number, the older one is deleted.pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 60 records for Number A/Address A and Number B/Address B are stored in Received Address in total.1Press and hold Vo for at least one second.: SMS message successfully sent: i-mode mail successfully sent: SMS message failed to be sent: i-mode mail failed to be sent: Time-difference corrected timepPress m( ) from the Sent Address list to display Redial. When the Sent Address list is displayed from Dialed Calls, you can press m( ) to display Dialed Calls.pYou cannot display the Sent Address list even when you press and hold Vo for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal diplay.Press and hold Co for at least one second.: SMS message: i-mode mail: Time-difference corrected time: SMS/i-mode mail message received to Number B/Address B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)pPress m( ) from the Received Address list to display Received Calls.pYou cannot display the Received Address list even when you press and hold Co for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal diplay.<Sent Address> <Received Address>Displaying Sent/Received Mail RecordWhen Using Sent AddressWhen Using Received AddressSent Address listReceived Address list
230Mail2Select a record to be displayed.The detailed display of the Address list is displayed.pWith an SMS message for which the other party’s phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is displayed.pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press Oo( ) and go to step 3 on page 198. To send an SMS message to the displayed phone number, press Oo( ) and go to step 3 on page 244.pTo store in the Phonebook, press m( ). Go to step 2 of “Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook” on page 96.Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationCharacter size You can switch the character size for the list. (See “Dialed/recv. calls” on page 129)Feel*Mail[Received Address only]The Feel*Mail image is played back. See page 122 for Feel*Mail.pYou can play back the Feel*mail image also by pressing c().Add to phonebook See page 96.Add desktop icon See page 127.Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message. The mail address is entered in the address field.Go to step 3 on page 198.Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The phone number is entered into the address field.Go to step 3 on page 244.Dialing If the mail address has been stored in a Phonebook entry, you can make a voice call, videophone call or PushTalk call to the phone number stored in the Phonebook.Select a dialing type.pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent to the other party during a videophone call. To cancel the setting, select “Release”.pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook entry, you can dial the first phone number.DialpTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”, select an international call access code, and follow the procedure above after selecting “Dialing” from the Function menu. (See page 61)pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See step 2 on page 48)Redial/Dialed calls[Sent Address only]You can display the Redial list or the Dialed Call list.Received calls[Received Address only]You can display the Received Call list. All received calls (all calls) are displayed.Delete this YESDelete selected Put a check mark for records to be deletedl()YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/Explanation
231MailYou can automatically save the mail messages that satisfy the set conditions to the specified folder. This function applies to only the added folders and i-αppli mail folders.1Inbox Folder list/Outbox Folder listi()SortAuto-sortFollow the operation of the Function menu list on page 231 to set “Auto-sort”.If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have been set, the Auto-sort Setting display appears.You can specify a sort condition and folder from the detailed Sent/Received Mail display.1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail displayi()StoreAuto-sortDo the following operations.The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition or to overwrite it. Select “YES” to release the set condition and set the new one.<Auto-sort>Sorting Mail Automatically to Each FolderAuto-sort StoringItem Operation/ExplanationAddress sort You can set the displayed sender’s/recipient’s address for a sorting condition.Select a folder.pWhen multiple addresses are found, select an address.Subject sort You can edit the displayed subject and set it for a sorting condition.Edit the subjectSelect a folder.To change the conditionThe confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition.Select “YES” to release the condition set for another folder and to set it for the selected folder.pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated folder.The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the address.When the same condition is set for another folderWhen storing another address for the folder set for “Address sort”InformationpYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders. pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the priority below. Sort all Subject sort Reply impossible/Send impossible Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address) Address sort (Look-up mail group) Address sort (Look-up group)pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members cannot be sorted by “Address sort” or “Send impossible”.pArea Mail messages are not sorted by “Address sort”.Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAddress sort(Look-up address)You can look up a mail address or phone number in the Phonebook or Sent/Received Address and set it to the folder for sorting.Look-up addressSelect an item.Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Sent address  . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().
232MailAddress sort(Look-up group)You can set a group to be sorted into the folder.Look-up groupSelect a group.Address sort(Look-up mail group)You can set a mail group to be sorted into the folder.Look-up mail groupSelect a mail group.Address sort(Enter address)You can directly enter a mail address or phone number to be sorted into the folder.Enter addressEnter a mail address or phone number.pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, enter the phone number only. You can sort SMS messages as well if you enter the phone number only.Subject sort You can enter the subject of i-mode mail messages to be sorted into the folder. One subject can be set per folder.Enter a subject.pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.Reply impossible You can set reply-disabled mail messages to be sorted. You can set for only one folder.Send impossible You can set failed-to-send mail messages to be sorted. You can set for only one folder.Sort all You can sort all mail messages into the i-αppli mail folder. You can set for only one i-αppli mail folder each in the Inbox and Outbox. When “Sort all” is set, other sort settings are disabled.YESEdit addr/subj You can edit and store the mail address, phone number, and subject set for the folder.Edit the mail address, phone number or subject.List setting You can switch whether to display the destinations by the name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address or phone number.Name or AddresspYou can switch also by pressing c().Function menu Operation/ExplanationRelease(Release this)You can release the sort condition. (The item is deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)Release thisYESRelease(Release selected)You can select mail addresses or phone numbers, and release the sort condition for them. (The items are deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)Release selectedPut a check mark for mail addresses or phone numbers to be releasedl()YESRelease(Release all)You can release all sort conditions. (The items are deleted from the Auto-sort Setting display.)Release allYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Address sort (Look-up group)>pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the name.pYou cannot set groups on the UIM.pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”) are not sorted into the folder.<Address sort (Look-up mail group)>pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the mail group name.<Subject sort>pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple folders, it is sorted to the folder nearest to the “Inbox” folder or “Outbox” folder.pEven if you set “No title”, the i-mode mail titled with “No title” because of no entry cannot be sorted.pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.<Sort all>pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have been directly received on the UIM.
233MailYou can store mail addresses by group. You can send mail to regular destinations.You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to 20 groups.1mPhonebookPhonebook settingsMail groupSelect a Mail group to be stored.pWhen mail addresses are stored in a Mail group, “ ” appears at the lower left of the display. Press l( ) to compose i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as the destination address.Go to step 3 on page 198.2Highlight <Not stored> and pressl().pIf you select a stored mail address, the Mail Group Address Confirmation display appears.3Enter a mail address.pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.When you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.+m-2-6 <Mail Group>Creating Mail GroupMail Group listDetailed Mail Group displayFunction Menu of the Mail Group ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationCompose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to the Mail group.Go to step 3 on page 198.Edit group name Enter a name of the Mail group.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Reset group name You can reset the name of Mail group to the default.YES1lMail settingsDo the following operations.Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/Mail Group Address Confirmation DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit address Go to step 3 on page 233.pYou can edit the address also by pressing l().Look-up address You can call up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.Select an item.Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Sent address  . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Delete this YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES<Mail Settings>Setting Mail and Messages R/FItem Operation/ExplanationScroll You can set the number of lines that are scrolled at a time for when you press Bo on the detailed mail display, detailed Message R/F display, Message Composition display and preview display.Select the number of lines.Character size See “Mail” on page 129.Mail list display You can set items to be displayed on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list by using radio buttons or check boxes.Select a display formatl()
234MailMessage display You can set whether to display received mail in standard display (from the top) or from the text.Standard or From messageMail security See page 142.Secret mail display See page 142.Auto color label You can specify the text color of the sender, received date/time and others on the Inbox list by mail address. You can store up to 10 items.<Not stored>Select an item.Phonebook  . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Sent address . . . . . . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Received address. . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.pTo change the set color, press i( ) and select “Select color”.pTo delete the set item, press i( ) and select “Delete”→ “Delete this” or “Delete all” and select “YES”. If you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.Select a color.Pred. conv. at reply You can set whether to preferentially display the words contained in the subject and text of the received mail message as conversion candidates when you reply to, reply with quote to, or forward it.ON or OFFHeader/signature See page 235.Set check new messageYou can select items to be checked from among i-mode mail, Message R and Message F, for when you perform “Check new message”.Put a check mark for the items to be checkedl()Item Operation/ExplanationAuto-display See page 236.Receiving display You can set whether to display the Message Receiving and Reception Result displays, even during operation of another function.Alarm preferred or Operation preferredAlarm preferred. . . .Prioritizes the Message Receiving and Reception Result displays when you have new mail.Operation preferred. . . .Prioritizes the display of the current operation when you have new mail.Receive option settingSee page 214.Attachment preferenceYou can set whether to receive the attached file with an i-mode mail message. The attached files for which you remove a check mark are held at the i-mode Center.(The file in excess of 100 Kbytes is held at the i-mode Center, even if you put a check mark for it.)Put a check mark for items to be receivedl()pPut a check mark for “Tool data” to receive Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, and bookmarks.pPut a check mark for “Other” to receive PC movies, document files, and files unsupported by the FOMA phone.Auto melody play You can set whether to play back the attached or pasted melodies automatically for when you display the text of received mail, or message R/F.ON or OFFPhoto auto display You can set whether to automatically display the photo (still image) received during a call.ON or OFFChat setting See page 242.Check settings You can check each of “Mail settings”.Item Operation/ExplanationInformation<Message display>pEven if “From message” is set, the message might not be displayed from the text depending on the number of characters in the text.
235MailYou can store a header, signature and quotation mark. Also, you can set whether to automatically paste the header or signature.1lMail settingsHeader/signatureDo the following operations.<Auto color label>pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail message already received does not change.<Set check new message>p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F by “Check new message”, change these settings to “ ”.<Auto melody play>pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies during Play Background regardless of the setting of “Auto melody play”.Header/SignatureInformationItem Operation/ExplanationHeader The header is the sentence such as greeting at the beginning of the text.Select the header fieldEnter a headerl()pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.pIf you do not want the header to be pasted automatically, select “Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 200 for adding a header by mail message.Signature The signature is your name and other information, placed at the end of the text.Select the signature fieldEnter a signaturel()pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted automatically, select “Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 200 for adding a signature by mail message.Quotation marks The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a quotation from received mail for when you reply to mail.Enter a quotation mark.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Message services automatically deliver information you want to your FOMA phone.When your FOMA phone is in the service area, it receives Messages R/F automatically from the i-mode Center.“ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” appears at the top of the display when a Message R/F is delivered.You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F.1When you receive a Message R/F, the “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” blinks and the message for receiving the Message R/F appears.After the message is received, the number of received mail messages and Messages R/F is displayed.pYou can display the Message R/F list by selecting “MessageR” or “MessageF”.pIf “Auto-display” is set to other than “OFF”, the contents of received Message R/F are displayed automatically. They are displayed for 15 seconds when “Mail/Msg. ring time” is set to 0 through 10 seconds, or for the specified duration plus 5 seconds when it is set to 11 seconds or longer.pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, “ ” or “ ” (see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.) Press Oo, highlight “ ” or “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Message R/F list.pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.InformationpYou can set decorations in a header and signature.pEven if you have put a check mark for “Insert”, the header and signature cannot be pasted when you compose i-mode mail for Photo-sending during a call or from a template or i-αppli.pYou cannot paste the header, signature, and quotation marks to Decome-Anime and SMS messages.<Receive Message R/F>Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
236Mail“ ” is added to “Message R/F” of i-mode menu.You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F received during standby.1lMail settingsAuto-displaySelect an option for automatic display.When unread Messages R/F are foundInformationpReceived Messages R/F are not automatically displayed while a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, while an i-αppli program is running, during Public Mode (Drive Mode), during Lock All, or during Personal Data Lock.pWhen the Messages R/F exceeds the maximum number of messages that can be saved, they are overwritten starting from the oldest one. Unread or protected Messages R/F are not overwritten.pWhen the FOMA phone cannot receive any more Messages R/F, “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” is displayed. Delete unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread Messages R/F or release protection.pWhen the icon “ (pink)” or “ (pink)” is displayed, the i-mode Center holds Messages R/F. When the icon “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” is displayed, the i-mode Center can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform “Check new message” to receive them.pAfter being displayed automatically, Messages R/F are still displayed as unread ones in the Message R/F list. However, if you scroll through the messages while they are being displayed automatically, they will be indicated as read.pMessages R/F for you are held at the i-mode Center in the following cases:・When the power is off ・During a videophone call・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area・During infrared data exchange ・While connecting to the FirstPass Center・During PushTalk communication ・During Omakase Lock・During iC communication ・During copy to microSD・While connecting to the Data Storage Center・When the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or unread messagesAuto-displayInformationpThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when “Mail security” is set for “Inbox”, or when “Mail security” is set for “MessageR” folder or “MessageF” folder.1lInboxMessageR or MessageFSelect a Message R/F to be displayed.pYou can display Messages R/F also by iMessage R/FMessageR or MessageF.pWhen you select an unread Message R/F, “ (pink)” changes to “ ”.pUse No to check other Messages R/F.pWhen the text of Message R/F is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Also, you can press m()/c() or </> to scroll page by page.■Message R/F list and Detailed Message R/F DisplayStatus of Message R/F“ ” appears when protection is set.<Display Message R/F>Reading Received Messages R/FDetailed Message R/F displayMessage R/F list(pink) Unread Message R/FRead Message R/FDetailed Message R/F displayMessage R/F list
237MailReceived date and timeThe list shows the time for the Message R/F received today, and shows the date for the Message R/F received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the Message R/F was received.SubjectThe data attached or pastedThe detailed display shows the data volume.Text of messageThe phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed by the name stored in the Phonebook.Valid melody fileValid image fileValid ToruCa fileMultiple attached filesMultiple pasted filesFile set with the UIM restrictionsFunction Menu of the Message R/F ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationProtect(Protect ON/OFF)You can protect a Message R/F not to be overwritten or deleted. You can protect up to 50 messages (Message R and Message F each).Protected messages are indicated by “ ”.Protect ON/OFFpTo release protection, perform the same operation.Protect(Unprotect all)Unprotect allYESSearch/sort(Sort)You can rearrange the displaying order.SortSelect a displaying order.Search/sort(Filter)You can display only Messages R/F that satisfy the condition.FilterSelect a displaying type.Search/sort(Display all)After you execute “Sort” or “Filter”, you can reset it and list all Messages R/F by “By date ↑”. Display allNo. of messages You can display the total number of Messages R/F stored in the FOMA phone, as well as the number of unread messages and protected messages.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for Messages R/F to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete read mails)You can delete all read Messages R/F.Delete read mailsYESDelete(DEL all frm folder)You can delete all Messages R/F.DEL all frm folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Search/sort>pTo return to the former status, execute “Display all”.pIf you close the list and re-open it, you can return to the list of all items.Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationProtect ON/OFF See page 237.Operate file(Save attached file)You can save attached or pasted files. (See page 217)Operate file(Save insert image)You can save the attached image and set it as the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or another display. (See page 209)Operate file(Save BG image)Save BG imageYESSelect a destination folder.Go to step 3 on page 182.
238MailThis service enables you to receive reports such as emergency earthquake alerts distributed from the Japan Meteorological Agency.pYou can receive Area Mail messages without i-mode contract.pYou need to set “Receive setting” to receive Area Mail messages.※See page 239 for “Receive setting” of Area Mail.pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:・During a call (voice call/videophone call)・During packet communication (i-mode communication, data communication, PushTalk communication)・During updating software programpYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases:・During Omakase Lock・During international roaming・During Self Mode※When you could not receive the messages by the reasons above, you cannot receive them again.Operate file(Save D-pictograph)You can save the all Deco-mail pictograms inserted into the text. (See page 228)Add to phonebook See page 96.Delete YESWhat is Emergency Alert “Area Mail”?Function menu Operation/ExplanationWhen you receive an Area Mail message, the ring tone for Area Mail sounds. The “Ring volume”, “Ring time”, and “Vibrator” settings follow those of “Mail”.When you receive an emergency earthquake alert, a dedicated buzzer (alarm) sounds, and the vibrator works to notify you. Further, the contents are automatically displayed. “Ring volume” is fixed to “Level 4”, and “Vibrator” is fixed to “Melody linkage”, so you cannot change their settings. You can use “Area mail settings” to set “Beep time”.Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the Inbox.1When an Area Mail message arrives, “ ” blinks and the message telling its arrival appears.pIf you press any key, the former display returns. pThe details of some Area Mail messages might be displayed when you receive them. To clear it, press Oo, r, or h.pSee page 218 for displaying Area Mail messages.Receiving Emergency Alert “Area Mail”Reception Result displayInformationpThe buzzer sounds when you receive an emergency earthquake alert with “Original” set to sound any of the following tones. When every setting is set to mute, the buzzer does not sound:・Mail volume ・Phone volume ・Alarm volume・VM tone ・Keypad soundpEven when “Vibrator” of “Original” is set to “OFF”, the vibrator works if you receive an emergency earthquake alert.pWhen you receive a new Area Mail message with 30 Area Mail messages saved, the read messages are overwritten from the oldest. When all 30 messages are not read, they are overwritten from the oldest one in order.pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are displayed or not depends on the setting by the Area Mail message provider.
239Mail1lArea mail settingsDo the following operations.<Area Mail Settings>Setting Emergency Alert “Area Mail”Item Operation/ExplanationReceive setting You can set whether to use Area Mail.Read exemption clause thoroughlyYes or NoReceive entry You can register Message IDs for the reports to be received other than emergency information. You can register up to 20 IDs.<New>Enter your Terminal Security CodeEnter a registration nameEnter a Message ID.pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it, press l(), and then enter your Terminal Security Code.pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters for a registration name, and enter 4 half-pitch characters for a Message ID.pYou can edit also by selecting “Edit” from the Function menu. Select “Delete this” to delete the Message ID, and select “Delete all” and enter your Terminal Security Code to delete all Message IDs.pYou cannot edit/delete “Emergency information”.Beep setting You can set whether to make the beep sound for when you receive an Area Mail message that beeps.ON or OFFpWhen you set “OFF”, the dedicated ring tone for Area Mail sounds.Beep time You can set the duration the beep sounds.Enter a beep time (seconds).pEnter it in two digit, from “01” through “30”.You can send or receive chat mail messages to and from multiple persons on a single display. To use Chat Mail, you need to store chat members. You can easily store them by creating chat groups.You can store up to six chat members including the user (yourself).1lChat maili()Chat member<Not recorded>Enter a mail address.pTo edit a stored member, select the member.pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone number only.pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.<Chat Mail>Using Chat MailStore Chat MembersChat Member listInformationpIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the member’s name and image are changed.Function Menu of the Chat Member ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit You can edit the mail address.Go to step 1 on page 239.
240MailRefer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Received Address, or Sent Address to enter it.Select an item.Phonebook  . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Sent address . . . . . . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Received address. . .  Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Change member(Chat group)You can store the members stored in a chat group as chat members.Chat groupGroup list or Member listGroup list. . . . . .You can select members by chat group.Member list . . . .You can select members from all the members stored in chat groups.pIf you select “Group list”, select a chat group.The members from the selected group are stored.pIf you select “Member list”, check the members you want to store and press l().pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the chat members.Change member(Mail group)You can store the mail addresses stored in Mail group as chat members.Mail groupSelect a Mail group.pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the chat members.Display setting You can check the chat member’s name, image, background color, and mail address.pYou can press No to switch members.pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is not displayed.Function menu Operation/Explanation1lChat mail2Oo()Enter characters.pYou can enter up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters.3Press l().The chat mail message is sent. The sent chat mail message is displayed at the top of the Chat Mail display. 4The display for receiving chat mail appears and a chat mail message is received.The received chat mail message is displayed at the top of the Chat Mail display. Repeat step 2 through step 4 to send and receive chat mail messages.5rYES or NOYES . . . . You can delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat” folder.NO . . . . . You do not delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat” folder.Chat Mail ends.pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h.pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are found, the confirmation display does not appear.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete all)Delete allYESExchange Chat Mail MessagesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChat Mail display
241Mail■Chat Mail displayImageThe image you have stored in Chat Group is displayed.Member nameThe chat member’s name store in the chat group is displayed. Also, the name is displayed with a specified background color.pWhen the name is not stored in the chat group, up to eight half-pitch characters from the beginning of the mail address are displayed. When the mail address is stored in the Phonebook, up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters from the beginning of the name are displayed.Broadcast markDisplayed when the chat mail message set with multiple addresses is received.(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member.(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat Member are found.Sent/Received date and timeThe date and time the chat mail message was sent/received are displayed. The time is displayed for the chat mail messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail messages sent/received until yesterday.TextThe text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of characters of the text to be displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters.If the text exceeds four lines,  is displayed and you can switch the pages by pressing No.pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history.pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is displayed in black. The text of the chat mail message failed to be sent is displayed in gray.Input boxEntered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the beginning by a factor of one line.Current Chat mailChat Mail historyIf you receive a chat mail message during standby, “ ” appears on the desktop.Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ); then Chat Mail starts up.InformationpThe communication fee for when you send chat mail messages to multiple chat members is the same as for sending a chat mail message to one member. (However, the data for the added address fields will involve a higher charge.)pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot execute Chat Mail.pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages, you cannot execute Chat Mail. Delete unnecessary mail messages or read unread mail messages, or release the protection and then operate.pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed.pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the “Chat” folder.pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is “チャットメール (chat mail)” (half-pitch characters).pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display contains the phone number, mail address, or URL, the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are not available. However, those functions will be available when Chat Mail is finished and chat mail message is brought up from the “Inbox” or “Outbox”.pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone for the chat mail message does not sound.If You Receive Chat Mail during StandbyInformationpMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the following cases:・When the sender’s address or destination address is stored in Chat Member or in a chat group・When the subject contains “チャットメール (chat mail)” (all full-pitch or all half-pitch characters)pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a member of a chat group other than Chat Member while Chat Mail is running, “ ” appears.
242MailIf you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that is not stored in Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete stored member and start Chat Mail.Select “YES”; then the current chat members are deleted and the sender’s mail address or chat group members are stored in Chat Member.If you start Chat Mail from the desktopThe sender’s mail address is stored in Chat Member. When the sender’s mail address has been stored in a chat group, the members in that chat group are stored in Chat Member. However, the mail address selected as the destination is only the mail address of the sender.If you start Chat Mail from Chat GroupThe chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All members of the group are selected as the destination.If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat GroupFunction Menu of the Chat Mail DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSend You can send the chat mail message.Select receiver From among chat members, you can select destination addresses to send the chat mail messages to.Put a check mark for destination addresses to send the messages tol()Chat member You can store chat members. (See page 239)Broadcast address You can check the destination addresses you have simultaneously sent a chat mail message to.pWhen there are destination addresses that are not stored in Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store them in Chat Member. If you store them in Chat Member, select “YES” and put a check mark for the destination addresses to be stored and press l().Reload You can receive chat mail messages that you could not automatically receive. If you receive a new chat mail message, the Chat Mail display is updated.View first line You can display the latest chat mail message.View last line You can display the oldest chat mail message.1lMail settingsChat settingDo the following operations.Delete read mails You can delete all the received read chat mail messages and sent chat mail messages including secret mail and chat mail messages failed to send.YESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Broadcast address>pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in Chat Member.Chat SettingItem Operation/ExplanationSound setting You can set a tone for when you send/receive a chat mail message on the Chat Mail display.Select a folderSelect a tone.pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail message comes in from a member not stored in Chat Member.Chat image You can set whether to display images on the Chat Mail display.ON or OFFUser setting You can set the name and image of the user (yourself).Select the name fieldEnter a user name.pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.pIf you do not change the user name, go to the next step.Select the image fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
243MailYou can store the mail addresses you want to exchange chat mail per group.By storing multiple members in a group, you can set them as chat members at a time.You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You can create up to five groups.1mPhonebookPhonebook settingsChat groupSelect a chat group to be stored.pWhen the selected chat group has any member, “ ” appears at the lower left of the display.If you press l( ), Chat group members are stored in Chat Member and Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 240.2Highlight <Not stored> and pressl().pIf you select a stored mail address, the Chat Group Address Confirmation display appears.3Enter a mail address.pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the Phonebook, and the image is stored in the Phonebook, the image is also set.pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone number only.When you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.+m-2-6<Chat Group>Creating Chat GroupChat Group listDetailed Chat Group displayFunction Menu of the Chat Group ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationActivate chat The members in the chat group are stored as chat members and Chat Mail starts.Go to step 2 on page 240.Edit group name Enter a chat group name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Reset group name You can reset the name of the chat group to the default.YESFunction Menu of the Detailed Chat Group Display/Chat Group Address Confirmation DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit You can edit the mail address.Go to step 3 on page 243.pYou can edit also by pressing l().Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it. Select an item.Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or mail address.Sent address  . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press Oo().Change member You can store members from a Mail group in the chat group.Mail groupSelect a Mail group.pIf you have already stored members in the chat group, the confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the members.Member setting You can set the member’s name and image. You can switch members by pressing No.Select the member name fieldEnter a member’s name.pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.pNot to change the member’s name, go to the next step.Select the picture fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
244MailYou can compose and send SMS messages. You can save up to 1,000 sent SMS messages including i-mode mail messages to the Outbox.pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from subscribers of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo. For the countries and overseas carriers available for the service, refer to the DoCoMo Global Service web page.pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 422)1lCompose SMS2Select the address fieldSelect an item.Phonebook  . . . . . . . . .  Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.Sent address . . . . . . . .  Select a phone number and press Oo().Received address. . . .  Select a phone number and press Oo().Enter address . . . . . . .  Enter a phone number.Only one address can be specified.pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including “+”).pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo, enter “+” (press and hold 0 for at least one second), “country code”, and “destination mobile phone number” in that order. When the mobile phone number begins with “0”, enter the phone number except for the “0”. Also, you can enter “010”, “country code”, and “destination mobile phone number” in that order to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS messages received from overseas, enter “010”.)3Select the text fieldEnter text.pThe number of characters you can enter differs depending on the “SMS input character”.Delete YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES<Compose SMS>Composing SMS Messages to SendFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSMS Composition displayAddress fieldText field4Press l().The animation display during transmission appears and mail is sent.5OKInformationpDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be sent successfully to the destination.pWhen the number of sent mail messages exceeds the maximum number of storage, they will be overwritten starting from the oldest sent mail. However, protected sent mail cannot be overwritten.pYou cannot compose an SMS message when the number of sent mail messages in the Outbox has reached the maximum and those messages are all protected, or when 20 mail messages are saved to the Draft or the Draft is full.Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages, and then operate again.pEven if “Activate” of “Caller ID notification” is set to “OFF”, the caller ID is notified to the other party you send an SMS message to. If you attempt to send an SMS message to the phone number headed by “184”/“186”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail.pIf you set “SMS report request” to “ON”, you cannot send SMS messages to the i-mode phone of the mova service.p“+” is valid only at the beginning of the address.pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include any characters other than numbers, “_”, “#” and “+”.pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text.pThe special symbols (see page 506) are replaced by half-pitch spaces.pEach space is counted as a character.pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is User unset/PublicPhone/Unavailable.pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages.
245MailYou can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages including i-mode mail messages.pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 422)1When an SMS message arrives, “ (pink)” lights and the receiving message is displayed.When receiving ends, the display shows the number of received SMS messages.pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 125) appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.) Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.pSee page 32 for when the FOMA phone is closed.Function Menu of the SMS Composition DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSend You can send the SMS message.Go to step 5 on page 244.Preview Before sending, you can check the address and the text contents.pPress l( ) to send the SMS message.Save You can save the SMS message you are composing or editing to the Draft.pYou cannot save the message when the address field and text field are blank.SMS report req. See page 246.SMS valid. per. See page 246.SMS input char. See page 247.<Receive SMS>Receiving SMS Messages AutomaticallyReception Result display1Reception Result displayMailSelect an SMS message to be displayed.pPress and hold No for at least one second from the detailed SMS display to change the size of characters. (See “Mail” on page 129)InformationpWhen the number of unread or protected messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum, no new messages can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed. To receive SMS messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or release protection until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new SMS”.Display Newly Received SMS MessagesInformationpDepending on the characters entered in the received SMS message, spaces might be displayed.pWhile the sender’s address (phone number) is highlighted in the displayed SMS message, you can press +Oo( ) to make a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call to the displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function). Further, if the sender’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the stored “name” is highlighted. In this case, you can dial the phone number in the same way.pA Short Mail message is received as an SMS message on the FOMA phone. When the sender does not notify you of the phone number, the reason is displayed in the sender’s field.
246MailWhen SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are automatically sent to your FOMA phone, but will be held at the SMS Center if your FOMA phone cannot receive messages such as when it is off or out of the service area.You can receive the messages by “Check new SMS”.1lCheck new SMS2ReturnIf the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA phone automatically receives them.<Check New SMS>Checking whether Center Holds SMS MessagesInformationpSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after checking.pWhen “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”, etc. are displayed, you cannot receive any more SMS messages. Delete unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release protection. (Read and unprotected messages are overwritten automatically from the oldest one.)pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Use “Check new message” to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F.You can set whether to request an SMS report for when sending an SMS message.The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was delivered to the destination.You can check received SMS reports in the “Inbox” folder.1lSMS settingsSMS report requestON or OFFpWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an SMS message sent but unsuccessfully delivered due to the out-of-service area, etc.1lSMS settingsSMSvalidity periodSelect a holding period.pIf you select “None”, the stored SMS message is re-sent after a certain period of time and deleted from the SMS Center.pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.<SMS Settings>Setting SMSSMS Report RequestSMS Validity Period
247MailYou can set the characters you can enter into the text of SMS messages. You can set to enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and half-pitch symbols.1lSMS settingsSMS input characterSelect an item.Japanese (70char.) . . .You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You cannot enter pictographs except “ ” and “ ” (see page 502). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text.English (160char.) . . . .You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up to 160 characters for the text.pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.You can set the address and “Type of number” for the SMS Center. This setting is for getting any service other than SMS Service you currently use.1lSMS settingsSMS center selectionUser settingEnter an addressInternational or UnknownpYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters for the address. However, if “:” or “#” is included, you cannot set it for “International”.pYou can reset User Setting to “DoCoMo” by ResetEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES.You can send mail messages or browse received mail messages on the i-mode site.pYou can use only in B Mode or Dual Mode of 2in1.pFor details on Web mail, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [2in1]”.1lWeb mailOperate following the instructions on the display.SMS Input CharacterSMS Center Selection※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.<Web Mail>Using Web Mail
248
249i-αppliWhat is i-αppli?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  250Downloading i-αppli from Sites  . . . . . . . . .<i-αppli Download> 250Starting i-αppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<i-αppli Run> 251Setting i-αppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iαppli Settings> 261Starting i-αppli Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  262Operating i-αppli Stand-by Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<i-αppli Stand-by Display> 263Displaying i-αppli Data Files on the microSD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iαppli(microSD)> 264
250i-αppliBy downloading i-αppli from i-mode sites, you can use the FOMA phone more convenient. You can use the i-αppli which enables you to directly store the data into the Phonebook or Schedule, or the i-αppli which links to Data Box, enabling you to save or obtain images.Also, as the large capacity mega i-αppli is supported, you can enjoy playing high-resolution 3D games and full-length role playing game.pFor details on i-αppli, refer to the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.You can download software programs from sites to the FOMA phone. You can save up to 100 files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume because the memory space is shared with other data files. (See page 537)1Bring up an i-αppli downloadable siteSelect a software program.2Select “OK” when downloading ends.pSee page 186 when i-αppli programs are stored to the maximum.pWhen downloading ends, the display for Software Setting (Network Set, Stand-by Set, Location Usage, or Program Guide Key) might appear. These settings can be done also from the Software list.3YES or NOYES . . . . Starts i-αppli.NO . . . . . Returns to the site display.What is i-αppli?<i-αppli Download>Downloading i-αppli from SitesWhen you press r or h to suspend downloading an i-αppli program of 100 Kbytes or more, or when downloading is suspended by the radio wave conditions, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the confirmation display asking whether to save the file downloaded halfway. Select “YES” to partially save the file.You can re-download the rest of the partially saved i-αppli program from the Software list.An i-αppli mail folder is created automatically each in the Inbox/Outbox Folder list, and the title of the downloaded mail-linked i-αppli becomes the name of the folder.pYou can save up to five mail-linked i-αppli programs.pYou cannot download the software program if the mail-linked i-αppli using the same folder is already in the Software list.pYou cannot download mail-linked i-αppli while Mail Security is set.pYou cannot download mail-linked i-αppli if the Inbox/Outbox Folder list contains five i-αppli mail folders.pWhen re-downloading mail-linked i-αppli whose folder only remains, the confirmation display appears asking whether to use the existing i-αppli mail folder. If you select “YES”, the existing folder is used. If you select “NO” because you do not use it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete an existing folder and create a new one. You cannot download mail-linked i-αppli without creating a new folder.When downloading is suspendedWhen you downloaded mail-linked i-αppliInformationpYou can download pre-installed i-αppli programs from the “P-SQUARE” site (Japanese only).iMenu→メニュー/検索 (Menu/Search)→ケータイ電話メーカー (Mobile Phone Maker)→P-SQUAREpDownloading is not available from some accessed sites.QR code for accessing the site
251i-αpplipSome i-αppli programs can automatically connect to the i-mode Center after they are downloaded. However, to use this service, you need to set it in advance in “Software setting (Network set)”.p“ ” appears at the top of the display while software information or a software program is being downloaded from SSL pages.pAt downloading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM”. Select “YES” to start downloading. In this case, the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM” is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation.pIf you attempt to re-download the software program that was downloaded using a different UIM, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite the software program. With the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli, the confirmation display appears telling that the data on the IC card is to be deleted. Select “YES” to start downloading. When downloading ends, the software program that was downloaded using a different UIM and the data on the IC card are deleted.pYou cannot download some software programs while the IC card function is working or IC Card Lock is activated.pSome software programs that start immediately after downloading cannot be saved.pDepending on the data volume on the IC card, you might not be able to download Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli even if there is still available space for software storage. Delete the displayed software programs following the confirmation display, and then download it again. (Some software programs might not be targeted for deletion, depending on the software type to be downloaded.)Depending on the software program, you need to start it and delete the files on the IC card before deleting the software program itself.pYou can save up to 1 Mbyte per i-αppli program.p“i-αppli mail” is the mail sent and saved by mail-linked i-αppli and mail received as mail-linked i-αppli. i-αppli mail is automatically saved to the i-αppli mail folder.pThe 3D polygonal※ engine enables cubic images to be displayed in i-αppli.※By combining polygons, a deep, cubic image is displayed.InformationYou can display software information when downloading i-αppli.1mi-αppliiαppli settingsDisp. software infoDisplay or Not display1i(for at least one second)Select a software program to be started.: GPS compatible i-αppli: Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli: Management information i-αppli: microSD card compatible i-αppli: Vertical full display compatible i-αppli: Horizontal display compatible i-αppli (incompatible with full display): Horizontal full display compatible i-αppli: i-αppli DX: Mail-linked i-αppli: Partially saved i-αppli: Set for Auto Start: Set for the i-αppli Stand-by display: Set for both Auto Start and the i-αppli Stand-by display: Can set for the i-αppli Stand-by display: Downloaded from an SSL page: Downloaded or upgraded by using a different UIMDisplay Software Info<i-αppli Run>Starting i-αppliSoftware list
252i-αpplipYou can display the Software list on the microSD card by mi-αppliiαppli(microSD)SW list(microSD).pEach time you press c( ) from the Software list in the FOMA phone, the display format changes.pWhen you start an i-αppli DX program or while it is running, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to permit the i-αppli DX program to use the FOMA phone’s information and functions.pWhen you start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli program for the first time, the confirmation display appears asking whether to make the UIM and IC card compatible. The UIM information that has been made compatible is saved on the IC card as IC owner information.pWhen you select a partially saved i-αppli program, you can download the remaining part of it.p“” or “” is displayed while an i-αppli program is running.pTo end i-αppli, press and hold r for at least one second or press h; then select “YES”.pThe software program you started last time comes at the top of the list. You cannot manually change the order of software programs.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.pYou cannot display the Software list even when you press and hold i for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display.InformationpWhen a software program to be started is not specified, select a software program.pTo start up i-αppli DX, set the data and time by “Set time” beforehand.pWhen a software program is running, melodies are played back at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. However, melodies are not played back during a call.pYou may need to set the communication setting while a software program is running.pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a certain period of time while an i-αppli program is running, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue communicating.pWith some software programs, you can use the Web To function and the Phone To/AV Phone To function from i-αppli. However, you cannot use them while the software program is running as the i-αppli Stand-by display.pIf you start the camera from i-αppli, the shot images are not saved with ordinary images, but are saved as part of i-αppli for its usage.pIf you start the camera from i-αppli, you can specify the image size or image quality for some i-αppli programs.pYou can scan QR codes and JAN codes from i-αppli using the camera. The scanned data is saved and used by the software program.pImages※ that are used by i-αppli and data you have entered might be sent over the Internet to the server automatically.※i-αppli uses the following types of images:・Images shot by the camera after it is started from a camera-linked application program・Images obtained by the infrared data exchange function of i-αppli・Images downloaded from sites or Internet web pages・Images obtained from Data Box by i-αpplipi-αppli mail running under mail-linked i-αppli might not be displayed correctly.pSome i-αppli programs save the various information used on the i-αppli programs when you end them. However, the information might not be saved if the low battery alarm sounds or the battery pack is removed while the i-αppli program is running. If the battery level indicates “”, either press -h or end the i-αppli program in accordance with the operation of each software program.pYou can save the data files of some software programs to the microSD card, but you might not be able to use them for another model. You can check “iαppli(microSD)” for the software programs that use the microSD card. pSome IPs (Information Providers) may access the software program stored in your mobile phone and have it directly halted, depending on the software program. In that case, you will not be able to start or upgrade the software program, or use it for the Stand-by display. You can delete it or display the software information. To resume running the software program, you need to receive the communication to cancel the software halting state. Contact the IP (Information Provider) to inquire about that.pSome IPs (Information Providers) might send data to the software program stored in your mobile phone depending on the software program.pWhen the IP (Information Provider) requests to halt or re-open the software program or sends data to it, the mobile phone communicates and “” is displayed. In this case, you are not charged a communication fee.pTo creators of i-αppliIf you encounter an error while creating a software program, the Trace Information display might help identify the problem.For how to check the trace information, see “Trace Information” on page 253.Information
253i-αppliThe FOMA phone supports “motion tracking” which operates i-αppli programs (by inclining or swinging the FOMA phone) through the recognition technology of the inside camera.pIt might not work in the following cases:・When the lens of the inside camera is dirty・When the clothes you are wearing are similar to the background・When the background is not stable such as when you are moving・When you are in a dark or too bright placeYou can check the details when a software program malfunctions.1mi-αppliiαppli infoTrace infopWhen the memory space for Trace Info becomes full, the information is overwritten from the oldest one.pYou can operate “Copy info” and “Delete info” from the Function menu.You can check the details when an i-αppli program ends because of a security error.1mi-αppliiαppli infoSecurity error historypYou can operate “Copy info” and “Delete info” from the Function menu.pYou can display the security error history also by selecting “” on the desktop.Motion trackingInformationpThis application program is the game played by inclining or swinging the FOMA phone. If you excessively swing your FOMA phone, it might happen that it hits against persons or objects, resulting in accidents or damage. When playing the game, securely take hold of your FOMA phone, do not swing to an extent more than necessitated, and check around you for safety.Trace InformationSecurity Error HistoryFunction Menu of the Software ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSet iαppli To You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to start from a link on site or mail message. You can set also for when you place the FOMA phone over an IC card compatible scanning device. You can set this for each software program.Put a check mark for items to be setl()pSome items might not be set depending on the software program.Auto start time See page 262.Software setting(Stand-by set)See page 263.Software setting(Network set)You can set whether to communicate while an i-αppli program is running.Network setON, OFF or Check every startl()pIf you select “Check every start”, the confirmation display appears each time you start the i-αppli program.Software setting(Stand-by net)See page 263.Software setting(Icon info)You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to use information of icons indicating i-mode mail, SMS messages, Messages R/F, battery level, Manner Mode, and within/out-of service area.Icon infoON or OFFl()Software setting(Hor. open menu set)You can set the i-αppli program for when it starts by selecting “i-αppli” on the Horizontal Open Menu.Hor. open menu setON or OFFl()Software setting(Change mld./img.)You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to change the setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc. This function is available only for i-αppli DX programs.Change mld./img.ON, OFF or Check every changel()pIf you select “Check every change”, the confirmation display appears each time the i-αppli program tries to change the setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc.
254i-αppliSoftware setting(See P. book/hist.)You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to refer to the Phonebook, Redial, and Received Calls. This function is available only for i-αppli DX programs.See P. book/hist.ON or OFFl()Software setting(View ToruCa)You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to refer to ToruCa files. This function is available only for i-αppli DX programs.View ToruCaON or OFFl()Software setting(Location usage)You can set whether to permit the i-αppli program to use location information. This function is available only for i-αppli DX programs.Location usageON or OFFl()Software setting(Program guide key)You can set the software program for the Program Guide i-αppli that starts up from 1Seg. You can set this only for the i-αppli DX program that links to 1Seg.Program guide keyON or OFFl()Software info You can display the software name, version, and others of the i-αppli program.Upgrade YESAdd desktop icon See page 127.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for software programs to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESMove to microSD See page 361.Move to phone See page 361.Power saver You can set whether to validate Power Saver Mode for each i-αppli program for when “αPower saver” is set to “ON”.ON or OFFFunction menu Operation/ExplanationThe confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the i-αppli mail folder as well. If you do not delete it, you can check the text of mail from the Outbox/Inbox list.YES. . . . . .  Deletes both the software program and the i-αppli mail folder.NO. . . . . . . Deletes the software program only and the i-αppli mail folder is left.Cancel. . . .  Does not delete both the software program and i-αppli mail folder; the former display returns.pYou can delete neither the i-αppli program nor the i-αppli mail folder even if you select “YES”, in the following cases:・While Mail Security is set ・While the folder is set with security・While displaying details of the folder ・When the folder contains protected mailInformation<Software setting (Icon info)>pWhen you set “Software setting (Icon info)” to “ON” for the i-αppli Stand-by display, the icon information for unread mail/message, battery level, Manner Mode, radio wave strength and out-of-service area can be sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet in the same way as the serial number of your mobile phone/UIM, and can be deciphered by third parties.pWhen the software program needs “Software setting (Icon info)”, the software program might not run if “OFF” is selected.<Upgrade>pDepending on the software program, you can upgrade it at start.pAt upgrading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM”. Select “YES” to start upgrading. In this case, the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM” is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation.pYou cannot upgrade the mail-linked i-αppli in the following cases:・While details of the corresponding i-αppli mail folder are displayed・While Mail Security is set・When Mail Security is set for the corresponding i-αppli mail folderWhen you delete mail-linked i-αppli
255i-αppliThe confirmation display appears asking whether to delete files on the microSD card as well.YES . . . . . . Deletes both the software program and files on the microSD card. Press “YES” again on the confirmation display. You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to execute “Delete” or “Delete selected”. NO. . . . . . . Deletes the software program only and the files are left.Cancel. . . . Does not delete both the software program and files on the microSD card, and the former display returns.The confirmation display appears telling that the files on the IC card will be deleted.pYou cannot delete the “iD設定アプリ (iD Setting Application)”.pYou might not be able to delete the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli while the IC card function is working or IC Card Lock is set.The following i-αppli programs are pre-installed:pYou can delete the pre-installed i-αppli programs except for “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)”. You can re-download them from the “P-SQUARE” site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them.pDeadlines for re-download services・“ガンダム U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079)”: the end of April, 2012・“レイトン教授と不思議な町 (Professor Layton and the Curious Village)”: the end of April, 2012・“カウントダウントレインGPS (Countdown Train GPS)”: the end of April, 2011・“日英版/日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)”: the end of April, 2012pThe re-download service might be halted or closed without notice even in the service period.pDeadlines for downloading i-αppli additional data・“ガンダム U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079)”: the end of April, 2012・“レイトン教授と不思議な町 (Professor Layton and the Curious Village)”: the end of April, 2012・“カウントダウントレインGPS (Countdown Train GPS)”: the end of May, 2011・“日英版/日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)”: the end of May, 2012When you delete an i-αppli program whose files are on the microSD cardWhen you delete Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppliPre-installed i-αppli ProgramsThe Gundam is now appearing in your mobile phone. Operate the Gundam and then break through heated battles.1Software listガンダム U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079)OoOoOoWhen you activate this i-αppli program in Normal Style, the confirmation display appears telling that you are advised to play the game in Horizontal Open Style.2Confirm to upgrade to the complete versionYES or NOOoYES  . . .Connects to the site and upgrade to the complete versionNO  . . . .Not upgrade to the complete versionpYou are charged a packet communication fee for when you connect to the site or upgrade to the complete version.pThe complete version data is saved to the microSD card.pYou can upgrade to the complete version also from the menu.pYou cannot carry over the previous data when you upgrade to the complete version.pIf you put a check mark for “次回起動時から表示しない (Does not show this display from the next start-up.)”, the confirmation whether to upgrade to the complete version is not made when you start the program next time.3Select a menu.TIME ATTACK  . . . Challenges how fast you can shoot down a certain number of enemy airplanesSURVIVAL. . . . . . . Challenges how many enemies that appear one after another you can shoot downHELP . . . . . . . . . . . For displaying how to operate the gameOPTION . . . . . . . . . For selecting a key operation type and setting the volume level or vibratorUP GRADE  . . . . . . Connects to the site and upgrade to the complete versionQUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . For ending the application programガンダム U.C.0079 (Gundam U.C.0079)
256i-αppliThis is the transplanted version of an adventure puzzle game, which was a huge hit for game consoles.© LEVEL-5 INC.1Software listレイトン教授と不思議な町 (Professor Layton and the Curious Village)0When you activate this i-αppli program in Normal Style, the confirmation display appears telling that you are advised to play the game in Horizontal Open Style.2Select a menu.はじめから (From the beginning) . . .Start the game from the beginningオプション (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .For setting the volume level or vibratorアップグレード (Upgrade) . . . . . . . . .Upgrade to the complete versionpYou are charged a packet communication fee for when you upgrade to the complete version.pThe complete version data is saved to the microSD card.“Mobile Google Map” is the convenient i-αppli program that enables you to get town information visually. You can easily search for information about areas or shops using the map. You can switch to the aerial photos as well.pYou need to agree with “利用規約 (Usage rules)” for the first time.pYou are separately charged a packet communication free.レイトン教授と不思議な町(Professor Layton and the Curious Village)Mobile Google MapYou can download the time schedule of trains, and can count down the departure time of the train you want to catch on a minute/second basis. The alarm function is also provided to notify you of 5 to 30 minutes before the departure. You can update the time schedule from the menu so the latest one is always available. Further, you can search for the nearest station using the GPS function.pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using.pFor details, refer to “ヘルプ (Help)” in the menu.Powered by JR Travel Navigator1Software listカウントダウントレイン-P (Countdown Train-P)2Read “免責事項 (Exemption clause)” thoroughlyi()はい (YES)3l()最寄駅検索(GPS) [Search the nearest station (GPS)] or 駅名入力検索 (Search by entering station name)最寄駅検索(GPS) [Search the nearest station (GPS)]. . . .  Measures your current location and searches the surroundings for a station.駅名入力検索 (Search by entering station name). . . . Enter a station name, and press i(). You do not need to enter the whole station name.4Select a station nameSelect a line and directioni()はい (YES)カウントダウントレインGPS (Countdown Train GPS)
257i-αppliJust by speaking a phrase to be translated into your FOMA phone, this application program translates it from Japanese to English or Chinese and vice versa.pYou can use all the functions charge free for 60 days from when you start using this application program. The phrases available for translation are restricted from the 61st day after. To use all the services, you need to register My Menu (charged) from the “しゃべって翻訳 (Speech Translation)” site by ATR-Trek Co., Ltd. [(How to access: iMenu→メニュー/検索 (Menu/Search)→辞書/便利ツール (Dictionary/Convenient Tool)→便利ツール (Convenient Tool)→しゃべって翻訳 (Speech Translation)]pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using.© ATR-Trek1Software list日英 しゃべって翻訳_P (J-E Speech Translation_P) or 日中 しゃべって翻訳_P (J-C Speech Translation_P)SKIPpSelect “日英 しゃべって翻訳_P (J-E Speech Translation_P)” for using English version, or select  “日中 しゃべって翻訳_P (J-C Speech Translation_P)” for using Chinese version.2Read “しゃべって翻訳とは (What is Speech Translation?)” and “ご利用規約 (Usage rules)” thoroughly同意する (Agree)pYou need to agree with “ご利用規約 (Usage rules)” for the first time.3Read “ご利用注意事項 (Cautions in use)” thoroughlyOKはい (YES)pIf you select “いいえ (NO)”, “しゃべって翻訳とは (What is Speech Translation?)”, “ご利用規約 (Usage rules)”, and “ご利用注意事項 (Cautions in use)” do not appear when you start the program next time.4はい (YES)OKp“iアプリの使い方 (How to use i-αppli)” appears at the first startup.日英版/日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P(J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)The display is for English version.5Select a menu item.日→英 翻訳 (Translate Japanese to English) . . .Start to translate Japanese to English.英→日 翻訳 (Translate English to Japanese) . . .Start to translate English to Japanese.日→中 翻訳 (Translate Japanese to Chinese) . . .Start to translate Japanese to Chinese.中→日 翻訳 (Translate Chinese to Japanese) . . .Start to translate Chinese to Japanese.シーンを変更 (Change scene) . . .You can select the scene to translate.pPress i to switch between Japanese and English or Chinese.By using the GPS function and map, you can check the map for where you are currently in or for the place you specify, or check your nearby area for details. You can then navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car. Further, you can easily get train information by voice input. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to use Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for using this software program.pIf you delete this software program and then when you want to resume it, download it from “iエリアー周辺情報ー (i-area -Local Information-)”.pThis software program is the i-αppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and promptness of the map and route information.pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver operates this application program.pSee page 279 for details on operations.地図アプリ (Map Application)
258i-αppli“楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)” enables you to easily exhibit your goods on Rakuoku whenever you want wherever you are. Even if you are a beginner, an instruction guides you through exhibition procedures, so you can use it easily. The convenient functions such as shooting/editing photos and saving records are available so that you can exhibit your goods in a shorter time than you do on sites.pYou need to agree with “利用規約 (Usage rules)” for the first time.pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.pFor details on Rakuoku, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pTo exhibit on Rakuoku, you need to register with the Rakuten membership and exhibitor membership.pFor the information about Rakuoku, refer to i-mode site.i-mode site: iMenu→楽オク -オークション- (Rakuoku -Auction-)楽オク出品アプリ2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)※The display is for reference.The actual one may differ.QR code for accessing the siteThis is an i-αppli program that enables you to conveniently use mobile banking. Mobile banking enables you to use your FOMA phone to check the account balance, check the deposits/withdrawals, and transfer/shift money whenever you want and wherever you are. By entering your specified password at the start of this application program, you can use the mobile banking services for up to two banks. pTo use mobile banking, you need to have the bank account and subscribe to the mobile banking service of each bank.pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.pFor details on i-αppli Banking, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pFor the information about i-αppli Banking, refer to i-mode site.i-mode site: iMenu→メニュー/検索 (Menu/Search)→モバイルバンキング (Mobile Banking)→iアプリバンキング (i-αppli Banking)iアプリバンキング (i-αppli Banking)※The display is for reference.The actual one may differ.QR code for accessing the site
259i-αppliThis is an i-αppli program that bundles the TV program list and AV remote-controller function and the monthly charge is free.Anytime and anywhere you are, you can easily obtain the terrestrial digital, terrestrial analog or BS digital TV program information for the desired time zone. You can know about titles, contents, and start/end times of TV programs. Further, you can start a 1Seg program from the program list and vice versa.If there is any program you want to watch, you can set timer recordings of the program on a DVD recorder, etc. over the Internet. (You need to have a DVD recorder, etc. that supports the remote timer recording function. And you need to perform initial settings of this application program.) Further, you can search for the program information by keywords such as program genres or celebrities you like, or pickup keywords on the top of the display. You can also remote-control a TV, video recorder, and DVD player. (Some models are not supported.)pSee “Using Infrared Remote-controller Function” on page 371 for details on the infrared remote-controller.pYou need to make the initial settings and to agree with the usage rules for the first time.pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.pTo use this application program overseas, set the time for the FOMA phone to Japan time.pFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pYou cannot delete “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)”.pThis software program is the i-αppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.You can select and book a program you want to watch from the program list of this application program.How to book a program1. Software listGガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)Highlight a program to be booked and press i()視聴予約 (Book program)予約実行 (Execute booking)Operate following the instructions on the display.Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)About program booking function※The display is for reference.The actual one differs.Local programs according to your region appear on your display.You can select a program you want to record and set a timer recording from the program list of this application program.How to set a timer recording1. Software listGガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)Highlight a program to be set for a timer recording and press i()♯ワンセグ録画予約 (1Seg timer recording)予約実行 (Execute booking)Operate following the instructions on the display.(You can set a timer recording also by highlighting a program and pressing s.)If you have a DVD recorder, etc. that supports the remote timer recording function, you can set timer recordings from the program list of this application program over the Internet even if you are away. For remote timer recording, you need to make initial settings of this application program.How to make initial settings1. Set the Internet connection for the DVD recorder, etc.(Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD recorder, etc. you use.)2. Software listGガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)i()リモート録画予約 (Remote timer recording)Operate following the guidance.How to set timer recordingsAfter the initial settings, specify your desired program and select “リモート録画予約 (Remote timer recording)”. Then, the DVD recorder, etc. specified on this application program is connected via the Internet, and you can set timer recordings.pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.About timer recording functionAbout remote timer recording function
260i-αppliChargeless electronic money “iD” is a service that enables you to do shopping by placing your Osaifu-Keitai or a credit card with “iD” mounted over a scanning device. You can do shopping easily and conveniently without signing. Depending on the card publishing company, cashing is also supported.pFor using “iD”, you need to subscribe to a card publishing company that supports “iD” as well as to have Osaifu-Keitai on which specified settings have been completed by the iD application program and card application program provided by the card publishing company, or a credit card on which “iD” is mounted.pWhen you use “iD” on Osaifu-Keitai, you need to complete iD application settings and then make settings at the card application end by downloading or starting the card application provided by your card publishing company. Depending on the card you use, you might be able to use iD only with the settings at the card application end without any iD application settings.pThe expense (annual fees, etc.) charged for the iD service differs depending on the card publishing company.pFor the information about “iD”, refer to the i-mode site of “iD”.i-mode site: iMenu→メニューリスト (Menu List)→「iD」iD設定アプリ (iD Setting Application)※The display is for reference.The actual one may differ.QR code for accessing the site“DCMX” is a credit service that supports “iD” and offered by NTT DoCoMo Group. DCMX provides DCMX mini that enables you to use up to ¥10,000 per month and respective DCMX/DCMX GOLD services that enable you to use more amount and save up DoCoMo points.With “DCMX mini”, you can easily make a subscription from this application program and immediately use Mobile Phone Credit.※1 The online screening is conducted at your subscription for DCMX mini. For subscribing to a service other than “DCMX mini”, you are connected to the subscription page for i-mode.※2 You might be required to enter your pin number under certain conditions.※3 Only for DCMX mini, you can check usage status from the application program. For the other than “DCMX mini”, you can check it at the i-mode site.DCMXクレジットアプリ (DCMX Credit Application)※The display is for reference.The actual one may differ.Subscribing for membership/Screening ※1UseNo troublesome deposit is required!Just by placing the mobile phone with completing card information setting at a shop where the following iD mark is put up, you can enjoy shopping without signing※2.Check ※3You can check, on the application program, the service contents of DCMX, the balance for the current month, and detailed account!ChangeYou can perform setting when changing models, or updating your validity period from the application program.  Setting card information
261i-αpplipFor service contents and details of subscriptions, refer to the i-mode site of DCMX.・i-mode site: iMenu→DCMX iD“FOMA 通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application)” enables you to check whether the FOMA phone is available at the FOMA High-Speed Area.pUse “FOMA 通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application)” with your consent to “ご利用の注意 (Cautions in use)”.pDepending on the communication environment (such as weather, radio wave conditions, network congestion state) at communication environment check, the different result or “out of service” might appear even in the same area or at the same period of time.pYou might not be able to check correctly if you use another function while using this application program.QR code for accessing the siteInformationpTo start this application program for the first time, you need to agree with “ご利用上の注意 (Cautions in use)”.pYou are charged a packet communication fee for settings and operations. ■Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppliNote that we take no responsibility for any information set on your IC card.FOMA 通信環境確認アプリ(FOMA Communication Environment Check Application)※The display is for reference.The actual one may differ.1mi-αppliiαppli settingsDo the following operations.<iαppli Settings>Setting i-αppliItem Operation/ExplanationAuto start setting See page 262.Disp. software info See page 251.Preferred tone You can set which sound to be output preferentially, from MUSIC/1Seg or i-αppli program, for when you start an i-αppli program during music playback or use of 1Seg.MUSIC/1Seg or iαppliαBacklight You can set the backlight operation for when an i-αppli program is running.Select an item.Depend on system  . . . .Follows the setting of “Backlight”.Depend on software . . .Follows the setting of each software program.Constant light. . . . . . . . .Lights constantly.αPower saver You can set to Power Saver Mode to decrease battery consumption by suspending the i-αppli program temporarily for when you close the FOMA phone during i-αppli running.ON or OFFpThis setting is valid from when an i-αppli program starts until it closes.pEven when this function is set to “ON”, Power Saver Mode becomes invalid if “Power saver” that can be set for each i-αppli program is set to “OFF”.αVibrator You can set the vibrator operation for when an i-αppli program is running.Depend on system or Depend on softwareDepend on system  . . . .Does not work regardless of the setting of “Vibrator”. With some software programs, the vibrator works.Depend on software . . .Follows the setting of each software program.Check settings You can check each of “iαppli settings”.
262i-αppliYou can make an i-αppli program start automatically at the set date and time. Set the date and time for automatic start using Auto Start Time.You can set whether to enable automatic start of i-αppli programs.1mi-αppliiαppli settingsAuto start settingON or OFFYou can set the date and time for automatic start. You can set for up to three software programs.1Software listi()Auto start time2Put a check mark for an item to be setl()Time interval set . . . . Starts at an interval specified by the software program. The setting is completed.Start time set . . . . . . . Starts at the set start time automatically.3Select start timeEnter the date and time to be set.41 timeSelect a type of repeat.pIf you select “1 time”, the automatic start is not repeated.pIf you select “Weekly”, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l().Information<αBacklight> <αVibrator>pWith some software programs, the backlight and vibrator settings are “OFF”. Consequently, if you set “Depend on software”, the backlight and vibrator will not work; if you want them to work, set “Depend on system”.Starting i-αppli AutomaticallyAuto Start SettingAuto Start Time5Press l().You can check whether a software program has started automatically and properly. Also, you can check the information of start failure from IC card. Up to three records of automatic start, a record of automatic start set by i-αppli, and a record of start failure from IC card are stored.1mi-αppliiαppli infoAuto start infoStartO . . . . .Started automatically and properly.StartX  . . . . . Did not start automatically. When “ ” is displayed, you can press Oo( ) to start the software program.Start–. . . . . .Has not started yet.Auto Start InfoInformationpSoftware programs do not start automatically in the following cases:・When the FOMA phone is turned off・When the date and time are not set・When another function is working・During Lock All・During Personal Data Lock・During playback of animations/Flash movies・When the time set for automatic start is identical to the reserved time set for “Software update”, or the time set for an alarm of “Alarm”, “Schedule” or “ToDo”, “Book program” or “Timer recording”・When a start time has been specified to the same software program within 10 minutes from the previous auto-startpIf automatic start fails, “ ” appears on the desktop. Select the icon to bring up the Auto Start Info.
263i-αppliYou can set an i-αppli program for the Stand-by display. Once set, the i-αppli Stand-by display automatically appears each time you bring up the Stand-by display.1Software listi()Software settingStand-by setON or OFFl()“ ” is displayed for the software program set as the Stand-by display. “ ” or “ ” is displayed while an i-αppli Stand-by display is running.From the i-αppli Stand-by display, press r.“ ” or “ ” changes to a blinking “ ” or “ ” and then you can operate the i-αppli program as a normal one.pTo return to the i-αppli Stand-by display, press and hold r for at least one second or press h; then select “Ended”. To release the i-αppli Stand-by display, select “Terminated”, and select “YES”.<i-αppli Stand-by Display>Operating i-αppli Stand-by DisplaySoftware Setting (Stand-by Set)To operate an i-αppli program as a normal i-αppli program when an i-αppli Stand-by display is runningInformationpIf you turn off the FOMA phone while the i-αppli Stand-by display is running, the confirmation display appears asking whether to start the i-αppli program when you turn on the power again.pYou can set only one software program for the i-αppli Stand-by display.pSome i-αppli programs cannot be set for the Stand-by display.pWith some software programs set as the i-αppli Stand-by display, you can press a key to go from the normal i-αppli status to the i-αppli Stand-by display status. However, you cannot return to the i-αppli Stand-by display if another menu function is running.pNote that you might not be able to receive timely information if you have set “Software setting (Stand-by net)” to “OFF”.pYou cannot use the Web To function and the Phone To/AV Phone To function from the i-αppli Stand-by display.pIf the software program which connects to the network is set for the i-αppli Stand-by display, it might not operate successfully because of radio wave conditions or other factors.You can set whether to permit communication for when the i-αppli Stand-by display is running.1Software listi()Software settingStand-by netON or OFFl()You can temporarily end the running i-αppli Stand-by display. Also, you can release the i-αppli Stand-by display.1mSettingsDisplayDisplay settingStand-by displayEnd iαppli displayEnd or TerminatepWhen you select “Terminate”, select “YES”.pWhen you bring up the Stand-by display while a menu function is operating, the image set for “Stand-by display” of “Display setting” will be displayed, even when the i-αppli Stand-by display is set.pWhen communicating frequency is extremely high in a certain period of time while an i-αppli program is running as the i-αppli Stand-by display, the confirmation display appears. When you press -r, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue communication.pIf you set Lock All or Personal Data Lock when the i-αppli Stand-by display is shown, the i-αppli Stand-by display will end. If you set Lock All, the image set for “Stand-by display” of “Display setting” will be displayed and if you set Personal Data Lock, the default Stand-by display will be displayed. The i-αppli Stand-by display will return when you release each lock.Software Setting (Stand-by Net)InformationEnd Stand-by Display
264i-αppliWhen the i-αppli Stand-by display does not end successfully, you can check the date/time and its reason.1mi-αppliiαppli infoEnd stand-by infopWhen “ ” is displayed on the End Stand-by Info display, press i(), and select “Copy info” to copy the information. Select “Delete info”, and select “YES” to delete the information.Depending on the i-αppli program, you can save its data files on the microSD card. You can display the i-αppli data files saved on the microSD card.1mi-αppliiαppli(microSD)iαppli(microSD)End Stand-by Info<iαppli(microSD)>Displaying i-αppli Data Files on the microSD CardFunction Menu while i-αppli Data File is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFolder info You can display the information of the software program that uses the selected folder, available/unavailable for folder usage, and the reason if unavailable.Delete folder You can delete the selected folder and files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
265Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaWhat is Osaifu-Keitai?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  266What is iC Transfer Service?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  266Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-αppli. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <IC Card Content> 267Checking IC Owner Data in IC Card . . . . . . <Check IC Owner> 268What is ToruCa?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<ToruCa> 268Obtaining ToruCa Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Obtain ToruCa Files> 269Displaying ToruCa Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <ToruCa Viewer> 269How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display . . .  272Setting about ToruCa  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <ToruCa Settings> 274Locking IC Card Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <IC Card Lock> 275
266Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaThe convenient i-mode function which uses the IC card function of the i-mode phone (i-mode FeliCa), or the i-mode phone with the IC card mounted is called “Osaifu-Keitai”.FeliCa is one of the non-contact IC technologies that enables you to read and write data just by placing it over a scanning device.Just by placing Osaifu-Keitai over the scanning device in a shop, you can pay by electronic cash or use it as an air ticket or reward card. Mobile phones have become one of easy-to-use tools.Further, different from the existing FeliCa compatible non-contact IC card, the new one enables you to deposit electronic money by using the communication into the IC card inside the Osaifu-Keitai or to check your account for balance or usage details.※To use Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, you need to make the settings from i-αppli (IC application) program which supports the IC card function [for details, inquire of IP (Information Provider)].※For cautions on using each Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pData on the IC card might be lost or deformed owing to the malfunction of Osaifu-Keitai. (When we keep your Osaifu-Keitai for repair, we cannot keep it with data files left, so the data files shall be deleted beforehand by yourself as a rule.) Use the backup service of the IP (Information Provider) for supports such as reissue, restoration, temporary storage or transfer of data files, except for the data transfer by iC transfer service. The availability of backup services and their usage conditions (necessary applications, charges, etc.) and the support availability of iC transfer service differ depending on the service. Contact the IP (Information Provider) beforehand. For your important data files, be sure to use the service with backup support.pIn any case including malfunction or model change, we cannot be held responsible for the loss or deformation of data on the IC card or other losses caused regarding Osaifu-Keitai compatible services.pIf your Osaifu-Keitai has been stolen or lost, inquire of the provider for Osaifu-Keitai compatible service you use about ways of dealing with the trouble, immediately. With this FOMA phone, you can use Omakase Lock or IC Card Lock. (See page 135, and page 275)What is Osaifu-Keitai?iC transfer service※1 is the service for transferring the data files on the IC card at a time※2 to your new Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone※3 when you replace your Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone such as at the time of model change or malfunction. After completing the transfer of data files on the IC card, just download an Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli program, and then you can easily use the Osaifu-Keitai services.iC transfer service is available at the service counters such as a DoCoMo shop nearby.For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.※1 You are charged a handling fee for using iC transfer service. (You might not be charged at times.)In addition, you are charged a packet communication fee for downloading iC application programs and respective settings.※2 Some Osaifu-Keitai services are not supported. The services that are not supported are deleted when you use iC transfer service, so ensure that you use a back-up service for the Osaifu-Keitai services or delete them in advance.※3 iC transfer service is available when new Osaifu-Keitai mobile phone is iC transfer service compatible model.What is iC Transfer Service?
267Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaYou can start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli from the Software list. By using Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli, you can read/write the data inside the IC card and use convenient functions such as depositing electronic money or traffic tickets, or checking your account for the balance and usage details on the mobile phone.pTake care of your Terminal Security Code and password used for each service not to reveal to anyone.pWhen you start or download the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli program for the first time, the message “Use IC card for current UIM?” appears. When you select “YES”, you cannot use the IC card function afterward unless you insert the same UIM. To use the IC card function with another UIM, delete all the information on the IC card from “Change IC owner”, and then delete all the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs other than “iD設定アプリ (iD Setting Application)”. Otherwise, you cannot use it.pReading and writing data from the software program and to the IC card is suspended in the following cases:In that case, the read or written data is discarded. The operation after the communication ends differs depending on the service you use.・When a call comes in while an i-αppli program is running・When the battery goes flat1mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card contentThe list of the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli program is displayed. When you select the i-αppli program, it starts up.<IC Card Content>Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-αppliRead and Write Data inside the IC CardPlace the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA phone over the scanning device, and you can use the FOMA phone as electronic money to pay for shopping or to use it as a traffic ticket. This function is available without starting the software program.pDuring a call or i-mode connection, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the FeliCa mark over the scanning device, however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli.1Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA phone over the scanning device to use the target service.pThe Call/Charging indicator lights when you bring your FOMA phone close to a scanning device and communication becomes ready.Use Osaifu-KeitaiPlace the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA phone over the scanning device.InformationpMount the battery pack to use Osaifu-Keitai. Even when the power is turned off or when the battery has gone flat, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the FeliCa mark over the scanning device, however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli. You might not be able to use Osaifu-Keitai if you have left the battery unused for a long period or not charged it after the low battery alarm sounds. Charge the battery.pWhen the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA phone placed over the scanning device is not identified, slightly move the mark forwards, backwards, to left, or to right.pOsaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli might start when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device.
268Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaYou can check whether IC owner information for using the IC card is consistent with the information of the currently inserted UIM.1mOsaifu-KeitaiCheck IC ownerpWhen the UIM differs from the one for stored information, select “変更” and reset the data inside the IC card, and then you can store the UIM information. You can delete the data in IC card, and reset the IC owner data. After resetting, you can re-register by currently inserted UIM.pDelete all the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs other than “iD設定アプリ (iD Setting Application)” to delete the IC owner information. However, the i-αppli program with its data file on the IC card is not initialized, so you need to delete it separately.1mOsaifu-KeitaiChange IC ownerResetYESEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESToruCa is an electronic card that you can obtain with Osaifu-Keitai for use as fliers, restaurant cards, and coupon tickets. You can obtain ToruCa files from scanning devices or sites and can easily exchange them using mail, infrared ray, or a microSD card.The obtained ToruCa files are saved to “ToruCa” of “Osaifu-Keitai”.pAvailable on the ToruCa compatible model. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.<Check IC Owner>Checking IC Owner Data in IC CardChange IC Owner<ToruCa>What is ToruCa?■Flow for using ToruCa■Sources of ToruCa filesPlace your Osaifu-Keitai over a scanning device to obtain a ToruCa file.You can view more detailed information by using “詳細 (Details)” key.Scanning deviceSitei-αppliExchanges ToruCa files between i-mode phones.Mail, infrared data exchange, iC communicationQR codemicroSD card
269Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaYou can obtain the ToruCa file from a scanning device using the IC card function. By obtaining detailed information, a ToruCa file becomes a ToruCa file (details) which has more pieces of information.pFor a ToruCa file (details), you can download up to 100 Kbytes per file, and for a ToruCa file before obtaining the details, you can download up to 1 Kbyte per file.1Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA phone over the scanning device.A ToruCa obtained tone sounds, the Call/Charging indicator flickers.pWhen “Receiving display” is set to “ON”, detailed display of obtained ToruCa file appears.pFor a ToruCa file before obtaining detailed information, the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to a site to download detailed information. Select “YES” to display a ToruCa file (details) with detailed information obtained. Select “NO” to display a ToruCa file without detailed information.pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds or “Receiving display” is set to “OFF”, “” appears on the desktop. Press Oo, highlight  , and press Oo(); then the ToruCa File list appears.<Obtain ToruCa Files>Obtaining ToruCa FilesObtain from Scanning Device When the ToruCa file is obtainedIf you set “Auto reading” to “Accept” to use the ToruCa files by placing the FOMA phone over the scanning device, the available ToruCa files are automatically recognized. The used ToruCa files are converted into “Used” and then moved to the “Used ToruCa” folder. Up to 20 used ToruCa files are saved, and when the number of the files exceeds 20, the files are deleted from the one downloaded at the oldest date.pEven if “Auto reading” is set to “Reject”, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to use “Auto reading” when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device. To use ToruCa files, select “YES”, and then set “Auto reading” to “Accept”.You can display the ToruCa file obtained using the IC card function, or from sites or mail.1mOsaifu-KeitaiToruCaSelect a folder.pEach time you press m from the ToruCa Folder list, you can switch folders between the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pWhen the folder contains unread ToruCa files, “” appears.About Auto-reading Function of ToruCaInformationpWhen you fail to obtain a ToruCa file, the ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator lights.pA ToruCa obtained tone and a ToruCa failed-to-obtain tone sound at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”.pDepending on the settings by IPs (Information Providers), you might not be able to update ToruCa files or send them by mail or infrared rays.<ToruCa Viewer>Displaying ToruCa FilesToruCa Folder list
270Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa2Select a ToruCa file.A ToruCa file before obtaining detailed information itself does not show the detailed information. Select “詳細 (Details)” on the ToruCa file display and select “YES” to connect to the site to obtain more detailed information. After obtaining the detailed information, the ToruCa file is overwritten and saved.Detailed ToruCa File displayToruCa File listWhen obtaining detailed information from a ToruCa fileInformationpYou are charged the ordinary packet fee for obtaining.Function Menu of the ToruCa Folder ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationOperate folder(Add folder)You can create a user folder. You can create up to 20 folders.Add folderEnter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for the microSD card.Operate folder(Edit folder name)You can edit the folder name for the user folder.Edit folder nameEnter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the FOMA phone.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for the microSD card.Operate folder(Delete folder)All ToruCa files in the folder are deleted.Delete folderEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESSearch all folders You can search through all ToruCa files in the FOMA phone (except ToruCa files stored in the “Used ToruCa” folder) by specifying a search condition.Select a search condition.Genre . . . Select a genre.Press l( ) to display a list of category icons belonging to the genre.Title . . . . . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in the title.Index. . . . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in location data.pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index search.Function menu Operation/Explanation
271Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaAuto-sort You can set to automatically sort and save the ToruCa files that satisfy the conditions set to the folder for when you obtain them from a scanning device or automatically obtain them from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.Select a sorting condition.Genre  . . . . Put a check mark for the genre to sort into and press l( ). You can put it for multiple genres.Title . . . . . . Enter characters from those in the title, to be a sorting condition.Index . . . . . Enter characters from those in the location data, to be a sorting condition.Release. . . Select “YES” to release the sorting condition you specified.pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title sort, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index sort.pWhen a sorting condition is already specified for the folder, it is displayed. Press i( ) to set a sorting condition again.Copy(Copy to microSD)You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.Copy to microSDCopy(CPY all to microSD)You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.CPY all to microSDEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESCopy(Copy to phone)You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from the microSD card to the FOMA phone.Copy to phoneCopy(Copy all to phone)You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from the microSD card to the FOMA phone.Copy all to phoneAdd or OverwriteEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationIr/  transmission(Send all Ir data)See page 371.Ir/  transmission(All  transmission)See page 372.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the number of saved files.Delete all You can delete all the ToruCa files stored in the FOMA phone.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESSelect storage You can set a destination folder for when copying from the FOMA phone to the microSD card.YESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Auto-sort>p“ ” is displayed when the Genre sort is set, “ ” is displayed when the Title sort is set, and “ ” is displayed when the Index sort is set.pWhen a file satisfies multiple conditions, it is sorted into the top of the folder in the ToruCa Folder list.<Copy (Copy to microSD)>pThe ToruCa file (details) is copied as a ToruCa file before obtaining details if it contains data which is prohibited to output from the FOMA phone or set with UIM restrictions.<Copy (CPY all to microSD)>pThe ToruCa files in the “ToruCa” folder within the FOMA phone are saved to “SD ToruCa” on the microSD card.<Copy (Copy all to phone)>pThe ToruCa files in “SD ToruCa” on the microSD card are added or overwritten and then saved to the “ToruCa” folder in the FOMA phone.<Select storage>p“ ” is displayed for the folder set as a destination.pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again.
272Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaIndicates the state of ToruCa file※1 Does not apply to the ToruCa file downloaded from a site.※2 Appears for only the ToruCa file on the microSD card.p“ ” is add to the expired ToruCa file.p“ ” is add to the ToruCa file whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited.Indicates the categoryDisplays a category icon that matches the contents of the ToruCa file.Indicates the Index fileDisplays the location data of the publisher that publishes the information about the ToruCa file.Indicates the titleIndicates the date and time the ToruCa file was obtainedIndicates the ToruCa informationSimple explanation and the “詳細 (Details)” key are displayed for a ToruCa file. Information about the publisher is displayed for a ToruCa file (details).How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File DisplayToruCa File listDetailed ToruCa File display(for ToruCa file)Detailed ToruCa File display[for ToruCa file (details)] ※1Unread ToruCa fileRead ToruCa file※2FOMA phone incompatible ToruCa fileFunction Menu of the ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAttach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the ToruCa file attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Move Select a destination folder.pYou cannot select the “Used ToruCa” folder.Search/sort(Search)[List only]You can search through ToruCa file in the folder by specifying a search condition.SearchSelect a search condition.Genre . . . Select a genre.Press l( ) to display a list of category icons belonging to the genre.Title . . . . . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in the title.Index. . . . Enter characters to be searched for, from those in location data.pYou can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for the Index search.Search/sort(Sort)[List only]You can change the order of displayed files.SortSelect an order.Copy(Copy)You can copy the displayed or highlighted ToruCa file to another folder.CopySelect a destination folder.pYou cannot select the “Used ToruCa” folder.Copy(Copy to microSD)The files are copied to the folder as specified by “Select storage” on page 271.Copy to microSDCopy(Copy to phone)You can copy the ToruCa file from the microSD card to the ToruCa folder in the FOMA phone.Copy to phone
273Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaMultiple-choice[List only]You can select multiple ToruCa files and operate.Put a check mark for ToruCa files to be selectedi()Select an item.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 272.Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 272.Copy to microSD. . . . See page 272.Copy to phone . . . . . . See page 272.Send Ir data . . . . . . . . See page 370.Select all . . . . . . . . . . . Selects all files.Release all . . . . . . . . . Releases all selections.Update ToruCa[Detailed display only]You can re-obtain the information about the ToruCa file. The re-obtained ToruCa file (details) is automatically overwritten and then saved.YESpYou cannot update some ToruCa files.pSee page 186 for when ToruCa files are stored to the maximum.Operate image(Save image)[Detailed display only]You can save the image displayed on the ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display or Wake-up display.Save imageSelect an imageYESSelect a destination folder.Go to step 3 on page 182.pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum.Operate image(Save BG image)[Detailed display only]You can save the background image of the ToruCa file and set it for the Stand-by display or Wake-up display.Save BG imageYESSelect a destination folder.Go to step 3 on page 182.pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum.Operate image(Retry)[Detailed display only]You can play back an animation image or Flash movie in the ToruCa file from the beginning.RetrypWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area, the Flash movie might not be played back.Add to phonebook[Detailed display only]See page 96.Add desktop icon See page 127.Function menu Operation/ExplanationIr/  transmission(Send Ir data)See page 370.Ir/  transmission(  transmission)See page 372.Memory info[List only]You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the number of saved files.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)[List only]Delete selectedPut a check mark for ToruCa files to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)[List only]You can delete all ToruCa files in the folder.Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Attach to mail>pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is attached as a ToruCa file before obtaining details.pYou might not be able to attach the ToruCa file to i-mode mail depending on its file size.<Copy (Copy)>pYou cannot copy ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited.
274Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa<Copy (Copy to microSD)>pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited or the data set with the UIM restrictions is copied as a ToruCa file before obtaining details.pWhen the number of files in the destination folder on the microSD card is full, a new folder is automatically created and ToruCa files are saved to that folder.When copying is completed, the message “This folder is set for storage XXXXXX” (XXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears.pThe name of copied ToruCa file is TORUCXXX (XXX denotes a numeral).pWhen no folder is set as a destination folder on the microSD card, a new folder is created automatically and the file is saved to the folder. After saving, the newly created folder is set as the destination folder.pYou might not be able to execute “Copy to microSD” for the ToruCa file depending on its file size.<Copy (Copy to phone)>pYou might not be able to execute “Copy to phone” for the ToruCa file depending on its file size.<Operate image>pThe images that satisfy the following conditions are saved as frames or stamps:・The transparent GIF file that is not an animation GIF file・The file extension is “ifm”.・The image size is Stand-by (480 x 854), VGA (640 x 480), CIF (352 x 288), QVGA (240 x 320), QCIF (176 x 144), or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) for frames; and Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller except frames for stamps. Information1mOsaifu-KeitaiSettingsDo the following operations.<ToruCa Settings>Setting about ToruCaItem Operation/ExplanationReceive ToruCa You can set whether to obtain ToruCa file from a scanning device using the IC card function.Accept or RejectToruCa from dataBCYou can set whether to obtain ToruCa files automatically from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.Auto receive ON or Auto receive OFFReceiving display You can set whether to display the detailed ToruCa File display when you obtain a ToruCa file while the Stand-by display is shown.ON or OFFCheck same data You can set whether to check the same ToruCa file is already obtained before obtaining a ToruCa file from a scanning device or obtaining a ToruCa file automatically from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.ON or OFFON . . . . Checks and does not obtain a new ToruCa file if the same ToruCa file is already obtained.OFF . . . Does not check. Obtains even the same ToruCa file.Auto reading You can set whether to have the available ToruCa files automatically recognized for when you place the FOMA phone over the scanning device.Accept or RejectInformation<Check same data>pThe ToruCa files stored in the “Used ToruCa” folder or expired ToruCa files are not included as target files.<Auto reading>pIf “Auto reading” is set to “Reject”, you might not be able to use ToruCa files.
275Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCaTo prevent the IC card function from being used by others, you can set the Osaifu-Keitai, obtained ToruCa, or iC communication disabled.pIf the battery runs out when the IC card is locked, the IC card stays locked.1Press and hold m for at least one second.“ ” appears and IC Card Lock is set.pTo release IC Card Lock, perform the same operation and enter your Terminal Security Code. When Timer Lock ON At Close is set, the display for releasing IC Card Lock appears also by opening the FOMA phone.When you set “PIM/IC security mode” to “Face reader”, follow the operation of “Use Face Reader to Release Lock” on page 140.When you set it to “Double security”, enter your Terminal Security Code after the operation on page 140.pYou cannot set/release IC Card Lock even when you press and hold m for at least one second when the Stand-by display appears on the horizontal display.You can set whether to lock the IC card function while the power is turned off.1mSettingsLock/SecurityLock settingormOsaifu-KeitaiIC card lock set.2IC lock (power-off)Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.Setting before OFF . . . .Follows the setting at just before the power-off.Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sets IC Card Lock.<IC Card Lock>Locking IC Card FunctionIC Lock (Power-off)
276
277GPS FunctionAbout Using GPS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  278Checking Your Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Position Location> 278Using GPS Compatible i-αppli  . . . . <GPS Compatible i-αppli> 279Providing Location Information upon Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Provide Location> 284Notifying Location Information. . . . . . . . .<Notify of Location> 285Displaying Location Information History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Location History> 286Configuring GPS Service Settings . . . . . . . <Service Settings> 286Setting GPS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<GPS Settings> 287
278GPS FunctionpGPS is operated by the United States Department of Defense, so the GPS radio wave conditions might be controlled (accuracy deterioration, radio wave supply suspension, etc.) depending on the defense strategy of the United States Department of Defense.pNote that we do not take any responsibility for a loss such as pure economic loss resulting from the facts that you have missed the chance to check the measurement (communication) results, which have been caused by external factors such as malfunctions, erroneous operations, troubles, or power failure (including battery shortage) on the FOMA phone.pYou cannot use the FOMA phone as a navigating system for aircraft, vehicles, and people. Therefore, note that we are not held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of the location information for navigation.pYou cannot use GPS as a high-accuracy measuring device. Note that we do not take any responsibility for the damage caused by an error in the location information.pYou cannot use the GPS function when the FOMA phone is out of the service area (or overseas). About Using GPS FunctionInformationpYou cannot use the GPS function in the following cases: ・During Lock All※・During Self Mode ・During Omakase Lock※・While the UIM is not inserted※Provide Location is available.pAs GPS uses radio waves transmitted from the satellites, note that you cannot or might have difficulty to receive radio waves in the following conditions:・In a building or right under it・In the basement, tunnel, ground, water・In a bag or case・In densely crowded areas with buildings and houses・In densely crowded trees and right under them・Close to high-tension wires・In a car or train・In bad weather such as heavy rain and snow・When there are obstacles (persons and articles) around the FOMA phone.・When you cover the displays, keys, microphone, or speakers of the FOMA phone with your hand.In these cases, an error in the obtained location information might become 300 meters or more.You can measure your current location and display it. You can display a map of the location, and send the location information by mail as well.1mLifeKitGPSPosition locationThe current location is displayed by the latitude and longitude.…Measurement date    …Latitude    …Longitude    …Geographic datum…Accuracy★★★: Almost accurate location information (Error is about less than 50 meters)★★☆: Relatively accurate location information (Error is less than about 300 meters)★☆☆: Approximate location information (Error is about 300 meters or more)The accuracy is an estimate. It might differ from actual one depending on the radio wave conditions in the surrounding area.pPress l( ) to measure again in “Quality mode” (see “Positioning Mode” on page 287).pWhen “ ” is displayed at bottom right of the display during measuring, press i and select “OK” to display the location using the information during measuring.pYou can measure the location also by pressing and holding 1 for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. After measuring, the FOMA phone works “Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed” on page 279 according to the setting of “GPS Button Setting”.<Position Location>Checking Your LocationBlinks during measuring
279GPS FunctionFunction Menu while Current Location is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationRead a map You can display a map by connecting a map site.YESpAfter displaying the map, you can use “i-area” to search for the surrounding information. For details about “i-area”, refer to the DoCoMo web page.Run iαppli You can use the location information on a GPS compatible i-αppli program.Select an i-αppli program.Paste to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL converted from the location information pasted to the text.YESGo to step 2 on page 198.pThe URL of the location information to be sent is displayed on i-mode compatible phones only.Add to phonebook You can store the location information in the Phonebook.YESGo to step 2 of “Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook” on page 96.Attach to image You can store the location information in the image.Select a folderSelect an imageYES or NOYES . . . . Overwrites and saves.NO . . . . . Saves as a separate file.1mLifeKitGPSiαppliThe list of i-αppli programs that support GPS is displayed. Select an i-αppli program to start it.pSee page 251 for the Software list.The pre-installed “地図アプリ (Map Application)” enables you to check the map of the place you are currently in or the place you specify, or check your nearby area for details by using the GPS function and map. You can then navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car. Further, you can easily get transfer information by voice input. pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to subscribe to Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for using this software program. pIf you delete this software program and then when you want to resume it, download it from “iエリア−周辺情報− (i-area -Local Information-)”.pThis software program is the i-αppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.pNote that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and promptness of the map and route information.pWhile driving, ensure that a person other than the driver operates this software program.<GPS Compatible i-αppli>Using GPS Compatible i-αppliInformationpWhen you use a GPS compatible i-αppli program, the location information is sent to the information provider of the i-αppli program you use.pYou need to set “Location usage” of “Software setting” to “ON” when you use the GPS function on a GPS compatible i-αppli program.Using “地図アプリ (Map Application)”
280GPS Function■Standard and optional servicesThe standard and optional services are available with this software program.Standard service: Provided by DoCoMo (charge free).Optional service: Provided by ZENRIN DataCom (charged).You can use the optional services charge free except traffic information for up to 90 days from when you have started this software program for the first time. To use the optional services from 91 days on, you need to register yourself as a member of “ゼンリン 地図+ナビ (ZENRIN/map+navi)” (charged) provided by ZENRIN DataCom. Even when you register yourself as a member while you are using this software program, you do not need to re-download it. You can use this software program as it is.Menu DescriptionsFrom 91 days on地図(Map)pYou can see the map by using GPS you are currently in, or can enter a keyword, genre, address, or phone number to see the map.pBy voice input, you can easily see the map.FreepYou can check the points stored in this software program or on the server, or in the Phonebook, or check the map for the points retrieved by the previous search.pAfter the storage on the server, the stored points can be shared with your personal computer as well.Chargedお店や施設(Shops and facilities)pYou can check the details of shops, facilities, or iD member stores in the area where you are currently in or you specify, and can obtain coupons from gourmet information.pYou can check nearby weather or empty spaces in parking lots.pBy voice input, you can easily check the details of your nearby area.Freeナビ(Navigate)pYou can navigate yourself to the destination by vehicle, on foot, or by car.pYou can navigate yourself easily to your home you have stored.Charged乗換案内(Transfer guide)pYou can check the train transfer guides and timetables.pYou can check the map for a train route and set an alarm before your departure.pBy voice input, you can easily get transfer information.Chargedお楽しみ(Fun)pIn addition to the ordinary map, you can change the mode to show the various types of maps such as the map you can move by inclining the FOMA phone, the 3D map, and the map that accentuates train routes.pUsing GPS, you can leave your footprints on your current position, and view the tracks you moved.pYou can paint colors on the cities, wards, towns, villages, or prefectures of the places where you measured in the past using GPS.Free■Top menu display and its operationThe respective menus are displayed on the TOP display. When you close the menu, the map retrieved by the last search appears.pThe displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ. pAt the first start-up, the usage rules and caution items on use are displayed.◆When 91 days have passed without registering yourself as a memberAt the first start-up on or after 91 days, the message telling that the functions you can use are limited, and the message that refers to the member registration site appear. The same messages appear when you select an optional service menu.※To register yourself as a member, access “ゼンリン 地図+ナビ (ZENRIN/map+navi)” via this software program.災害時地図(Disaster time map)pThis i-αppli program links with the map application, does not require communication, and is for when disasters occur.Charged設定/ヘルプ(Settings/Help)pYou can set how to show the map or navigation, and check how to use it.FreeMenu DescriptionsFrom 91 days onTOP display
281GPS Function■Map display and its operation◆Key operation when the map is shown◆Key operation when the quick access menu is shown© 2008 ZENRIN DataComMap View displayKey operation Actionl[メニュー (Menu)] Can show the menu.OoCan show the quick access menu.i[拡縮(Enlarge/Reduce)]Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[閉じる (close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar.MoCan move the map up, down, left, and right.rCan close the menu, or returns to the point retrieved by the first search.aCan turn the map counterclockwise.0Can turn the map northward.sCan turn the map clockwise.Key operation ActionZo[周辺を調べる(Check local information)]Can check the local information centering around the area on the map.Xo[ココへナビ(Navi to)]Can set the start point and search for a route to the center of the map.■The Search Result display for the local information and its operationpThe display is for reference, so the actual one might differ.pThe display and operation are for when you show the search result on the map, not for when you select it from the list.◆The Search Result display for the local information◆Key operation when the Search Result display for the local information is shown※When the cursor is not placed over the shop, etc. retrieved by the search, the quick menu appears.Co[ココを送信(Send here)]Can send the URL for the displayed map by i-mode mail.Vo[ココを登録(Store here)]Can store the location information of the center of the map in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook. When you store it on the server, the stored point can be shared with your personal computer as well.Oo[地図へ (To map)] Can close the quick access menu.1[3D/パノラマ(3D/Panorama)]Can show the point from where a three-dimensional intersection or panoramic image can be viewed. Select the point to display the three-dimensional intersection or panoramic image.2[ビル/テナント(Building/Tenant)]Can show the buildings around and can click to check the tenants in the buildings if any.Key operation Action© 2008 ZENRIN DataComKey operation ActionOoCan confirm detailed information about search results.
282GPS FunctionYou can set a start point and destination, and search for a route. The route you can go through on foot, by public transportation, or by car are displayed. After you search for the route, the voice and display navigate you to your destination.1TOP displayナビ (Navigate)出発地/目的地を選ぶ (Select a start point/destination)2出発地 (Start point)Select a setting method.現在地(GPS) [Current location (GPS)]. . . .Measures and sets the current location.フリーワード検索 (Keyword search). . . .Set a start point searching by keywords.地図上で指定 (Specify on map). . . .Set a start point on the map.TEL/〒検索 (TEL/ZIP code search). . . .Set a start point searching by the phone number or zip code.住所一覧から (From address list). . . .Set a start point selecting an address.ジャンルから (From genre). . . .Set a start point selecting a genre.履歴から (From record). . . .Set a start point on the map previously displayed.登録地点から (From stored point). . . .Set a start point from the location information stored in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.自宅 (Home). . . .Set a start point from the location information of your home.出発地の確認 (Confirm start point). . . .Confirm information about the start point.MoCan move the map up, down, left, and right.5Can re-search the center area of the displayed map.4Can show the previous search results.6Can show the next search results.l[メニュー (Menu)] Can show the menu.i[拡縮(Enlarge/Reduce)]Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[閉じる (close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar. Searching for a Route and Navigating Yourself to Destination by Voice and on DisplayKey operation Action 3目的地 (Destination)Select a setting method.フリーワード検索 (Keyword search). . .  Set a destination searching by keywords.地図上で指定 (Specify on map). . .  Set a destination on the map.TEL/〒検索 (TEL/ZIP code search). . .  Set a destination searching by the phone number or zip code.住所一覧から (From address list). . .  Set a destination selecting an address.ジャンルから (From genre). . .  Set a destination selecting a genre.履歴から (From record). . .  Set a destination on the map previously displayed.登録地点から (From stored point). . .  Set a destination from the location information stored in this software program, on the server, or in the Phonebook.自宅 (Home). . .  Set a destination from the location information of your home.目的地の確認 (Confirm destination). . .  Confirm information about the destination.4時間指定 (Specify time)Select an item.現時刻で指定 (Specify by current time). . .  Search for a route by the current time.出発時刻指定 (Specify start time). . .  Search for a route specifying the start time.到着時刻指定 (Specify arrival time). . .  Search for a route specifying the arrival time.終電を利用 (Use last train). . .  Search for a route by the last train of the day.5条件設定 (Set conditions)Select a condition.乗換条件 (Transfer conditions). . .  Select a transfer condition from “早い (Fast)”, “安い (Cheap)”, and “楽々 (Easy)”.徒歩ルート (Foot route). . .  Select a route condition from “おまかせ (Free)”, “屋根多い (Many roofs)”, and “階段少ない (Less stairs)”.特急利用 (Use special express). . .  Select whether to use special expresses for even when the total distance is less than 100 km.通常利用車種 (Ordinary type of vehicles). . .  Select a type of vehicle.6上記で設定 (Fix as specified above)
283GPS Function7ルートを検索 (Search for a route)You can search for a route by “ で検索 (Search by )” that searches all types of routes, or “ のみで検索 (Search by only  )” that searches for routes only by car. Up to six routes are displayed as search results. When the routes using different transportation are found, the characteristics of the routes are displayed by the icons shown below: 早 (Fast): Arrival time is early.安 (Cheap): Fare is cheap.楽 (Easy): Transfer is less.オススメ (Recommendable): Route provided with three conditions, “早 (Fast)”, “安 (Cheap)”, and “楽 (Easy)”.有料 (Charged): Route by car using toll roads一般 (Ordinary): Route by car using ordinary roadspTo store the route, select “ルートを登録 (Store route)”.8ルートを選択 (Select a route)ナビ・ルート確認 (Navi/Confirm route)ナビ (Navi) or ナビ(省電力) [Navi (power saver)]Navigation to the destination starts. pTo confirm the route, select “ルート確認 (Confirm route)”.pTo check the timetable, select “時刻表 (Timetable)”.■Route (Car)/Navigation (Car) View display and its operationpThe displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ. © 2008 ZENRIN DataComThe route to the destination is displayed.Navigation (Car) View displayThe current location and proceeding direction is displayed.◆Key operation when using Navigation◆Key operation when the quick access menu appearsKey operation Actionl[メニュー (Menu)] Can end the Navigation program and shows the TOP menu.OoCan show the quick access menu. i[拡縮(Enlarge/Reduce)]Can show the scale bar. To display a large area, press Zo, and to display the details, press Xo. Press i[閉じる (Close)] to fix the reduced scale, and then to clear the bar.MoCan move the map up, down, left, and right.rCan return to the current location.2Can switch to the intersection mode. 5Can pause or start the Navigation program.aCan turn the map counterclockwise.0Can turn the map northward.sCan turn the map clockwise.Key operation ActionXo[結果&設定(Result&Settings)]Can show search results of routes (time, fare, and others), or sets the navigation.Co[経由地を設定(Point setting)]Can search for a route by adding up to three points you go through to the destination.Vo[リルート(Re-route)]Can re-search for a route from the current point to the destination.1[ルート消去(Clear route)]Can clear the displayed route.2[モード切替(Switch mode)]Can switch to the intersection mode.
284GPS FunctionBy voice input, you can easily check the local information, get transfer information, or see the map from the Voice search menu.<Example> When using おしゃべり検索 (Voice search) to check the local information1TOP displayお店や施設 (Shops and facilities)おしゃべり検索 (Voice search)How to input your voice is displayed.2Explanatory display for voice input音声入力開始 (Start voice input)The display for voice input appears. After the Voice Input display appears, speak in Japanese about the local information to search for.Example: “Konohen-no Konbini” (nearby convenience store)1TOP display設 定・ヘ ル プ (Settings/Help)Select an item.Using おしゃべり検索 (Voice search)Using Settings and HelpThe confirmation display appears after your voice is recognized. When the recognition result is wrong, select “音声再入力(Re-input voice)”.Item Action会員情報確認 (Confirm member information)You can check whether you are registered as a member of “ゼンリン 地図+ナビ (ZENRIN/map+navi)”.You can provide your location information upon the request from others. Depending on the service you use, you need to set GPS service settings beforehand. (See page 286) Also, you need to set “Location request menu” to “ON” or set the permitted period by “Permission schedule” beforehand.<When the setting by service is “毎回確認 (Check every time)”>1When a location provision request arrivesYES or NOYES . . . . Measures the current location and sends the location information.NO . . . . . Rejects to provide the location information.pIf no keys are pressed for about 20 seconds, the former display returns without providing your current location.α基本設定 (αStandard settings)You can perform the overall settings of the software program such as specifying map display color or font size. ナビ設定 (Navi settings)You can perform the overall settings of the navigation program such as re-routing or the sound level of voice guide.自宅設定(Home setting)You can register the location of your home.履歴系クリア (Clear records)You can clear the records of the map or Navigation used.使い方の説明/よくある質問/利用規約 (Explanation about how to use/FAQ/Usage rules)You can get explanation about how to use, FAQ, and usage rules.<Provide Location>Providing Location Information upon RequestItem Action
285GPS Function<When the setting by service is “許可 (Accept)”>1When a location provision request arrivesOKpWhen you select “OK” or about three seconds elapse, the current location provision starts.pThe information of the service provider might not be displayed.pPress r to stop providing information. However, your location information might be sent depending on the timing.InformationpIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds from the Position Location Result display or the Failure display, the former display returns.pTo use “imadoco-search”, you need to set “位置情報利用設定(イマドコサーチ設定) [Location Information Usage Setting (imadoco-search Setting)] of “オプション設定 (Options)” of “料金&お申込・設定 (Bill & Subscription/Setting)” on iMenu.pTo use Provide Location, you might need to subscribe to a service provider which supports the Provider Location function or to pay the service fee.pEven when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio wave conditions.pWhen “Location request menu” is set to “OFF”, the location information is not displayed, and the request is rejected.pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request to be checked every time, the location information is not provided on the location provision request during Public Mode (Drive Mode).pWhen you set, by GPS service settings, the location request to be accepted, the location information is provided with a display during Public Mode (Drive Mode) but the positioning tone, vibrator, and illumination do not work.pWhen you are requested to provide your location information from the other party using “imadocokantan search”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to send the current location information each time you receive a request. Select “YES” to immediately send the rough position location result. After selecting “YES”, the GPS Measuring display appears and the precise position location result is notified after GPS measuring. The rough position location result is notified even if you suspend the location providing during GPS measuring. In this case, it is stored in Location History but the location information is not displayed.You can notify a service provider of your current location.1mLifeKitGPSNotify of locationDirect inputEnter a party to be notifiedYESpYou can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, # and :.pIf you have stored LCS clients by “Reg. LCS client” beforehand, you can select an LCS client from “View service clients”.pYou can press l() to stop measuring, but your current location might be notified depending on the timing.2OKpRegardless of the mode of 2in1, the location information can be searched for Number A only.When the other party searches you by your Number B, your current location is not provided and the searcher is notified that the search has failed. pA fee is not charged for using the Provide Location function.pFor using the service, refer to the information on your service provider or the DoCoMo web page.<Notify of Location>Notifying Location InformationInformationInformationpEven when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service provider depending on the radio wave conditions.pYou are charged a fee for using the function to notify your current location.
286GPS FunctionUp to 50 histories of Position Location, Notify Of Location, and Provide Location are stored.1mLifeKitGPSLocation historySelect a location history.: Position location: Provide location: Notify of locationpTo use Notify Of Location, you might need to subscribe to a service provider that supports Notify Of Location. Further, you might be charged a fee for using the service.pYou cannot enter any digits during Keypad Dial Lock.pRegardless of the mode of 2in1, your location information is notified by Number A.pFor using the service, refer to the information on your service provider or the DoCoMo web page.<Location History>Displaying Location Information HistoryInformationInformationpWhen the location histories exceed 50, they are automatically overwritten from the oldest one.pThe location information and accuracy stored in Location History may differ from the ones sent to the location provision requester or LCS client depending on the radio wave conditions, and others.pWhen you cancel Position Location midway, you fail to measure your current location, or you set “Location request menu” to “OFF”, its history is not stored in Location History.pEven when the histories of Provide Location or Notify Of Location are stored, they might not have been delivered to your service providers.pYou cannot operate a failed-to-measure history of Provide Location or Notify of Location for other than “Compose message”, “Dialing”, “Delete this”, and “Delete all”.pWhen Provide Location was used, the name of the location provision requester is checked against the Phonebook entries which appear in each mode of 2in1 and then shown.p“ ” is displayed for the records of successful positioning.By connecting to GPS service settings (a host set by “Host selection”), you can configure the settings for the Provide Location service such as the permission for location information search and password.1mLifeKitGPSService settingspSee page 173 for operations while a site is displayed.Function Menu while Location History is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationRead a map See page 279.Run iαppli See page 279.Paste to mail See page 279.Add to phonebook See page 279.Attach to image See page 279.Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to your location provision requester.Go to step 3 on page 198.Dialing See page 166.Delete (Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete (Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES<Service Settings>Configuring GPS Service SettingsInformationpYou cannot use the Bookmark or Screen Memo function.
287GPS FunctionYou can set an operation for after measuring your location by pressing and holding 1 for at least one second from the Stand-by display on the vertical display. You can select an operation from “Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed” on page 279.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsGPS button settingSelect an operation.pIf you set to “Confirm every session”, you can select an operation each time you measure the location.You can select a tone to sound for when you check your current location or when you are requested to provide location information. You can set a color of the Call/Charging indicator and the vibration pattern as well.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsPosit. tone/illum.Select an operation to be setDo the following operations.<GPS Settings>Setting GPSGPS Button SettingPositioning Tone/IlluminationItem Operation/ExplanationSelect posit. ring toneSelect a folderSelect a ring tone.pWhile selecting, the selected tone sounds for confirmation.Ring time setting You can set a ring time for positioning ring tone.Enter a ring time (seconds).pEnter two digits from “00” through “30”. For “Location req./Confirm”, however, enter two digits from “00” through “20”. If you set to 0 seconds, the tone does not sound.Select a mode for measuring the current location from either “Standard mode” or “Quality mode”.When you select “Quality mode”, it takes a longer time for measuring, but the measuring accuracy might be improved as a result.You can set a measuring mode for Position Location, Notify Of Location, and Provide Location respectively.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsPositioning modeSelect an operation to be setStandard mode or Quality modeIf you have stored LCS clients, you can select an LCS client when you notify of your current location. Further, you can automatically notify of your current location when you make a call to the stored phone number.You can store up to five LCS clients.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsReg. LCS clientHighlight <Not stored> and press l() or Oo()Do the following operations.pIf you select a stored LCS client, you can confirm the stored contents.Select vibrator Select a vibration pattern.pIf you select “Melody linkage”, the FOMA phone vibrates in time with ring tone.pWhile selecting, the FOMA phone vibrates by the selected pattern for confirmation.Select illumination Select a color.pWhile selecting, the Call/Charging indicator lights in the selected color for confirmation.Positioning ModeItem Operation/ExplanationRegister LCS ClientItem Operation/ExplanationService client name Enter a service client name.pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
288GPS Function2Press l().Service client ID Enter a service client ID.pYou can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, # and :.pEnter the service client ID specified by your service provider.Phone number Enter a phone number.pYou can enter up to 26 digits.pHighlight the phone number field, press i( ), and select “Enter from PB” to call up a phone number from the Phonebook and enter it.pIf you enter a phone number by “Enter from PB” with “Service client name” not entered, the name for the Phonebook entry is entered.Notify when dialing You can set whether to notify of your current location for when you make a voice call or videophone call to the stored phone number.ON, OFF or Confirm every dialpTo check each time you make a call, select “Confirm every dial”.Item Operation/ExplanationInformationpEven if “Notify when dialing” is set to “ON” or to “Confirm every dial”, you cannot notify of your current location when you make a call without notifying of your caller ID.Function Menu while LCS Client is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationDelete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESAdd to phonebook You can store the service client name and phone number stored in “Reg. LCS client” into the Phonebook. (See page 279)You can set whether to accept a location provision request (provide location information). You can set validity period as well.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsLocation request menuEnter your Terminal Security CodeON, OFF or Permission schedule2Do the following operations.3Press l().Edit Go to step 1 of “Register LCS Client” on page 287.pYou can edit also by pressing l().Send Ir data See page 370.Send all Ir data See page 371. transmission See page 372.All  transmissionSee page 372.Location Request MenuFunction menu Operation/ExplanationItem Operation/ExplanationPermit from Enter the time for starting permission.Permit to Enter the time for ending permission.Repeat Select a repeat type.pWhen you select “1 time”, the permission period does not repeat.pWhen you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week to be repeated, then press l().Validity period When you set to “Repeat”, you can set the period to be valid.ON or OFFEnter a validity date (from)ON or OFFEnter a validity date (to).
289GPS Function■Operations when the validity period for location provision is specifiedExample: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the start time and 21:00 as the end timeInformationpYou can set “Location request menu” also by “Initial setting” (see page 46).pWhen “ON” is set, the location information might be sent without any operation on the FOMA phone, and might be notified to the searcher.pWhen “OFF” is set, the location provision is rejected even if its location provision request is received. The history is not stored.pYou can specify from January 1, 2008 through December 31, 2037 for “Permission schedule”.Repeat Validity period Period of location provision1 time — 14:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/NovDaily Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/NovEvery day 14:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/NovEvery day 14:00 through 21:00 from 18/Nov through 30/NovOFF Every day 14:00 through 21:00 on and after 18/NovSelect day Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 18/Nov through 30/NovOFF 14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week on and after 18/Nov Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the start time and 21:00 as the end timeExample: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the start time and 10:00 as the end timeRepeat Validity period Period of location provision1 time — 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/NovDaily Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/NovEvery day 10:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/Nov12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day 10:00 through 21:00 from 19/Nov through 30/NovOFF 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day 10:00 through 21:00 on and after 19/NovSelect day Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/NovIf 18/Nov is the specified day; 12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week from 19/Nov through 30/NovOFF If 18/Nov is the specified day;12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the week on and after 19/NovRepeat Validity period Period of location provision1 time — 14:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/NovDaily Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 18/Nov through 30/NovOFF 14:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after 18/NovSelect day Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/Nov14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 18/Nov through 30/NovOFF 14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week on and after 18/Nov
290GPS FunctionExample: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the start time and 10:00 as the end timeRepeat Validity period Period of location provision1 time — 12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/NovDaily Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov10:00/20/Nov through 10:00/1/DecStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/Nov12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/1/DecOFF 12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, every day 10:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after 19/NovSelect day Start date: 20/NovEnd date: 30/Nov10:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/NovStart date: 10/NovEnd date: 30/NovIf 18/Nov is the specified day;12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the week from 19/Nov through 30/Nov OFF If 18/Nov is the specified day;12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through 10:00 of the next day of the specified days of the week on and after 19/NovYou can use this setting for changing the host for Service Settings.1mLifeKitGPSGPS settingsHost selectionHighlight <Not stored> and press l().pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host.pTo delete a stored host, press i( ), select “Delete” and select “YES”.2Do the following operations.3Press l().Host Selection※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.Item Operation/ExplanationHost name Enter a host name.pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.Host number Enter a host number.pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.Host address Enter a URL.pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
2911SegWhat is 1Seg?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  292Before Using 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  293Setting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Channel Setting> 294Watching 1Seg Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Activate 1Seg> 295Using Program Guide i-αppli. . . . . . . <Program Guide i-αppli> 300Using Data Broadcasting  . . . . . . . . . . . . <Data Broadcasting> 301Using TV Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<TVlink> 302Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  303Booking Programs or Setting Timer Recording of 1Seg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Book Program> <Timer Recording> 304Settings for 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <User Settings> 309
2921Seg1Seg is the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for mobile objects, and it broadcasts data as well as video and audio. Further, by using i-mode, you can obtain the detailed information, can participate in quiz programs or can have fun with TV shopping.For details on the 1Seg service, browse to the web page as follows:社団法人 デジタル放送推進協会 (The association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting)From personal computers: http://www.dpa.or.jp/From i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese only)■Using 1SegpThe 1Seg broadcasting is a service provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations).pThe subscription is not required to receive video, audio and data broadcasting transmitted on the airwaves for the 1Seg service, and its charge is free.pThe information displayed in the data broadcasting area contains “Data broadcasting” and “Data broadcasting site”. “Data broadcasting” is displayed on airwaves together with video and audio, and “Data broadcasting site” is displayed by connecting from the information of data broadcasting to the sites provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). Also, it might be connected to “i-mode site”, etc. When connecting to sites, you need to subscribe to i-mode separately.pYou are charged a packet communication fee for browsing “Data broadcasting site” and “i-mode site”.You might be charged an information fee for using some sites (i-mode pay sites).■Radio waves1Seg is one of the broadcasting services receiving radio waves (broadcasting waves) different from that used for the FOMA services. Accordingly, you cannot watch the broadcasting when you are out of reach of the broadcasting waves, or when the broadcasting is suspended regardless of whether you are in or out of the FOMA service area.Even when you are in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area, reception condition might be deteriorated or you might not be able to receive programs in the following places:・Where the radio tower that transmits broadcasting waves is far away・Where the radio waves are blocked by geographical features such as mountains or valleys of high-rise buildings・Where the radio waves are weak or do not reach, such as in tunnels, underground, or recesses of buildingsThe reception conditions might be improved by moving your FOMA phone away from or close to you, or moving yourself to another place.What is 1Seg? ■Messages on the display when you use 1Seg for the first timeWhen you use 1Seg for the first time after purchase, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display appears.Press Xo or Vo and then press Oo(). If you select “NO” from the succeeding confirmation display, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.pThe Exemption Clause Confirmation display also appears when you replace the UIM with another one.■What is broadcasting storage area?The broadcasting storage area is a storage area inside the terminal that is exclusive for 1Seg. The information you input according to the instruction on the data broadcasting program is saved to that broadcasting storage area following the settings of television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). The information to be saved might contain answers for quiz, and personal information such as membership number, gender, age, or occupation. The saved information might be displayed, or be sent to television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations) without your re-input when you browse to the data broadcasting site.pSee page 311 to erase information in the broadcasting storage area.When you replace the UIM with another one, the confirmation display appears asking whether to reset the broadcasting storage area. Select “YES”, and reset it. If you select “NO”, the services using the broadcasting storage area are not available.■Messages on the display when the information in the broadcasting storage area is read outWhen the information in the broadcasting storage area is used while you are watching a program, the message “Use saved information? It may include information used by the same broadcasting group” is displayed. If you select “YES”, the confirmation display asking whether to read out the stored information while watching the same program does not appear after that. Further if you select “YES (confirm once)”, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
2931Seg<Example> When you watch a 1Seg program for the first timeStore the channel list for the area you use. (See page 294)Activate 1Seg. (See page 295)■Battery levelIf you try to start 1Seg or 1Seg starts automatically by Book Program when the battery is low, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to start it. Also, when the battery becomes low while you are watching or recording a 1Seg program, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end 1Seg. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”.pWhen you do nothing from the confirmation display for about one minute, 1Seg automatically terminates.pWhile “Rec. when low battery” is set to “ON”, the confirmation display does not appear during recording. (See page 309)pIf the battery level becomes low during recording and recording ends, the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved.pDuring Multitask, the battery alert tone sounds but the confirmation display does not appear. Switch to the viewer display and then operate.Before Using 1SegHow to Watch a 1Seg ProgramChannel SettingActivating 1Seg12■When a call etc. comes in while you are watching or recording a 1Seg programWhen the events shown below occur while watching or recording a 1Seg program, the video and audio are suspended, and each function works. Recording is not suspended.After you finish each function, you can resume watching a 1Seg program. See page 300 for receiving i-mode mail, SMS messages or Messages R/F.pIncoming voice callpIncoming videophone callpIncoming PushTalk callpNotification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, Book Program(when “Alarm setting” is set to “Alarm preferred”)pNotification of Timer Recording(When the start date/time comes, the FOMA phone works according to the setting of “Priority”.)InformationpWhen you have not inserted the UIM, when you have canceled the contract with DoCoMo, or when you have temporarily suspended using the FOMA service, you cannot watch 1Seg programs.pEven when you have inserted the UIM contracted with DoCoMo, you might be disabled to start 1Seg if you repeatedly watch 1Seg programs in the condition the FOMA phone cannot communicate such as when you are out of the service area. In that case, try to start 1Seg in the condition the FOMA phone can communicate such as by moving into the FOMA service area.pWhen you watch a 1Seg program for the first time, start 1Seg in the FOMA service area.p1Seg is not available while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode” or “MTP mode” and the FOMA phone is connected to a personal computer.p1Seg might automatically start when you end a call by closing the FOMA phone during a call. In such a case, be careful not to use the FOMA phone close to your ear because audio is played back at the sound volume for 1Seg. pThe life of battery pack may shorten if you watch 1Seg programs for a long time during charging.
2941SegTo watch 1Seg programs, you need to execute Channel Setting and to select a channel list in advance. You can store up to 10 channel lists.pThe broadcasting stations you can receive differ depending on the local area. If you store a channel list of the area for traveling or business trip, you can watch programs in the area just by selecting the channel list.pThe remote-control numbers you use with channel selections are previously set for respective broadcasting stations.pYou cannot execute Channel Setting during recording a 1Seg program.The broadcasting stations you can currently watch are automatically searched and stored in a channel list.pYou need to set this function in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area.1m1SegChannel settingAuto channel settingYESSearching takes place.pFrom the Channel list display or viewer display, press i( ), select “Channel setting”, and select “Auto channel setting”.2YESEnter a title.pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.pWhen you press Oo( ) without entering a title, the title name takes the name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)pTo cancel searching midway, press l() or r; then select “YES”. You can store the searched broadcasting stations in a channel list.<Channel Setting>Setting ChannelsAuto Channel SettingInformationpWhen the multiple broadcasting stations which have the same remote-control number are retrieved, the message to the effect that the remote-control number is doubled appears. Select “OK” and select your area from the Local Area Selection display. The channels in the area you select are preferentially assigned to remote-control numbers 1 to 12, and channels in the area you do not select are assigned to remote-control numbers 13 onward.You can store the broadcasting stations set by prefecture to a channel list.1m1SegChannel settingSelect areaSelect an areaSelect a prefectureYESpFrom the Channel list display or viewer display, press i(), select “Channel setting”, and select “Select area”.You can select a channel list to set the broadcasting stations you receive. Also, you can edit the channel list already stored.1m1SegChannel listSelect a channel list.The channel list you receive is set, and the detailed display appears.pSelect a broadcasting station to watch a 1Seg program.pWhen you select “Channel list” from the Function menu of viewer display, the viewer display returns by selecting a channel list.pYou can watch a 1Seg program also by pressing l( ) from the Channel list display and selecting a broadcasting station.pThe time to search channels requires for about 30 to 60 seconds. However, it differs depending on the number of broadcasting stations or airwave conditions, and might exceed 60 seconds.Select AreaInformationInformationpDepending on the area, you may not be able to correctly store the broadcasting stations by “Select area”. In that case, search for the broadcasting stations by “Auto channel setting”.Select Channel ListChannel list display Detailed Channel list displayRemote-control number
2951SegFunction Menu of the Channel List DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChannel setting See page 294.Edit title Enter a title.You can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.Delete YESpYou cannot delete the channel list currently set.Function Menu of the Detailed Channel List DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationRemote control No. You can change the broadcasting station set for the remote-control number.Select a broadcasting station you want to changeSelect the remote-control number to be set.pIf any broadcasting station has already been set for the specified remote-control number, the broadcasting stations switch positions. Repeat the operation to set a broadcasting station for a remote-control number. l()YESDelete YESpWhen you delete all the broadcasting stations in the channel list, the channel list itself is deleted. pYou cannot delete the broadcasting station in the channel list currently set.Just change the style to automatically switch between the vertical display and horizontal display when you are watching. You can switch displays manually also by pressing d in Normal Style.pWhen you use 1Seg for the first time, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display appears. (See page 292)pYou can start 1Seg also by using the channel information displayed in the Program Guide i-αppli, sites, or mail.pYou can play back the audio from 1Seg programs via a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 430)1Press and hold c for at least one second.1Seg starts from the channel you watched last time. “ ” is displayed while watching a 1Seg program.pWhen you have not stored any channel list, the confirmation display appears. Select “OK” and execute Channel Setting. (See page 294)pYou can start 1Seg also by switching to Horizontal Open Style while the display for selecting a 1Seg function is shown in Normal Style.pWhile “Work with style” is set to “1Seg”, you can start 1Seg also by switching to Horizontal Open Style from the Stand-by display.pTo end watching, press h and select “YES”. <Activate 1Seg>Watching 1Seg ProgramsViewer display
2961Seg■About Viewer display(When “Switch display” is “V. img+Caption+DBC”.)Video“ ” appears on the upper right of the display when the data broadcasting linked with a 1Seg program is found while you are watching on the horizontal display or in the multiwindow.CaptionYou can set display position of the caption on the horizontal display by “Caption posit. in w-scr”.Data BroadcastingOperation ModeVideo Mode: Operates the video or audio. (See page 295)Data Broadcasting Mode: Operates the data broadcasting. (See page 301)Off Timer“ ” appears while Off Timer is set.ECO Mode“ ” appears during ECO Mode.Channel (remote-control number)Airwave Reception Level (estimate)   (Strong) (Weak)“ ” appears out of the broadcasting area.Reception of Caption“ ” is displayed while caption information is being received.Sound VolumeGuide displayHorizontal displayVertical display   Program Information (outline)The program name is displayed on the vertical display.The channel, start/end time, and program name are displayed on the horizontal display.This is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.Record Video“ ” appears during video recording, and “ ” appears during video recording by Timer Recording. “ ” appears during pause of recording.Icon/CaptionIcon: “ON/OFF” of “Icon”Caption: Position ( : Lower,  : Upper) and OFFThis is displayed when you operate keys or switch styles.pAfter you select a channel using Channel Search, the channel (remote-control number) might not be displayed.pWhile “Icon” is set to “OFF” in the horizontal display, the guide display appears when you operate keys or switch styles.■Channel switching operation (in Video Mode only)■Operations while watching a 1Seg programOperation  Key operationDirect channel selectionRemote control No.1~9  . . . . . 1~9Remote control No.10. . . . . . . aRemote control No.11. . . . . . . 0Remote control No.12. . . . . . . sSequential channel selectionNoChannel search No(for at least one second)pEach time of pressing switches channels by searching receivable broadcasting stations in order of frequency.pl() or r to suspendOperation  Key operationSound volumeadjustmentBo※1 or <>pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available.Mute r※1pr※1 or adjust volume to play back sound
2971Seg※1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, you cannot operate.※2 You cannot operate in Horizontal Open Style.※3 When you close the FOMA phone, the vertical display returns. In Horizontal Open Style, the horizontal display automatically appears; the vertical display does not appear.Start program guide i-αpplil()※2Program info l(for at least one second)※2Program info (outline)m()Switch display  m( ) while displaying program information (outline)pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches the setting of “Icon” and “Caption posit. in w-scr”.Full display d※2※3pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display directions.pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches between the normal display and the full display.Record video Oo()※1 or p(for at least one second)pOo()※1 or p to endRecord still image pSwitch TV/data BC c()※2pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode.Operation  Key operationInformationpEven when you switch the display by using Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the audio from the 1Seg program is played back. (Play Background) The audio might not be played back, however, depending on the function or program. (See page 511) pWhen “TV sound while closed” is set to “ON”, the audio is played back even if you close the FOMA phone while you are watching a 1Seg program. You cannot do anything other than adjusting the volume when your FOMA phone is closed.pThe following might occur depending on the airwave conditions:・The audio is interrupted.・The data broadcasting is not operable.・Block-shaped noise appears on the display or playing stops.・The video or the data broadcasting is not displayed. (A dark screen appears.)pThe caption might not be displayed depending on the program.pThe data broadcasting cannot be displayed on the horizontal display.pIf you move, the receivable airwaves or broadcasting stations might change being affected by mountains or buildings. If reception on 1Seg goes bad after moving, perform “Auto channel setting”; then reception might be improved via different airwaves or you might be able to watch programs of other broadcasting stations.pIf you use Channel Search to select channels after you move, etc., you might find the channels you could not store by “Auto channel setting”. Execute “Add to ch. list” to store the channels you found, and then you can watch the channel from the next time.pWhen starting 1Seg or switching channels, it takes a while before you can watch a 1Seg program.Function Menu of Viewer DisplayInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChannel info You can display the detailed display of the selected channel list. Select a broadcasting station to switch to it.Program info You can display information of the program you are watching.pWhen you have not obtained program information, it is not displayed.Channel list Go to step 1 of “Select Channel List” on page 294.Channel setting See page 294.Add to ch. list You can add the broadcasting station you are currently watching to the channel list.YESpThe broadcasting station is stored in the lowest number of an unoccupied remote-control number from 13 onward.Program guide See page 300.
2981SegSwitch display You can switch the contents of the viewer display.Select an item.pIf you set to “Enlarged V. img+DBC”, the video on the vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the video might be cut depending on the program.pEven if you set to “Data broadcasting”, the audio from 1Seg programs is played back.Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode while watching a 1Seg program on the vertical display.Icon See page 310.Mail ticker disp. See page 310.Compose message See page 299.Settings(Off timer)When the specified time elapses, the confirmation display appears asking whether to end watching or recording a program (except for Timer Recording).Select a time.Settings(Brightness)You can set the brightness of the display light to Level 1 (dark) through 5 (bright).Select a brightness level.pIf you set to “Auto setting”, it is adjusted automatically in accordance with the ambient brightness sensed by the light sensor.pThe setting here is valid until you finish watching the 1Seg program. The setting at 1Seg start-up follows the setting specified by “Brightness” of “Backlight” on page 118.Settings(Mobile W-Speed)See page 309.Function menu Operation/ExplanationAt 1Seg start-upWhen “Caption” is set to “ON”: V. img+Caption+DBCWhen “Caption” is set to “OFF”: Visual image+DBCAt 1Seg start-upVideo ModeAt 1Seg start-upOFFSettings(Image quality)See page 309.Settings(LCD AI)See page 119.Settings(Auto volume)See page 309.Settings(Remaster)See page 309.Settings(Listening)See page 310.Settings (Equalizer) See page 310.Settings(Main/sub sound)SoundMain/sub soundMain sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub soundSettings(Switch audio data)SoundSwitch audio dataSound 1 or Sound 2pYou can switch only when audio that can be switched is found.Settings(TV sound w/ closed)See page 310.Settings(ECO mode)See page 310.Data broadcasting (Reload contents)You can reload the data broadcasting site being displayed.Reload contentspThe confirmation display appears asking whether to re-send the data you entered, depending on the site.Data broadcasting (Certificate)See page 176.Data broadcasting (Set image display)See page 188.Function menu Operation/ExplanationAt 1Seg start-upMain sound
2991SegData broadcasting(Sound effect)See page 310.Data broadcasting(ToruCa from dataBC)See page 274.Data broadcasting (Reset settings)See page 310.Back to data BC You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and return to the data broadcasting. Tune service You can select a program to watch when the same broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services (programs).Select a channel.TVlink list You can display the TVlink list. (See page 302)AV output See page 382.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Settings (Off timer)>pIn the following cases, the Off Timer confirmation display appears after each operation finishes.・When the timer recording is on standby・When a booked program is being recorded・When a still image is being saved・When an unsaved image is left・When channels are being searched by Auto Channel SettingYou can compose and send i-mode mail messages while you are watching a 1Seg program. (Multiwindow)When you send an i-mode mail message to the FOMA phone supporting the “Media To” function by “Recom. channel mail”, the receiving end can start 1Seg by using the “Media To” function.pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the Message Composition display is shown. You cannot display the caption and data broadcasting, either.pYou can compose SMS messages while watching a 1Seg program.1Viewer displayi()Compose messageCompose message or Recom. channel mailCompose message . . . You can compose a new i-mode mail message. Go to step 2 on page 198.Recom. channel mail . . . You can compose an i-mode mail message whose text contains the information of the channel you are watching. Go to step 2 on page 198.pWhen the Message Composition display is shown, you can switch between the Message Composition display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold c for at least one second. When the viewer display is shown, you can change the display directions each time you press d.Send i-mode Mail while WatchingMessageCompositiondisplayViewer displayInformationpEven when you show the Message Composition display/detailed Sent Mail display by Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow.pOnly the audio is played back from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display if you select “Mail history” from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list or a detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program and show the detailed Sent Mail display of a mail message sent to a person whose mail address is not stored in the Phonebook.pWhen “ ” appears at the lower left of the display, switch to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to the viewer display and then operate.
3001SegThe ticker notifies you of the receiving of the i-mode mail message, SMS message, and Messages R/F. You can open the detailed Received Mail display while you are watching a 1Seg program. (Multiwindow)pYou cannot use this function when “Mail ticker display” is set to “OFF”.pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the detailed Received Mail display is shown. You cannot display the caption and data broadcasting, either.pYou can display SMS messages while watching a 1Seg program.1Receive i-mode mail while viewer display is shownPress l( ) while the ticker is displayed.pWhen the Detailed Received Mail display is shown, you can switch between the Detailed Mail display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold c for at least one second. When the viewer display is shown, you can change the display directions each time you press d.pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose/send i-mode mail message. (See page 456)Receive i-mode Mail while WatchingInformationDetailedReceivedMail displayViewerdisplayInformationpEven if “Mail ticker display” is set to “Sender+subject”, the titles are not displayed for Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, and SMS messages received from the parties not stored in the Phonebook.pEven when you show the detailed Received Mail display by Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow. However, you cannot show the viewer display and only the audio from a 1Seg program is played back when you display a mail message from a person whose mail address is not stored in the Phonebook.By using the Program Guide i-αppli, you can start 1Seg by selecting a program from the program guide, book programs, and set timer recordings. (See page 259)1m1SegProgram guide“Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)” starts.pPress l( ) from the display of “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)” to watch the program currently broadcast on the selected channel.pFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pWhen the display is shown in the multiwindow, or when only audio from a 1Seg program is played back with the detailed Received Mail display shown, you cannot press +No to show other messages. However, you can press +No to show other messages when you select “Mail history” from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list or the detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program.pWhen “ ” appears at the lower left of the display, switch to Horizontal Open Style or do something to switch to viewer display and then operate.<Program Guide i-αppli>Using Program Guide i-αppliInformationInformationpYou can set the Program Guide i-αppli by “Program guide key” of “Software setting”.pWhen you use “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)” for the first time, you need to do initial settings.pThis software program is the i-αppli program that uses the mail function, so it is not available when the mode of 2in1 is set to B Mode.
3011Seg1Seg enables you to use the data broadcasting in addition to the video and audio. Various information including still/moving images is available from the site linked with TV programs.1Viewer display (Video Mode)c()Video Mode switches to Data Broadcasting Mode and “ ” appears.pAudio from a 1Seg program is played back even during Data Broadcasting Mode.pYou can display only data broadcasting when you press i( ) from the viewer display and select “Data broadcasting” of “Switch display”.2Select an item (link).pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode depending on the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site.pSee page 173 for the operation while a site is displayed.<Data Broadcasting>Using Data BroadcastingInformationpEach time you press +c( ), Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode are switched.pIf you change a channel during Data Broadcasting Mode, Video Mode returns.pYou cannot display the data broadcasting on the horizontal display.pYou cannot enter pictographs when you enter characters on data broadcasting or data broadcasting site.pThe audio might be played back depending on the program while the i-mode site is displayed. The 1Seg video does not appear, however.pWhen you display the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, a tone might be output depending on the program. In that case, the playback of the 1Seg audio temporarily stops, and the tone of the data broadcasting is preferentially output.You can use the highlighted information in the data broadcasting site to easily use the functions such as making calls, or sending mail. Select an item (link) and use the Phone To/AV Phone To or Mail To function. (See page 187)pWhile the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is displayed, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the contents you entered on the site or whether to permit obtaining mobile phone information.pWhen you select “YES (confirm once)” from the confirmation display for data broadcasting, the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee while watching a 1Seg program or playing back a video. (See page 311)pIf you move in a place where the airwave is unstable while watching a 1Seg program, the video, data broadcasting, and data broadcasting site may be automatically updated. In that case, the top page of the data broadcasting appears, and the information you have entered into the connected data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is cleared. Ensure that you watch the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site in a place where the airwave is stable.Use Highlighted Information for Various OperationsInformationInformationpDepending on the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, the function of composing i-mode mail or storing the Phonebook entries might be automatically used. The confirmation display asking whether to use each function appears.
3021SegSome data broadcasting programs might contain TV links which lead to the details of the programs or related information site. From the TV links, you can store the site address information in the TVlink list and can easily call them up for browsing later.When you select the item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink list, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it in the TVlink list.You can store up to 50 TV links.1In Data Broadcasting Mode, select an item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink listYESpWhen you try to store the same URL or memo information, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite it.pWhen the maximum number of TV links has already been stored in the TVlink list, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store after deleting.<TVlink>Using TV LinksStore in TV LinksInformationpValidity period is set for some links. If the validity period is expired, you cannot store it.pThe number of characters that can be stored for a URL is up to 60 half-pitch characters. When the number of characters used for a URL exceeds that, you cannot store it.pYou can store a title of up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters. When the number of characters exceeds that, the excess is deleted. When a TV link has no title, the URL is displayed on the list display.pThe contents you entered in the site is not stored in the TVlink.1m1SegTVlinkSelect a TV link to be displayed.pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode, select “YES”.pFor a link whose validity period is expired, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it.pAfter you brought up a site using a TV link, the TV link is displayed at the top of the TVlink list next time.■Icons in the TVlink listBring Up a Stored TV LinkTVlink listIcon Format DescriptionMemo information Displays memo information.Link communication contentsConnects to the data broadcasting site. (Video and caption are not displayed.)i-mode contents Connects to the i-mode site.Full Browser contents Connects via Full Browser.Function Menu of the TVlink ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationDisplay detail Displays the title, URL, outline, content type, and validity period of the TV link.No. of TVlink Displays the number of the registered TV links.Delete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for TV links to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYES
3031SegYou can save the program as video or still images while you are watching.pThe copy control signals such as “Copy never”, “Copy once”, and “Copy free” are incorporated into 1Seg. The copy control signals are determined by each broadcasting station.pYou cannot record the programs of “Copy never”. Further, when the copy control signal is changed to “Copy never” during recording, the recording session is closed, and the video recorded up to that point is saved.The recorded video is saved to the microSD card (“Data box”→“1Seg”→“Video”).pSee page 345 for playing back the recorded video.pYou cannot save the recorded video to the FOMA phone.1Viewer displayp(for at least one second)The confirmation tone sounds, “ ” appears, and recording starts.pYou can start recording also by pressing Oo( ) in Video Mode.pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record video. Even if “ ” is indicated, you might not be able to record it depending on the airwave conditions.pYou cannot change the channel during recording.2Press p.The confirmation tone sounds and video is saved.pYou can save the video also by pressing Oo( ) in Video Mode.pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Gbytes, or the storage location becomes full, the recording automatically ends, and then the video recorded up to that point is saved.■Estimate of the number of saved files and recordable timepThe savable number of video files decreases depending on the data volume.pThe maximum recordable time is an estimate for microSD card of 2 Gbytes, and it is an estimate for 224 kbps of video, 48 kbps of audio, and 52 kbps of data (including captions). The recordable time varies depending on the broadcasting station or program.Recording a 1Seg Program while WatchingRecord VideoThe maximum savable number 99The maximum recordable time (total) Approx. 000 minutesThe recorded still images are saved to your FOMA phone (“Data box”→“1Seg”→“Image” folder). You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537)pSee page 330 for displaying the recorded still image files.pYou cannot save still images to the microSD card.1Viewer displaypThe confirmation tone sounds, and the still image is saved.pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record still images.InformationpThe playing time of the saved data might become shorter than the recording time depending on the airwave conditions.pThe recording is not suspended even when you switch displays by Multitask or when a call comes in during recording.pWhen the airwave conditions are changed to indicate “ ” during recording, recording shifts to pause state, then “ ” and “ ” are displayed. Video and audio during that period are not saved.pIf you remove the battery pack or pull out the microSD card during recording, the recorded data is saved as the file that cannot be played back.pDepending on the broadcasting station or program, video and audio might be saved a few seconds after your recording operation.pYou cannot record when the video storage area is full. Also, you might not be able to record when the unused space in the storage area is not enough. Delete unnecessary video files and try again.pSome programs cannot use the storage area fully.pThe file name and title name of the saved video are as follows:File name: “PRGXXX”Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”(X: numerals, Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)pYou cannot set the recorded video for the Stand-by display, ring tone or Call Receiving display.pYou cannot save video during AV output.Record Still Images
3041Seg You can book programs or set timer recordings of 1Seg. At the specified date/time, an alarm sounds to notify you of the start of the program.pYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by using the channel information displayed in the Program Guide i-αppli, sites, or mail.You can book programs by setting the date/time, channel, and program name. By using “Act. TV w/ alarm”, 1Seg automatically starts at the set time. You can book up to 100 programs.1m1SegBook program listl()Do the following operations.pSelect a booked program to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing l().InformationpThe file name and title name of the saved still image are as follows:File name: “YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX”Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, X: numeral)pYou cannot set the recorded still image for the Stand-by display or the Call Receiving display.pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum.pData broadcasting and caption cannot be saved as still images.pYou cannot record still images during AV output.<Book Program> <Timer Recording>Booking Programs or Setting Timer Recording of 1SegBook Program ListItem Operation/ExplanationChannel Select a channel.Edit title Enter a program name.pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96 half-pitch characters.Start date settingEnter a date/time for starting watching.Select an item.Enter date. . . . . .  Enter a date/time directly.Choose date  . . .  Select a date from the Calendar and enter a time.Repeat Select a type of repeat.pIf you select “1time”, the booking is not repeated.pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l().pThe program booking set with repetition is counted as one booking.Alarm Select an alarm method.ON . . . . . . . . . . . .Alerts you at the time set for the start date/time comes. The setting for alarm notification is completed.ON/Set time . . . .Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification.OFF . . . . . . . . . . .Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification is completed.Select how many seconds (minutes) before the specified time to be alerted.pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to “ON”, you cannot set “15 seconds before”, “30 seconds before”, and “45 seconds before” as the prenotification time.Alarm tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folderSelect an alarm tone.Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.pIf you set to “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.Item Operation/Explanation
3051Seg2Press l().Act. TV w/ alarm Select an item.Auto ON . . . . . .  After the Booking Alarm Notification display appears, 1Seg automatically starts.Manual ON . . . .  You can manually activate 1Seg from the Booking Alarm Notification display.OFF . . . . . . . . . .  Only the booking alarm notification is notified. You cannot activate 1Seg from the Booking Alarm Notification display.Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to notify booking alarm when the booking alarm notification time arrives during power off.ON or OFF1Seg volume You can set the sound volume of a 1Seg program when it is activated by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.Use Bo to adjust the volume.Off timer You can set to end watching a 1Seg program for when the specified time elapses after the 1Seg program automatically starts by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.Select a time.Prefer manner modeYou can set the booking alarm tone which sounds at the specified time during Manner Mode.ON or OFFON . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “Alarm for Book program” on page 114.OFF . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.Item Operation/ExplanationYou can set timer recordings by setting the date/time, channel, and program name. You can set up to 100 timer recordings.1m1SegTimer recording listl()Do the following operations.pSelect a set timer recording to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing l().pYou can display the used memory space (estimate) by pressing i().Timer Recording ListItem Operation/ExplanationChannel Select a channel.Edit title Enter a program name.pYou can enter up to 48 full-pitch/96 half-pitch characters.Start date settingEnter a date/time for starting or ending recording. The booking alarm notification is made about one minute before the starting time.Select an item.Enter date . . . . . . .Enter a date/time directly.Choose date . . . . .Select a date from the Calendar and enter a time.End date settingRepeat Select a type of repeat.pIf you select “1 time”, the recording is not repeated.pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press l().pThe timer recording set with repetition is counted as one event.Alarm You can set whether to make the alarm tone for the booking alarm notification.ON or OFFVolume Use Bo to adjust the volume.pYou cannot set the volume to “Step”.
3061Seg2Press l().pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to set the timer recording, select “YES”. If you select “YES (confirm once)”, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.Priority You can set a recording operation for when the start date/time arrives while operating a function which cannot be started up simultaneously.Recording or OperationRecording . . . . Suspends and terminates the function being operated, and starts recording.Operation. . . . . The confirmation display appears asking whether to start recording. Select “YES” to suspend and terminate the function being operated and start recording.pFor while operating a function which can be started up simultaneously, recording starts by the Multitask function.pWhen the start time arrives during a call (including dialing and ringing), recording starts after you end the call. When you are using another function during a call, recording starts after you end the call and the function.Overwrite settingWhen you set a recording to be repeated and set “Overwrite setting” to “ON”, the program recorded last time is automatically deleted and overwritten.ON or OFFItem Operation/ExplanationInformationpYou can book programs or set timer recordings also by using the program information displayed in the Program Guide i-αppli, sites, or mail. In that case, the registration display might appear with the start date/time, end date/time, channel, and program name entered.pWhen you booked multiple programs whose booking alarm notification is made at the same date/time, the notification for the program set for the earliest start date/time is preferentially made. When the start date/time of the programs is the same, the notification set for the program booked in the last is preferentially made.pYou cannot set multiple timer recordings whose recording time overlaps. If you set two timer recordings and the recording end time of one program is the same as the recording start time of the other, recording of the first program ends about one minute earlier.pYou cannot book programs or set timer recordings of which starting date/time or alarm notification date/time (for Timer Recording, about one minute before) is over except for the booking set to be repeated.pThe program bookings and timer recordings of which alarm notification date/time is over are automatically deleted. However, the bookings set to be repeated, program bookings for which “Alarm” is set to “OFF” are not deleted. Also the bookings are not deleted if you were operating the program booking/timer recording function on the notification date/time.pWhen no channel lists are set, you cannot book programs and set timer recordings.pTurn off the FOMA phone after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.pWhen you have set “Priority” to “Operation” and the confirmation display is shown, the recording does not start even at the recording start time and starts at the time you select “YES”. However, the recording is not executed if the recording end time is over.pWhen “Overwrite setting” is set to “ON”, the timer recording starts after erasing the program previously recorded. Regardless of whether you have watched the recorded program or not, or whether you have succeeded or failed timer recording, the previously recorded program is erased. If it is not erased before the timer recording starts, recording might not start on time.pWhen you set “Overwrite setting” to “ON” for a recording, the file size of the recorded video might become larger than that of the video recorded last time because the file size varies depending on the recording (or watching) environment or programs. Note that you might not be able to record correctly when the unused memory space in the storage location is not enough.pThe title of the recorded video file takes the program name booked for the timer recording.p“ ” appears on the viewer display during recording by Timer Recording.pThe audio from a 1Seg program is not played back during recording that has been started by Timer Recording. You can play back the audio by pressing -r or adjusting the sound volume, however.Function Menu while Book Program List or Timer Recording List is DisplayedInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationNew Go to step 1 on page 304 for Book Program.Go to step 1 on page 305 for Timer Recording.
3071SegThe icon appears on the desktop.“ ”  . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).“ ”  . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.pIf you set “Display setting”→“Clock”→“Clock display” to “OFF”, or set “Alarm” to “OFF” for a program booking, the icons are not displayed.Edit Go to step 1 on page 304 for Book Program.Go to step 1 on page 305 for Timer Recording.Sort You can change the display order.Select an order.Delete this YESDelete past You can delete the program bookings and timer recordings whose start date/time or end date/time is set for the past date/time.YESDelete selected Put a check mark for program bookings or timer recordings to be deletedl()YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESMemory info[Timer Recording list only]You can display the used memory space (estimate).When you set an alarm for “Book program” or “Timer recording”Function menu Operation/Explanation<Book Program>If you set “Act. TV w/ alarm” to other than “Auto ON”, the alarm sounds for about five minutes, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of “Vibrator”. The set start date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on the display.If you set “Alarm” to “ON” and “Act. TV w/ alarm” to “Auto ON”, 1Seg automatically starts when the specified time comes. The alarm does not sound.To end watching, press h and select “YES”.If you set “Off timer”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue watching when the specified time elapses. If you select “NO” or do nothing for about 15 seconds, 1Seg automatically terminates.<Timer Recording>About one minute before starting time, the alarm sounds for about two seconds, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of “Vibrator”. The set start date/time, end date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on the display, then the viewer display appears. If you do nothing for about one minute after the recording starts, the Stand-by display appears. If the timer recording has started with the FOMA phone closed, you can show the viewer display by opening the FOMA phone. If the FOMA phone is opened, you can show the viewer display by re-opening the FOMA phone or by pressing x and selecting “Activate 1Seg”.To end video recording by Timer Recording and save video, press p on the viewer display. In Video Mode, you can end the video recording and save video also by pressing Oo ( ) and selecting “YES”.pDuring a callThe alarm sounds from the earpiece.pDuring operations<Book Program>When “Alarm setting” is set to “Operation preferred”, the booking alarm notification is made only when the Stand-by display is shown. When it is set to “Alarm preferred”, the booking alarm notification is made even while you are operating another function or during a call. (See page 416)<Timer Recording>Timer Recording works according to the setting of “Priority” (see page 306). However, Timer Recording might not work when you are reading to/writing from the microSD card, or accessing the Data Storage Center.When the time specified for “Book program” or “Timer recording” comes
3081SegpWhen the booking alarm notification for a program booking or timer recording is set to the same time of “Alarm”, “ToDo”, or “Schedule”The notification is made in the priority order of “Alarm” → “Timer recording” → “ToDo”→ “Schedule” → “Book program”. However, if you set alarm for “Auto power ON” and a program booking to the same time, and the specified time comes while the power is turned off, the icon does not appear on the desktop.A missed program booking or timer recording is notified by the icon on the desktop.pWhen the power is turned offThe booking alarm notification is not made except for the program booking set with “Auto power ON”. For Timer Recording, you cannot record a 1Seg program unless the power has been set to “ON” one minute before the start date/time.The icon does not appear on the desktop even after turning on the power.pIn Manner ModeThe vibrator, message display, and illumination light notify you. The alarm sounds at the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 113)pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase LockThe booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each lock is released one minute before the start date/time.After releasing each lock, the icon appears on the desktop to inform you.pDuring infrared data exchange, during iC communication, or while SD-PIM is operated The booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each function is finished one minute before the start date/time.After each function is finished, the icon appears on the desktop to inform you.pWhile updating software programThe booking alarm notification is not made. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless software update is finished one minute before the start date/time.When the specified time comes during updating software program, the icon does not appear on the desktop even after updating is completed.InformationpWhen you book programs or timer recordings with “Alarm setting” set to “Alarm preferred”, and the booking alarm time arrives while you are dialing, the alarm sounds after you have called up the other party. When booking alarm time arrives during ringing, the alarm sounds after communication has started.The alarm tone stops by pressing any of the keys, but the animation/i-motion becomes a still image, and the booking alarm message stays displayed. When “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set to “OFF”, press any key again to clear. However, you cannot clear the booking alarm message by pressing a side key, with the FOMA phone closed. When a call comes in, the alarm stops.Press Oo( ) and select “YES” from the Booking Alarm Notification display; then 1Seg starts, and you can watch the booked program. If you start watching the booked program during recording, the video recorded up to that point is automatically saved; then the booked program appears. pWhen you have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” and set “Auto power ON” to automatically turn on the power to make a booking alarm notification for a program booking, the display for entering your PIN1 code appears after the power is automatically turned on. The booking alarm notification is not made unless you enter your PIN1 code.pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to automatically turn on the power to make a booking alarm notification for a program booking, the alarm notification is made after the wake-up image stops.pYou might not be able to set some i-motion movies/Chaku-uta Full® music files for an alarm for a program booking.pDepending on the i-motion movie you set for the alarm for a program booking, only the audio might be played back at the specified time.pWhen a Chaku-uta Full® music file is set for an alarm for a program booking, only the audio is played back at the specified time. The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm tone differs from for when you are notified by an alarm.To clear alarm tone/booking alarm message, animation, and i-motion for Book ProgramWhen “Act. TV w/ alarm” of Book Program is set to “Manual ON”Information
3091SegThe icon appears on the desktop. You can check that icon for the contents of the missed booking alarm (booking information) or recording result.The booking information or recording result is the latest missed one.pWhen “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set to other than “OFF”, you can start 1Seg also by pressing Oo( ) and select “YES” from the display of booking Information.pWhen recorded video is stored, you can play back the video also by pressing Oo( ) from the display of recording result.You can display up to 20 recording results from the latest one. 1m1SegRecording resultSelect a recording result.pTo delete all recording results, press i( ), enter your Terminal Security Code, and select “YES”.1m1SegUser settingsDo the following operations.When “Booking Alarm Notification” is not executed or recording is completedRecording Result<User Settings>Settings for 1SegItem Operation/ExplanationCaption You can set whether to display the caption for when watching starts.ON or OFFCaption posit. in w-scrYou can set the caption position on the horizontal display.Upper or LowerRec. when low batteryYou can set whether to continue recording when the battery runs short during recording.ON or OFFON . . . . The confirmation display does not appear and recording continues.OFF . . . The confirmation display appears asking whether to end recording.Rec. program when callYou can set whether to start recording automatically when a call or PushTalk call comes in during watching a 1Seg program.ON or OFFMobile W-Speed The outlines of images are automatically corrected so that you can watch more smooth videos of 1Seg programs. ON or OFFImage quality You can change the image quality. Select an item.Standard . . .  The average image qualitySports . . . . .  The image quality suitable for sports programsCinema . . . .  The image quality suitable for moviesDynamic . . .  The dynamic image quality by accentuationSound(Auto volume)You can set whether to turn up the sound volume so that it will be more audible.Sound effectAuto volumeON or OFFSound(Remaster)You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.Sound effectRemasterON or OFFItem Operation/Explanation
3101SegSound(Listening)You can set sound effect for listening.Sound effectListeningSelect an item.Surround . . . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.Natur 1/2. . . . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.OFF. . . . . . . . Sets Listening to “OFF”.p“Natur 1/2” is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device.Sound(Equalizer)You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.Sound effectEqualizerSelect an item.Normal . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.Dynamic. . . Makes the sound dynamic by accentuation.Voice. . . . . . Makes conversation audible.Train . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage.Sound(TV sound while closed)You can set whether to continue outputting audio for when you close the FOMA phone while watching a 1Seg program.TV sound while closedON or OFFpWhen the setting is “OFF”, audio is silenced when you close the FOMA phone. Audio is played back again when you open the FOMA phone and select “OK”.ECO mode You can set ECO Mode which fixes some settings and reduces the battery consumption.YESpTo release ECO Mode, perform the same operation.pOnce ECO Mode is set, the following settings are fixed and cannot be changed. However, if you release ECO Mode, settings return.Mobile W-Speed: OFFImage quality: StandardRemaster: OFFListening: OFFEqualizer: NormalItem Operation/ExplanationDisplay light You can set the period of time of the display lights while you are watching a 1Seg program.Constant light or Lighting durationEnter a lighting duration (minutes).pEnter from “01” through “30” in two digits.Data broadcasting(Set image display)You can set whether to display images of the data broadcasting site. (See page 188)Data broadcasting(Sound effect setting)You can set whether to sound an effect tone of the data broadcasting and the data broadcasting site.Sound effect settingON or OFFData broadcasting(Reset settings)If you select “YES (confirm once)” from the confirmation display for data broadcasting during watching a 1Seg program or playing back video, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward for both of them. The confirmation display resumes after you execute Reset Settings.Reset settingsYESIcon You can set whether to always display guide (see page 296) in the horizontal display.ON or OFFpEven if you set “Icon” to “OFF”, the icon such as “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in. Mail ticker display For when you receive an i-mode mail message, SMS message, or Message R/F while watching a 1Seg program, you can set whether to notify you of the receiving by the ticker on the viewer display.Select an item.Sender+subject. . . .Displays ticker of the sender and title.Rcpt notification . . .Displays ticker of reception notification only.OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Does not display ticker on the viewer display.pSee page 300 for details on ticker display.Check TV settings You can check each of “User settings”.Reset channel settingYou can delete all channel lists.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESItem Operation/Explanation
3111SegReset storage area i()DeleteDelete this or Delete allDelete this  . . .  Deletes only the information of the affiliated broadcasting stations you selected, from the broadcasting storage area.Delete all. . . . .  Deletes the information of all affiliated broadcasting stations created in the broadcasting storage area.YESpIf you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.Reset TV settings You can reset each of “User settings” to the default.See “Function List” for the items to be reset. (See page 482)Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESItem Operation/ExplanationInformation<Rec. program when call>pThe recording cannot be started when the call comes in the following cases:・During playing background ・During displaying in the multiwindow・During recording video ・During recording by Timer Recording・During preparing recording of Timer Recording<Mobile W-Speed>pWhen you set to “ON”, you might not be able to have enough effects of “Image quality”.pMobile W-Speed becomes invalid during ECO mode, displaying in the multiwindow, or AV output.pDepending on the broadcast state, you might not be able to have the effects of Mobile W-Speed.pEven when “Mobile W-Speed” is set to “ON” during recording or during timer recording, it is invalid when you play back the recorded video.<Sound (TV sound while closed)>pWhen “TV sound while closed” is set to “ON”, the information about the data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee.pRegardless of the setting of this function, the audio is played back even if your FOMA phone is closed when you switch displays by Multitask, or when the display appears in multiple windows.<Data broadcasting (Set image display)>pIf you change this setting, “Set image display” of “i-mode settings” is also changed.<Data broadcasting (Reset settings)>pYou cannot reset the confirmation display at the start of 1Seg (see page 292) and at the time of Timer Recording (see page 306).<Icon>pThe guide display might appear even if “Icon” is set to “OFF” when the airwave conditions have got worse.Information
312
313Full Browser/PC MovieDisplaying Web Pages Designed for PC . . . . . <Full Browser> 314Setting Full Browser  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Full Browser Settings> 317What is PC Movie? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  320Downloading PC Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  320Playing Back PC Movies from Data Box  . . <PC Movie Player> 322
314Full Browser/PC Movie You can browse Internet web pages designed for PCs using the Full Browser function. You can display even the Internet web pages that cannot be correctly displayed by i-mode. However, you cannot display or correctly display some Internet web pages.If you change the style while running Full Browser, the display automatically switches between the vertical display and the horizontal display. However, the display might not switch automatically during data communication or while a message is shown. When you switch it manually, select “CHG wide scr. mode” from the Function menu.pThe data such as Home URL or Bookmarks registered via Full Browser cannot be used via i-mode. The contents set by Full Browser are invalid for i-mode, either.pNote that you are charged a high communication fee for the massive data communication such as browsing Internet web pages having many images or downloading data files. For details on the packet communication fee, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pYou can browse Internet web pages composed of frames. You can select a frame to display it as well. (See page 316)pYou can display SSL/TLS※-compatible pages via Full Browser.※SSL and TLS are the methods of safer data communication using authentication/encryption technology to protect your privacy. SSL/TLS pages prevent eavesdropping and information alteration during communication by exchanging encrypted data files. Further, server authentication prevents web spoofing, thus making your personal information such as credit card number or postal address exchanged safer.<Full Browser>Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC1iFull BrowserSelect an item.Home. . . . . . . . . . . . Displays an Internet web page set as Home URL.Bookmark. . . . . . . . Displays an Internet web page stored in Bookmark. (See page 178)Last URL. . . . . . . . . Displays an Internet web page you viewed last time.Go to location  . . . . Displays an Internet web page by entering a URL. (See “Displaying Internet Web Pages” on page 178)Full Browser settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configures Full Browser settings. (See page 317)pWhen “Access setting” is set to “No”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to start Full Browser. Highlight “Yes” and select “OK” to switch setting of “Access setting”, then Full Browser starts up.pTo end Full Browser, press h with an Internet web page displayed and select “YES”.…: Displaying in the multiwindow…Window number/Number of windows…: During communication in another window: During communication in another frame…: Phone Mode: PC Mode…: Displaying an enlarged frameInformationpIt may take long to display some Internet web pages.pYou cannot use the following functions on Full Browser:・Phone To function ・Screen memos・Flash movies ・PDF filesFull Browser DisplayFull Browser Display
315Full Browser/PC Movie■Operations for the Full Browser displayTwo modes, “Phone mode” and “PC mode”, are available for the Full Browser display.1iFull BrowserFull Browser settingsDisplay Mode settingPhone mode or PC modePhone mode . . . Displays an Internet web page to fit in the display width of the FOMA phone. You do not need to scroll sideways; you can browse Internet web pages by scrolling upward and downward.PC mode . . . Displays an Internet web page in the same format as when it is displayed on your personal computer in 800 (width) x 600 (height) dots. You can browse Internet web pages by scrolling upward, downward, and sideways.pWhen you show an Internet web page, you can switch the display modes each time you select “Change disp. mode” from the Function menu.pWhen you show the horizontal display, “PC mode” is automatically set and you cannot change the setting.Operation Key operationPhone Mode PC ModeReturn to previous page Co or 11Forward to next page Vo or 33Scroll display BoMoScroll display page by page </> or m()/c()pTo scroll to the top/end of the page, </>(for at least one second), m()/c( ) (for at least one second) or a/sReload 2Enlarge/Reduce display size 7 to reduce the display size, 8 to display in standard size, 9 to enlarge the display sizeDisplay Bookmark Folder list 0Switch Display ModePress l( ) from the Full Browser display to switch to “Operation mode”. The operation palette is displayed by switching to Operation Mode, then you can move to the previous/next page or enlarge/reduce the display size.No: Moves to the previous/next page.Bo: Enlarges/reduces the display size.You can simultaneously open up to five Internet web pages via Full Browser.pYou can switch the simultaneously opened Internet web pages to show one by one.1Full Browser displayi()Open new windowSelect an item.Bookmark . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page stored in Bookmark. (See page 178)Enter URL . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page by entering a URL. (See “Displaying Internet Web Pages” on page 178)Home . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet web page set as Home URL.Link  . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show a page of the link highlighted on the Full Browser display.pSee page 316 for how to switch or close the window.Use Operation ModeOpen in the MultiwindowInformationpSome Internet web pages have links configured to open in new windows. When you open such a link, the new window opens even if you do not perform above operations.
316Full Browser/PC MovieYou can display Internet web pages composed of frames. You can select a frame, and enlarge each selected frame for displaying.1From an Internet web page composed of framesUse Bo to highlight a frame, and press Oo().pTo return to the display for all frames, press r or select “All frames” from the Function menu.You can switch to Full Browser to show the Internet web pages incorrectly displayed by i-mode.1While a page to be shown is displayed in Full Browseri()InternetSwitch to FBOKDisplay a Page Composed of FramesAll frames Enlarged by frameInformationpWhen an Internet web page has many divided frames, you might not be able to open all frames. “ ” is added to the frames that you could not open.Switch from i-mode to Full BrowserInformationpYou cannot correctly display some Internet web pages.Function Menu of Full Browser DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAdd bookmark See page 178.Bookmark See page 179.Enter URL You can enter a URL to display an Internet web page.Select a text box.Go to step 2 on page 178.pThe URL of displaying site is entered beforehand.Reload The contents on the Internet web page is updated to the latest ones.Change disp. mode See page 315.CHG wide scr. modeThe image is displayed horizontally by rotating the display 90 degrees to the right.pWhen it is already displayed horizontally, the vertical display returns.Open new window See page 315.Change window You can switch the windows while displaying the Internet web pages in the multiwindow.Select a window.Close window You can close the window while displaying the Internet web pages in the multiwindow.YESSave image See page 182.Add desktop icon See page 127.Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL of the displayed Internet web page pasted to the text.Go to step 2 on page 198.Home(Set as home URL)You can set the displayed Internet web page as Home URL.Set as home URLYES
317Full Browser/PC MovieHome(Display home)You can display the Internet web page set as Home URL.Display homeScroll (Speed) See page 317.Scroll(Focus while scroll)See page 317.Zoom See page 318.All frames You can return to the display for all frames from the display for the enlarged frame.Retry You can play back the displayed animation from the beginning.Page info You can display information of the displayed Internet web page.URL or TitleOthers(Set image display)You can set whether to display images.Set image displaySee page 318.Others(Change CHR code)See page 176.Others(Cookie setting)You can set whether to validate cookies.Cookie settingGo to step 1 of “Cookie Setting” on page 319.Others(Delete Cookies)You can delete cookies.Delete CookiesGo to step 1 of “Delete Cookies” on page 319.Others(Referer setting)You can set whether to send a referer.Referer settingGo to step 1 of “Referer Setting” on page 319.Others(Certificate)See page 176.Function menu Operation/ExplanationYou can upload JPEG or GIF images stored in the FOMA phone to an Internet web page.pProcedure for uploading images differs depending on the Internet web page. Follow the instructions on the display.1iFull BrowserFull Browser settingsDo the following operations.Information<Compose message>pThe number of characters of the URL you can paste to the text is up to 512 half-pitch characters. If the URL contains 512 half-pitch characters or more, you cannot paste it.Upload ImagesInformationpWhen the total size of the selected images exceeds 80 Kbytes, or when the total size of the selected image and other files exceeds 100 Kbytes, you cannot upload the images.pYou may not be able to upload images depending on the Internet web page.pYou cannot upload the images whose output from FOMA phone is prohibited.<Full Browser Settings>Setting Full BrowserItem Operation/ExplanationDisplay Mode settingSee page 315.Scroll (Speed) You can set scroll speed.SpeedHigh speed or Low speedScroll(Focus while scroll)You can set whether to highlight links while scrolling.Focus while scrollON or OFF
318Full Browser/PC MovieZoom You can set the display size of the Internet web page.From the Function menu of the Full Browser display, you can enlarge/reduce the display size by each page.Select a display size.pIn PC Mode, you can select a display area by “Select disp. area” from the Function menu of the Full Browser display.Access setting You can set whether to use Full Browser.Yes . .  Uses Full Browser.No . . .  Displays the cautions at the start of Full Browser. Check the cautions, highlight “Yes” and then select “OK”, then the setting switches to “Yes”, and Full Browser becomes available.Home URL You can set Home URL.Select the URL fieldEnter a URLOKSet image display You can set whether to display images.ON or OFFPC Movie auto-play You can set whether to automatically play back the downloaded type of PC movies while obtaining.ON or OFFCookie setting See page 319.Delete Cookies See page 319.Referer setting See page 319.Script setting You can set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a simple program language that runs on Internet web pages. It is widely used to create Internet web pages with movements.When “Valid” is set, you can use the JavaScript function to browse Internet web pages on Full Browser. Valid or InvalidItem Operation/ExplanationWindow Open GuardYou can set whether to prevent a new window from opening automatically by JavaScript.Valid or InvalidCheck settings You can check respective Full Browser settings.Reset last URL You can erase the URL of the Internet web page you viewed last.YESItem Operation/ExplanationInformation<Access setting>pIf you replace the UIM with a new one when “Yes” is set, the setting switches to “No”.<Set image display>pEven when “ON” is set, images might not be displayed correctly. In this case, “ ” is displayed.pWhen “OFF” is set, “ ” is displayed and the data file is not received.<Script setting>pSome Internet web pages may not be displayed correctly unless “Valid” is set.pEven when “Valid” is set, it might not work depending on JavaScript.
319Full Browser/PC MovieBy using cookies, you can effectively access the Internet web pages you have accessed once.A cookie is the system to temporarily save personal information such as the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet web page. The information from the server is written into the FOMA phone, temporarily saved, and used for content services.pIf a cookie is sent, the information such as the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet web page is also sent to the web page. Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending a cookie, we cannot be held responsible for that. However, you may not be able to correctly display or use some Internet web pages or content services unless the cookie setting is valid.You can set whether to validate cookies.1iFull BrowserFull Browser settingsCookie settingSelect an item.Valid. . . . . . .  Always validates cookies. The confirmation display does not appear before a cookie is sent or received.Invalid . . . . .  Always invalidates cookies.Sending. . . .  Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears each time before a cookie is sent.Receiving . .  Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears each time before a cookie is received.Sending/receiving . . . . . . . . . . .  The confirmation display appears asking whether to permit a cookie to be sent or received each time before a cookie is sent or received.pWhen you replace a UIM with another one, “Invalid” is set. If you change the setting with the another one, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code might appear.CookieCookie SettingInformationpWhen “Sending”, “Receiving”, or “Sending/receiving” is set, the confirmation display might consecutively appear asking whether to send/receive (update) cookies depending on the Internet web page.1iFull BrowserFull Browser settingsDelete CookiesEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESThe referer denotes the link source information. When a referer is sent, the information about from which page you have accessed it is sent to the site. Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending a referer, we cannot be held responsible for that.You can set whether to send a referer while an Internet web page is open.1iFull BrowserFull Browser settingsReferer settingSelect an item.Send. . . . . .  Sends a referer.Unsend . . .  Does not send a referer.Notify . . . . .  When a referer is sent, the confirmation display appears asking whether to send it.Delete CookiesRefererReferer SettingInformationpWhen “Notify” is set, the confirmation display might consecutively appear asking whether to send a referer depending on the Internet web page.
320Full Browser/PC Movie By using high speed communication, you can play back smooth and high-quality PC movies provided by portal sites, movie specialty sites and other sites on the Internet.pPC Movie Player supports playback of Windows Media® Video.pWhen downloading or streaming a PC movie, you might receive a bulky size of file. Note that you are charged a high packet communication fee for a bulky sent/received file such as a streaming type file whose size is not limited. For the details of the packet communication fee and billing plan, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pThe distribution server for streaming type supports Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services 9. You cannot play back a streaming type of PC movie distributed from other than Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services 9.pSome sites check the operating environment (browser type, OS type, etc.) are checked and you might not be able to play back PC movies.pSee page 323 for the supported file format of PC movies.What is PC Movie?Categories DescriptionType Playback typeStreaming type(cannot be saved)Plays back while obtainingYou can play back a PC movie while obtaining it. A long time playback is available.Download type(can be saved)Plays back while obtainingWhen “PC Movie auto-play” is set to “ON”, you can play back a PC movie while obtaining it. You can save it to the microSD card after download and play it back without re-connection. Up to 10 Mbytes of a file can be downloaded.Plays back a file saved to the microSD cardTo the microSD card, you can save not only data files obtained by the FOMA phone but also PC movies obtained or created on a personal computer, and then play them back. You can save a bulky file of up to the space size of microSD card.1Select a PC movie from a PC movie obtainable siteYESSee page 322 for the operation during playback.pAmong the PC movies protected by the license, you can play back the streaming type of PC movies only. You cannot play back the download type of PC movies protected by the license.pYou might not be able to play back PC movies depending on the license setting of the PC movies.pIf files are stored to the maximum when you try to obtain a license to save it to the FOMA phone, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete currently stored licenses to save a new one. Select “YES” to delete all the stored licenses to save it. You need to obtain a license again to play back a PC movie whose license is deleted.Downloading PC MoviesPlaying Back a Streaming Type of PC MovieAbout license (Windows Media DRM)
321Full Browser/PC Movie1Select a PC movie from a PC movie obtainable siteYESSee page 322 for the operation during playback.pIf “PC Movie auto-play” is set to “ON”, a PC movie is played back during obtaining. If “OFF” is set, you can play it back by selecting “Play” from the Obtaining Completion display.pWhen you obtain a download type of PC movie from a site, the file is obtained while it is played back, and obtaining itself continues even when you suspend the playback midway.Depending on the type of a PC movie being obtained or the reason why the obtaining is suspended, the operation differs.Streaming typeAfter the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of communication, the obtaining will be in pause state. Press Oo( ) to resume playback from the suspended point. The display before playback returns when you suspend obtaining by pressing r or h.Download typeAfter the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of communication, the Obtaining Completion display appears. However, when it is played back while obtaining, the display in pause state appears. Select “Play” to play back the obtained segments of the file. Select “Save” to save the obtained segments of the file. (See “Saving PC Movies”.) Select “ResumeDL” to resume obtaining from the suspended point.The confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the data when you suspend obtaining by pressing r or h.pFor download type of PC movies, the downloading is continued during suspension if it is suspended by an incoming voice call, receiving a mail message or Message R/F, or alarm notification.pDepending on the PC movie or the site you are connecting to, you cannot resume from the suspended point even by pressing Oo( ) or selecting “ResumeDL”. In that case, the obtaining resumes from the top of the file.Playing Back a Download Type of PC MovieObtaining Completion displayWhen obtaining a PC movie is suspendedYou can save the obtained PC movies to the microSD card. However, you cannot save the streaming type of PC movies.1Obtaining Completion displaySaveYESThe PC movie is saved to the folder selected by “Select storage”.pWhen the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or memory space is full, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete unnecessary files to save new one. Select “YES” to list the files in Data Box, and select the unnecessary files to delete them. Before deleting, you can play back PC movies on the microSD card for confirmation, but cannot display the previous or next files.InformationpNote that there is no upper size limit for a streaming type of PC movie, you might exchange the files of no size limit. When obtaining it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back.pDepending on the site or PC movie you are connecting to, you might not be able to obtain a file, play it back during obtaining, or play it back after obtaining.pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave conditions, the playback during obtaining might be suspended or the images might blur. You can repeatedly play back the download type of PC movies after obtaining but cannot play back the streaming type of PC movies.pIf the PC movie has the restrictions on the playable period, you cannot play it back before and after that period. If you leave your FOMA phone with the battery pack removed for a long time, the date/time information retained in the FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the PC movie that has the restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See “Contents info” for checking the playback restrictions.pIf you try to play back a PC movie with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback.p“Contents info” of a PC movie and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by the date/time with “Summer time” set to “OFF”.Saving PC MoviesInformationpYou cannot attach the saved PC movie to an i-mode mail message for sending.
322Full Browser/PC MovieYou can play back moving images published on the Internet for personal computers or PC movies saved to the microSD card via a personal computer, etc.PC movie is played back in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during playback.pYou can play back the sound of moving images from a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431)1mData boxPC Movie2microSDSelect a folderSelect a file.pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second during playback, pause, or halt, or press h, PC Movie Player ends. It ends even when you play back during obtaining.■Operations while playing back a PC moviepSee page 325 for when you operate from the Function menu.<PC Movie Player>Playing Back PC Movies from Data BoxPC Movie Type Selection displayPC Movie Folder list PC Movie listOperation Key operationPause※1Oo() or ppOo() or p to play backFast forward※1l()pl( ) to play backDisplay next file※2※3VoDisplay previous file※2※3Co※4※1 You might not be able to operate this for some PC movies.※2 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of PC movie, or when you are playing back a PC movie while obtaining it. You cannot operate this when you play back an obtained but unsaved PC movie from the Obtaining Completion display, either.※3 The files are displayed in the order on the PC Movie list. You can operate this when you play back from the PC Movie list. However, PC movies in WVX, ASX, and WAX formats are skipped.※4 When three seconds have elapsed after starting playback, this operation returns the position to the beginning of the file. However, you might not be able to operate this for a streaming type of PC movie or when you are playing back a PC movie while obtaining it.※5 You cannot operate this during fast-rewinding.※6 The horizontal display is valid only for the current display of playback display. When you close the playback display, the vertical display returns.Select position to play※1※5Press and hold No.Sound volume adjustment Bo or </>pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available.Mute i()pi( ) or adjust the sound volume to play back soundSwitch vertical display/horizontal display※6※7[Normal Style only]c()pEach time of pressing switches display direction.Icon[Horizontal Open Style only]m※8pEach time of pressing switches whether to display icons and navigations.Remaster 9pEach time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.Listening 8Each time of pressing switches in order of “OFF” → “Surround” → “Natur1” → “Natur2”.Equalizer 7pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Normal” → “S-XBS1” → “S-XBS2” → “Train”.Operation Key operation
323Full Browser/PC Movie※7 You cannot operate this for PC movies with incompatible video data or voice-only PC movies.※8 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in.pIf you play back on the horizontal display from the pause state, the display might become dark, however, the video appears soon after you resume the playback.You can perform the following operations when you play back or pause a PC movie using the switch of Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option) or Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option).■Specification for PC movie playbackYou might be able to play back the files that exceed the bit rates described above.pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to obtain files, play back during obtaining, or play back after obtaining depending on the file.pIf the file format of either video or audio is not supported, the file might be played back with the supported format only.Operation Switch operationPause Press once.pTo play back, press again.Play back next file Press twice in succession.Play back previous file Press three times in succession.pWhen playback time is over three seconds, you go back to the beginning of the file.File format WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, ASXExtension wmv, wma, wvx, wax, asf, asxCodec Video Windows® Media Video 8 through 9Audio Windows® Media Audio 2 through 9Bit rate Video only 512 kbpsVoice only 192 kbpsVideo + Voice 512 kbps + 64 kbpsVideo size QVGA (sidewise 320 dots x lengthwise 240 dots)Frame rate 30 fpsInformationpFiles with the extension of wvx, wax, asx are the files for which the URL of a PC movie on the Internet is specified. When you select those files saved on the microSD card, streaming or downloading playback starts from the specified URL.■Icons on the PC Movie listpAbove icons are displayed only for “Position memory” or “Played history”.The Position Memory Selection display appears. When you select “Marker to resume” or “Position memory1 through 9”, the PC movie is played back from the stored position.pYou can display information about the position memory by pressing i( ) and selecting “Posit. memory info”.pTo delete “Position memory”, press i( ) and select “Multiple-choice”, “Delete this”, or “Delete all”. You cannot delete “Marker to resume”.pWhen a PC movie with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, or when its file name has been edited, you cannot play it back.pEven when you play back a PC movie from a position memory, it may be played back from the beginning, depending on the PC movie.Icon File formatWMV, ASFWVX, ASXWMAWAXIcon DescriptionPC movie on the Internet.PC movie saved to the microSD card.When you select “Position memory” from the PC Movie Type Selection displayMarker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a PC movie, or when you terminate the PC Movie player during playback.Position memory You can store in any optional position in a PC movie, and create up to nine position memories. (See page 324 and page 325)
324Full Browser/PC MovieWhen you play back a PC movie, the URL or storage location of that file is stored as a history. Up to 30 histories are stored, and when those are exceeded, the oldest history is overwritten. Select a played history to play back the PC movie according to the history information.pWhen a PC movie stored in a played history has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back.pWhen you play back an obtained but unsaved PC movie from the Obtaining Completion display, it is not stored in Played History.When you select “Played history” from the PC Movie Type Selection displayFunction Menu of the PC Movie Folder ListPlayed History listFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAdd folder Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.Edit folder name Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.Delete folder Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESSelect storage You can set a destination folder for saving downloaded PC movies to the microSD card.YESInformation<Select storage>p“ ” is displayed for the folder set as a destination folder.Function Menu of the PC Movie List/Played History ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationContents info You can display the file title, file name, and others of the PC movie.Move You can move the PC movie to another folder. Select a destination folder.Edit title(Edit title)Edit titleEnter a title.pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.Edit title(Reset title)You can reset the title to the default.Reset titleYESCopy You can copy the PC movie to another folder.Select a destination folder.History info You can display information of the played history.Position memory You can store the URL information of the PC movie stored in Played History to a position memory. When you play back the file from the position memory, it is played back from the beginning.Select a position memory number to be registered.pYou cannot select “Marker to resume”.Multiple-choice You can select multiple files and operate them.Put a check mark for files to be operatedi()Select an item.Delete . . . . . . . . .See “Delete this” on page 324.Copy . . . . . . . . . .See page 324.Move . . . . . . . . . .See page 324.Description You can display the lyric or description of the PC movie.The words view or Description viewpUp to 1,024 full-pitch/2,048 half-pitch characters can be displayed in each.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Delete this YESDelete all You can delete all the files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESListing You can change the display format of PC Movie list.Title or File nameFunction menu Operation/Explanation
325Full Browser/PC MovieFunction Menu during Pause/at the End of PlaybackFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFast The PC movie is played back fast.pTo cancel it, press l().Rewind The PC movie is played back fast in the opposite direction.pTo cancel it, press l().Stop You can end playback.Position to play You can set the start position for playing back the PC movie.Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo().pTo cancel, press r.Sound effect(Remaster)You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.RemasterON or OFFSound effect(Listening)You can set sound effect for listening.ListeningSelect an item.Surround  . . .Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.Natur 1/2 . . . .Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.OFF . . . . . . . .Sets Listening to “OFF”.p“Natur 1/2” is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device.Sound effect(Equalizer)You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.EqualizerSelect an item.Normal  . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.S-XBS1 . . . Enhances bass sound.S-XBS2 . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1.Train  . . . . .Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage.Contents info See page 324.Position memory You can store a position memory in the PC movie. Operate it at the desired position in pause state.Select a position memory number to be stored.pYou cannot select “Marker to resume”.Description See page 324.Copy URL While playing back a PC movie published on the Internet, you can copy the URL of that PC movie.pYou can copy up to 512 half-pitch characters for the URL.Display size You can set the display whether to display a PC movie in the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the display size.Actual size or Fit in displaypEven if you set to “Actual size”, the PC movie in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Position to play>pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the PC movies.<Sound effect>pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are displayed on the display.<Position memory>pRegardless of the point of pause, the position memory might be stored at the beginning of the file depending on the PC movies.<Display size>pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off.
326
327Data Display/Edit/ManagementAbout Data Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Making Full Use of Still ImagesDisplaying Images  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Picture Viewer> 330Editing Still Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Edit Picture> 335Creating Animations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Original Animation> 338Making Full Use of Moving ImagesPlaying Back Moving Images/i-motion Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<i-motion Player> 338Using Playlist  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Editing Moving Images/i-motion Movies  . . . .<Edit imotion> 343Making Full Use of VideoPlaying Back Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Video Player> 345Making Full Use of Chara-denWhat is Chara-den?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Chara-den> 349Displaying/Operating Chara-den Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chara-den Player> 349Recording Chara-den Images . . . . . . . . . <Record Chara-den> 350Making Full Use of MelodiesPlaying Back Melodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Melody Player> 351Making Full Use of Kisekae ToolChecking Kisekae Tool  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Kisekae Tool> 354Making Full Use of microSD CardAbout microSD Card  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Inserting/Removing microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Displaying Data Items on microSD Card  . . . . . . . . .  <SD-PIM> 356Copying Still Images, Moving Images, etc.  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Moving Copyrighted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . <Movable Contents> 361Managing Unsupported Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . <SD Other Files> 362Formatting microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <microSD Format> 362Checking microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Check microSD> 362Displaying Capacity of microSD Card . . . . . . . <microSD Info> 363Using a microSD Card with a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . .  363Folder Configuration on microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  364Making Full Use of DataManaging Folders  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  366Making Full Use of Infrared Data ExchangeAbout Infrared Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  367Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .  370Sending/Receiving All Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  370Using Infrared Remote-controller Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  371Communication Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <Forwarding Image> 371Making Full Use of iC CommunicationAbout iC Communication  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iC Transmission> 372Sending/Receiving One Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  372Sending/Receiving All Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  372Making Full Use of Voice RecorderUsing Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Voice Recorder> 373Making Full Use of PDF ViewerDisplaying PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <PDF Viewer> 374Making Full Use of Document ViewerDisplaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Document Viewer> 378Printing Still ImagesPrinting Saved Images  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  379Displaying Images on TVDisplaying Still Images, Moving Images/i-motion Movies on TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <AV Output> 380
328Data Display/Edit/ManagementData Box contains the items and folders as listed below. Data is saved to respective folders according to the contents.About Data BoxMy picturei-mode Downloaded still images, etc.Search by i-mode Connects to the data site.Camera Still images shot by the camera, shot Chara-den images, etc.Decomail-picture Still images to be used for composing Deco-mailSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.Decomail-pictographお気に入り (Favorite)※1Pictographs to be used for composing Deco-mailpYou can delete the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograms. You can re-download them from the “P-SQUARE” site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to them.i絵文字 (ipictograph)※1装飾 (Decoration)※1ハート・キラキラ(Heart/Sparkling)※1天気・季節(Weather/Season)※1移動・生活 (Transfer/Life)※1電話・メール (Phone/Mail)※1食べ物 (Food)※1キャラクター(Cartoon character)※1文字 (Character)※1Search by i-mode Connects to the data site.Pre-installed Pre-installed still imagesUser folder※2Still images in the user folderOriginal animation The function of displaying still images continuouslyFrame Still images to be used for framesStampStill images to be used for marker stamps and cushy marksSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.microSD Picture Still images shot by the camera, and images in JPEG format and GIF format that conform to the DCF standard and were copied from the FOMA phoneImage Box Animation images in GIF format copied from the FOMA phone, and images in JPEG format that do not conform to the DCF standardMovable contents Copyrighted still images moved from the FOMA phoneDecomail-pictograph Deco-mail pictograms copied from the FOMA phoneMUSICi-mode Initial folder Chaku-uta Full® music files obtained from sitesSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.User folder※2Chaku-uta Full® music files in the user folderSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.microSD Copyrighted Chaku-uta Full® music files downloaded or moved from the FOMA phoneWMA WMA files obtained from personal computerMusic&Video ChannelDownloaded program Programs downloaded via Music&Video ChannelSaved program Programs saved to the FOMA phoneimotioni-mode i-motion movies obtained from sites, etc.Search by i-mode Connects to the data site.Camera i-motion movies recorded by the camera, shot Chara-den movies, etc.Pre-installed Pre-installed i-motion moviesVoice recorder Voices recorded by the voice recorderUser folder※2i-motion movies in the user folderPlaylist Playback of playlistPosition memory Playback of marker positionSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.microSD Movie Moving images shot by the camera or copied from the FOMA phoneMovable contents Copyrighted moving images moved from the FOMA phoneOther contents Voice-only i-motion movies※3 recorded by using the camera function, voice-only i-motion movies※3 copied from the FOMA phone, or video-unplayable i-motion movies※3 copied from the FOMA phoneMelodyi-mode Downloaded melodies, etc.Search by i-mode Connects to the data site.Pre-installed Pre-installed melodiesUser folder※2Melodies in the user folderVoice announce Data files recorded by using “Voice announce”
329Data Display/Edit/Management※1 The folder names can be changed by “Edit folder name”. Deco-mail pictograms are directly saved to these folders, and files other than Deco-mail pictograms cannot be saved to them.※2 The folder names you have entered for “Add folder” are displayed.※3 Includes the music files in AAC format.Playlist Playback of playlistSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.microSD Melody Melodies copied from the FOMA phoneMovable contents Copyrighted melodies moved from the FOMA phoneMy documentsi-mode Downloaded PDF files, etc.microSD PDF files downloaded or copied from the FOMA phoneKisekae ToolSearch by i-mode Connects to the data site.microSD Kisekae Tool files downloaded, or moved from the FOMA phoneChara-denPre-installed or downloaded Chara-den imagesPC MoviemicroSD PC movies downloaded, or saved by personal computerPosition memory Playback of marker positionPlayed history Playback histories of PC movies1SegImage Still images recorded by 1SegVideo Video recorded by 1Seg, and copyright-protected and 1Seg compatible moving images made with other AV devicesPosition memory Playback of marker positionDocument viewerDocument files saved from mail (attached files)SD other filesSD others Incompatible files saved from mail (attached files), or files in BMP or PNG format obtained by Full Browser■Icons in the File listFile TypeTitle namePictureIcon Type File formatStill image JPEGStill image with location information JPEGStill image/Animation image GIFFrame GIFMarker stamp GIFCushy mark GIFFlash movie SWFi-motion movie MP4(AMR)i-motion movie MP4(AAC)i-motion movie MP4(AAC+[HE-AAC])i-motion movie MP4(Enhanced aacPlus)i-motion movie ASFVideo MPEG2-TSVideo already viewed MPEG2-TS※Video not viewed yet MPEG2-TSPartially saved i-motion movie —Melody SMFMelody MFiComplete PDF file PDFPartial PDF file PDFIncomplete PDF file PDFDamaged PDF file PDF
330Data Display/Edit/Management※For the video recorded by the device other than this FOMA phone, the icon for already viewed video is displayed.pFor the file with the file restrictions, “ ” is added to each icon.pSome files have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable deadline. “ ” is added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions and “ ” is added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions expired.Acquired source※For the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, “ “ is displayed.Available operationKisekae Tool file —Partially saved Kisekae Tool file —Chara-den image —Word file WORDExcel file EXCELPowerPoint file POWERPOINTIncompatible file —Icon Type File formatIcon Description※Obtained from sites or i-mode mail attachmentFiles shot by the FOMA phone, or recorded by the voice recorderObtained from infrared data exchange or iC communication or microSD cardFiles of recorded Chara-den imagesFiles of recorded 1Seg programsIcon DescriptionAttach to i-mode mailInsert image into Deco-mail, or create Decome-AnimeSet displaySend Ir data, iC transmissionCopy to microSD cardUploadYou can display the still images saved to the FOMA phone or the microSD card.Picture is displayed in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during display.1mData boxMy pictureSelect a folderSelect a file.pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:pWhen selecting folders or still images by another function, some folders or still images may not be displayed depending on the function. You may at times be able to confirm the still image by pressing l( ) while you are selecting it.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.1mData box1SegImageSelect a file.+m-4-6<Picture Viewer>Displaying ImagesFolder list Still Image listDisplay Images Recorded by 1Seg
331Data Display/Edit/Management■Operations when playing back still imagespSee page 334 for when you operate from the Function menu.※1 Files are displayed in the order on the Still Image list.※2 You cannot operate depending on the image size or file format.※3 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in.■Specifications for playing back still image files※1 The types of JPEG file you can play back are Baseline and Progressive of the Exif/CIFF/JFIF format.※2 For the file in the progressive format, you can display the file of VGA (640 x 480) size or smaller.pYou cannot display some files even if their file formats are supported.Operation Key operationDisplay the next file※1VoDisplay the previous file※1CoZoom (Enlarge/Reduce)※2Oo()pi() or l( ) to display enlarge/reduce during zoomingpOo( ) to return to the former fileIcon[Horizontal Open Style only]m※3pEach time of pressing switches whether to display icons and navigations.File format JPEG※1, GIF, FlashExtension jpg, gif, swf, ifmPixels Files of 5M (2592 x 1944) size or smaller※2File size Still images of 2 Mbytes or lessFunction Menu of the Still Image ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit picture See page 335.Edit title Enter a title.pFor a file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.pFor a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.Display picture You can display the image.Set displayYou can paste the image to the Stand-by display and other displays for displaying.See “Positioning” for the position to which you paste the still image.Select the display you paste it to.p“★” is displayed for the pasted items but not for the videophone related items other than “Videophone dial” or “V.phone incoming” even if already pasted.pIf you select the videophone related items other than “Videophone dial” or “V.phone incoming”, an appropriate message is displayed at the center of the still image.Picture info You can display the still image title, file name and others.pThe item of “Set display” only is displayed for “Picture info” of original animations.Location info(Attach location)Attach locationSelect an item.By position loc.. . . Measures the current location and store the location information. After checking the location information, press Oo().From loc. history. . . Select a piece of location information from Location History and store it.From phonebook. . . Select a Phonebook entry which contains the location information for storing.pTo delete the stored location information, select “Delete loc. info”.pWhen you press i( ) during measuring the current location, the confirmation display appears asking whether to display the result obtained so far from the location information.pTo cancel measuring the current location, press r or l().pPress l( ) from the confirmation display for the location information to restart measuring in “Quality mode”.Function menu Operation/Explanation
332Data Display/Edit/ManagementLocation info(Delete loc. info)You can delete the location information stored in the image.Delete loc. infoYESLocation info(Details)You can check the location information detail.DetailspIf you press i( ) while displaying the detail, the Function menu for the location detail is displayed. (See page 279)Attach to mail Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l().Decorate mail You can compose Deco-mail using data in the “Decomail-picture” folder or “Decomail-pictograph” folder.Go to step 2 on page 198.pSee page 202 for Deco-mail.Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.Add desktop icon See page 127.Copy to microSD See page 359.Store in Center You can save the still image stored in the FOMA phone to the Data Storage Center. Data Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.Enter your Terminal Security CodePut a check mark for still images to be savedl()YESpYou can select up to 10 still images.pYou can switch between “Picture” and “Title name” by pressing i().pWhile a still image is displayed, you do not need to put a check mark for the still image.Copy to phone See page 360.Move to microSD See page 361.Move to phone See page 361.Function menu Operation/ExplanationPositioning You can set the position for when you paste the still image to the Stand-by display, etc. See page 331 for “Set display”.Select a position for displaying.Edit file name Enter a file name.pYou can enter up to 36 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.File restriction If you set “File restricted” for the file, the operation of attaching to i-mode mail is disabled at the receiving end who receives the image as the first distribution.File unrestricted or File restrictedpSee page 164 for the file restrictions.DPOF setting See page 379.Slideshow All still images are consecutively displayed starting from the still image selected in the folder. You can select the speed the still image switches at.Normal or SlowPress Oo( ) to stop Slideshow. Press Oo( ) again to resume Slideshow.Copy You can copy the still image, moving image, PDF file, document file, or SD other file on the microSD card to another folder on the microSD card.Select a destination folder.Move You can move the still image, moving image, PDF file, document file, Kisekae Tool file, or SD other file to another folder.Select a destination folder.pPress l( ) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.Delete this YESDelete all You can delete all files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/Explanation
333Data Display/Edit/ManagementMultiple-choice You can select multiple files and operate them.Put a check mark for the files to be operatedi()Select an item.Picture/Title name/Listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 333, page 354 and page 375.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . See “Delete this” on page 332.DPOF setting . . . . . . . See page 379.Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 332.Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 332.Copy to microSD. . . . See page 359.Copy to phone . . . . . . See page 360.Send Ir data . . . . . . . . See page 370.Select all . . . . . . . . . . . Selects all files.Release all . . . . . . . . . Releases all selected files.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Sort You can change displayed order.Select an order.pYou cannot sort the files on the microSD card.Picture/Title name You can switch the lists of still images.pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c( ) from the Still Image list.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Edit title>pYou may not be able to edit the title depending on the file.<Display picture>pYou may not be able to execute Display Picture depending on the file.pFlash movies are played back at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. When “Phone” of “Ring volume” is set to “Step”, they are played back at “Level 2”.<Set display>pFlash movies can be pasted only to “Stand-by display”, “Wake-up display”, “Dialing”, “Calling”, “Videophone dial”, “V.phone incoming”, “Mail sending”, “Mail receiving”, “Checking”, and “Mail/msg. rcpt result”.pAnimation GIF images cannot paste to the videophone related items other than “Videophone dial” or “V.phone incoming”.pThe displayed size might differ from the actual size depending on the image size or the display pasted to.pYou cannot execute “Set display” for some image files.<Attach to mail>pYou may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the image.pSee page 164 for attaching a file set with the file restriction to mail.<Decorate mail>pWhen an image size is larger than Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size, the display for selecting how to convert the image size appears. The converted still image is saved as a separate new file.Select “Attach directly”; then the image size does not change.Select “Sub-QCIF scale down”; then the image size is scaled down to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size or smaller with its proportional ratio retained.Select “Sub-QCIF trim away”; then the image size is scaled down or cut out to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size or smaller with its proportional ratio retained.If the file size exceeds the maximum size to create Deco-mail, its size is converted to the maximum size to create Deco-mail or less.pEven if you scale down or cut out the still image to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size, you can again scale down or cut it out by pressing +l( ) or pressing +i( ) and selecting “Cancel”. When you press +i( ) and select “Set”, the Message Composition display appears.pYou may not be able to create Deco-mail depending on the image.Information
334Data Display/Edit/Management<Store in Center>pYou cannot save the following still images:・Images whose sizes exceed 100 Kbytes・Images whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited・Images other than in JPEG or GIF formatpYou cannot use Data Security Service when you are out of the service area.pWhen you have not signed up for Data Security Service, the message to that effect appears.pYou can download the saved still images from the Data Storage Center site to your FOMA phone. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.<Edit file name>pYou may not be able to edit the file name depending on the file.pYou cannot use half-pitch space for the file name.<File restriction>pYou may not be able to set the file restrictions depending on the file.<Slideshow>pFlash movies are not displayed.pThe time interval to show the images might differ depending on the image.<Copy> <Move>pIf a call comes in while copying/moving multiple files, copying/moving is canceled even midway.<Delete this> <Delete all>pIf a call comes in while deleting multiple files, deleting is canceled.<Multiple-choice>pYou can select up to 3,500 still images, moving images, melodies, PDF files and Kisekae Tool files, and up to 100 videos, document files and SD other files.<Picture/Title name>pWhen you use “Picture” to display still images, some images may appear different.InformationFunction Menu while Playing Back Still ImageFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit picture See page 335.Set display See page 331.Picture info See page 331.Location info(Attach location)See page 331.Location info(Delete loc. info)See page 332.Location info(Details)See page 332.Attach to mail See page 332Decorate mail See page 332.Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.Display size You can set whether to display the still image in original size (normal size) or to fit to the display size.Normal or Fit in displaypEven if you set to “Normal”, the still image in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size. Also, when the still image is QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, it is doubled at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed.Add desktop icon See page 127.Copy to microSD See page 359.Store in Center See page 332.Copy to phone See page 360.Positioning See page 332.DPOF setting See page 379.Delete See “Delete this” on page 332.
335Data Display/Edit/Management1Still Image list/Still image in playi()Edit picturepWhen the still image, which is not the Stand-by (480 x 854) size, is larger than VGA (640 x 480) size, it is reduced to VGA (640 x 480) size.pWhen the still image to be edited is larger than the display size, use Mo to scroll it.2i()Edit the still image.See page 336 to page 337 for how to operate.3Oo()YES or NOYES . . . Overwrites the image to save.NO . . . . Saves the image as a new still image.The edited still image is saved.pTo edit and save an edited still image on the microSD card, press Oo() in step 3; then it is saved to the “i-mode” folder anew. pNot to save the edited still image, press r or h; then select “YES”.pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum.Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the beginning.<Edit Picture>Editing Still ImagesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit Picture display■The size of still image you can edit○: Editing picture is enabled. ×: Editing picture is disabled.※1 You cannot edit the still image smaller than 24 x 24 dots.※2 You cannot edit the still image of Chat Picture (80 x 80) size or smaller.pYou can edit the still images of 1920 x 1440 dots, 1632 x 1224 dots, 1616 x 1212 dots, 1600 x 900 dots, and 1280 x 960 dots as well.Edit menu5M, 3M, 2M, VGA, CIF, QVGA, QCIF, Sub-QCIF3.7M Wide,2M Wide Stand-byOther sizes smaller than VGAMarker stamp ○○○○Frame ○×○×Character stamp ○○○○※1Cushy mark ○○×○Fit in screen ○○○○Change size ○○○○Trim away ○○○○※2Retouch ○○×○Rotate ○○○○Brightness ○○○○Attach to mail ○○○○InformationpYou can execute “Edit picture” only for the “File unrestricted” files of still images shot by the cameras, obtained by data communication, downloaded from sites, or retrieved from i-mode mail.pYou cannot edit some still images, or you might have difficulty to produce editing effect.pIf you repeat editing image such as pasting frames or marker stamps to the shot still image, the image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger.pIf you change the size of a still image, some still images cannot be allowed to edit picture.
336Data Display/Edit/ManagementpIf the battery runs out during editing, the edited contents are discarded.pThe file name, title, storage location, and acquired source of the newly saved still image are as follows:・File name: “YYYYMMDDhhmmnnnn”Title: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, n: number)・Storage location: Folder the source file is saved to (Still images on the microSD card are saved to the “i-mode” folder.)・Acquired source: The same as the source fileFunction Menu of the Edit Picture DisplayInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationMarker stamp You can add the marker stamp in the “Stamp” folder.Select a marker stamp.pYou can rotate the marker stamp by pressing i( ) and selecting “90° to right/90° to left/180°”. Select “Scale up/Scale down” to enlarge or shrink the marker stamp.pYou can reselect a marker stamp by pressing l().Use Mo to position the marker stamp and press Oo().pYou can add a marker stamp by pressing l().Oo()Frame Select a frameOo()pYou can add the frame whose size is the same as the size of the image you are editing.pYou can display the previous or next frame by pressing No. Press and hold No for at least one second to display sequentially.pYou can rotate the frame by pressing i( ) and selecting “180° rotation”.pYou can reselect a frame by pressing l().Character stamp You can add text.Enter characters.You can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters. However, the number of characters you can enter decreases depending on the size of the still image.pPress i( ) and select “Character color” to select a color; then, you can change the color of characters. You can switch between “16 Color” and “256 Color” by pressing c().Select “Font” to change the character fonts.Select “Character size” to enlarge or shrink characters.Select “Character input” to edit entered characters.Use Mo to position the charactersand press Oo()Oo()pYou can reselect a position by pressing l().Cushy mark You can compound a cushy mark in the “Stamp” folder. The person’s facial region is automatically recognized and the cushy mark is pasted to an appropriate position.Select a cushy mark.pPress i( ) and select “Scale up/Scale down” to enlarge or shrink the cushy mark.pTo cancel, press l().Use Mo to position the cushy markand press Oo().pThe cushy mark that comes out of the still image is cut off.pYou can add a cushy mark by pressing l().Oo()Fit in screen You can convert an image size into Stand-by (480 x 854) size.pDepending on the source still image size, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to cut out an image size and convert into Stand-by (480 x 854) size.Function menu Operation/Explanation
337Data Display/Edit/ManagementChange size Select an image size to change to.pIf you select the size different in proportional ratio from the source still image, the still image is enlarged or shrunk so that it does not exceed the selected size with its proportional ratio retained.Oo()pYou can reselect a size by pressing l().Trim away You can trim the still image to a certain size.Select an image size to trim to.pYou cannot select a trimming frame larger than the still image you are editing.pWhen you select “Dial/recv. PIC (480 x 288)” or “VGA (480 x 640)”, the still image you are editing or the trimming frame are halved at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed.Use Mo to select a part to be trimmed and press Oo().pYou can reselect a size to trim by pressing l().Oo()pYou can reselect a part to be trimmed by pressing l().Retouch You can set texture and color tone of the still image.Select an item.Sharp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stresses the outline.Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Softens the outline.Sepia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Makes the color tone sepia.Emboss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Makes the still image rugged.Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Reverses the color tone.Horizontal flip  . . . . . . . . .Flips the image horizontally.Super clear shadow . . . .Makes the dark still image clear.Memory color. . . . . . . . . .Corrects the color and contrast.Oo()pYou can reselect an effect by pressing l().Function menu Operation/ExplanationRotate 90° to right, 90° to left or 180°Oo()pYou can reselect the rotation angle by pressing l().Brightness You can adjust the brightness to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).Select a brightness level.Attach to mail See page 332Save See page 335.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Marker stamp>pYou cannot select the marker stamp with following sizes:・When the size is larger than the still image to be edited・CIF (352 x 288) ・VGA (640 x 480) ・QVGA (240 x 320)・QCIF (176 x 144) ・Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)pYou cannot enlarge a marker stamp to the size larger than the still image you are editing.<Character stamp>pYou cannot set some character colors depending on the image to be edited. In that case, select another color.<Cushy mark>pYou cannot select a cushy mark larger than VGA (640 x 480) size.pYou can enlarge or shrink a cushy mark up to three times, but cannot enlarge it to the size larger than VGA (640 x480) size.pPerson’s face or outline might not be recognized correctly. When multiple persons’ faces are found, a single person’s face only is recognized.
338Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can select up to 20 JPEG files (20 frames) of Stand-by (480 x 854) size or smaller from the “i-mode” folder, “Camera” folder and user folders, and play them back as an animation. You can store 20 original animations.1mData boxMy pictureOriginal animation<New>pTo change, select an original animation you have set.2Select a frame position from <1st> to <20th>Select a folderSelect a still image.pTo release the stored still image, select “Release this”.3Repeat step 2l()<Original Animation>Creating AnimationsOriginal Animation listFunction Menu of the Original Animation ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.Org. animation Go to step 2 on page 338.Display picture You can play back the original animation.Set display See page 331.Picture info See page 331.Release animation YESFunction Menu while Playing Back Original AnimationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSet display See page 331.You can play back moving images saved to the FOMA phone or the microSD card.Moving image is played back in the horizontal display in Horizontal Open Style. You can switch the style during playback.pYou can play back the sound of moving images from a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431)1mData boximotionSelect a folderSelect a file.pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.Display size See page 334.Retry You can play back the original animation again.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformationpIf you delete a still image stored in an original animation, the original animation which contains the still image is released.<i-motion Player>Playing Back Moving Images/i-motion MoviesFolder list Moving Image list
339Data Display/Edit/ManagementpThe following images are displayed when you cannot display the preview images:pWhen you select a folder or i-motion movie from another function, some folders or i-motion movies may not be displayed depending on the function. You may be able to confirm the i-motion movie by pressing l( ) while selecting an i-motion movie.pDepending on the i-motion movie, you can play back by selecting a chapter set for the i-motion movie. (See page 341)■Operations when playing back moving imagepSee page 341 for when you operate from the Function menu.Cannot be played backPlayback restrictions have expired, and the like.No preview imagesIncompletedownloadOperation Key operationQuick View l( ) (See page 341)Mute i()pi( ) or adjust the sound volume to play back soundPause※1Oo()pOo( ) to resumePlay back frame by frame※2l( ) during pausepEach time of pressing proceeds frame by frame.Sound volume adjustmentBo or </>pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 6 is available.Display next file or chapter※3VoDisplay previous file or chapter※3CopWhen playback time is over three seconds, you go back to the beginning of the file. (You go back to the top of the chapter for the file with chapters.)Search (fast forward)※2Press and hold Vo.Search (fast rewind)※2Press and hold Co.Change vertical disp./horizontal disp./full disp.[Normal Style only]c()pEach time of pressing switches display format.※1 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of i-motion movie.※2 You cannot operate this for a streaming type of i-motion movie, or when you are playing back an i-motion movie while obtaining it. Further, you might not be able to operate this depending on the i-motion movie.※3 Moving images having no chapters are switched in the order on the Moving Image list. This operation is available when you play back from the Moving Image list. Moving images having chapters are switched in the order that the chapters are stored.※4 Even if you set the icons not to be displayed, the icon such as “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in.■Specifications for moving image playbackpEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files.Icon[Horizontal Open Style only]m※4pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Display icons and navigations” → “Nondisplay icons and navigations” → “Full display”.Remaster 9pEach time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.Listening 8pEach time of pressing switches in order of “OFF” → “Surround” → “Natur1” → “Natur2”.Equalizer 7pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Normal” → “S-XBS1” → “S-XBS2” → “Train”.Operation Key operationFile format MP4, ASFCoding system MP4 file Image: MPEG4, H.263, H.264Audio: AMR, AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), Enhanced aacPlusASF file Image: MPEG4Audio: G.726Pixels MPEG4: Files of VGA (640 x 480) size or smallerH.263: Files of Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) or QCIF (176 x 144) size onlyH.264: Files of QVGA (240 x 320) size or smallerExtension sdv, 3gp, mp4, asf
340Data Display/Edit/ManagementThe display for selecting Position Memory appears. When you select “Marker to resume” or “Position memory 1/2”, the moving image is played back from the stored position.pTo delete “Position memory”, press i( ) and select “Delete”. You cannot delete the “Marker to resume”.pWhen the moving image with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back.When you select “Position memory” from the Folder list for moving imagesMarker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a moving image.Position memory You can store in any optional position in a moving image, and create up to two position memories. (See page 342)InformationpWhile searching (fast forward or fast rewind) a moving image or playing it back frame by frame, it does not sound. You can search (fast forward or fast rewind) while pausing or playing back the moving image (including slow and quick view).pIf you receive mail or a Message R/F when playing back an i-motion movie, the video or sound might be interrupted.Function Menu of the Moving Image ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit imotion See page 343.Edit title See page 331.Set imotion(Ring tone)You can set a moving image for a ring tone.Ring toneSelect an incoming typel()pThe set item is indicated by “★”.Set imotion(Stand-by display)You can set a moving image for the Stand-by display.Stand-by displayYESl()Set imotion(Standby disp. Wide)You can set a moving image for the (horizontally) Stand-by display.Standby disp. WideYESl()Set imotion(Wake-up display)You can set a moving image for the Wake-up display.Wake-up displayYESl()imotion info You can display the i-motion movie title, file name and others.Attach to mail You can compose an i-motion mail message with the file attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.Copy to microSD See page 359.Copy to phone See page 360.Move to microSD See page 361.Move to phone See page 361.Copy See page 332.Move See page 332.Add desktop icon See page 127.Edit file name See page 332.File restriction See page 332.Reset title You can reset the title to the default.YESDelete this See page 332.Delete all See page 332.Multiple-choice See page 333.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Sort See page 333.Function menu Operation/Explanation
341Data Display/Edit/ManagementListing You can change the displayed contents for Moving Image list. You can select whether the title or file name is displayed in the microSD Card list.Select a display format.Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . The titles or file names are listed.Title + Image. . . . . . The title or file name, and image are displayed at a time. The displayed image is the first frame of moving image.Title/File name . . . . You can select whether to display the title or file name.pIn the case of the microSD Card list, “Title” is displayed as “Name”, and “Title + Image” is displayed as “Name + Image”.pYou can switch the lists also by pressing c( ) from the Moving Image list.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Set imotion>pYou cannot set the i-motion movie whose acquired source is “ ” as a ring tone.pSee “imotion info” to check whether the i-motion movie can be set for a ring tone or receiving display.<Attach to mail>pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Mbytes, the confirmation display appears asking whether to cut it out to the mail size. Select “YES” to cut out the i-motion movie from the beginning to the about 2-Mbyte point.pYou may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the i-motion movie.pDepending on the i-motion movie, its file size may become larger or smaller.pYou cannot attach an i-motion movie in excess of 2 Mbytes to mail from the Edit imotion display. See “Trim for mail” for how to cut out the i-motion movie for attaching to i-motion mail.Function Menu during Pause/at the End of PlaybackFunction menu Operation/ExplanationNormal play The moving image is played back at the normal speed.Chapter list You can display the list of chapters stored in the moving image and select a chapter to be played back.Select a chapter to be played back.Slow The moving image is played back mute at half the normal speed.pTo cancel Slow playback, press l( ), or perform “Normal play”.Quick View (1.25x) The moving image is played back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed.pPress l( ) to play back the moving image at twice the normal speed. Press l( ) to play back at the normal speed.Quick View (2x) The moving image is played back at twice the normal speed.pTo cancel Quick View, press l( ), or perform “Normal play”.Stop You can end playback.Position to play You can set the start point for playing back the moving image.Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo().pTo cancel, press r.Sound effect(Remaster)You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.RemasterON or OFFSound effect(Listening)You can set sound effect for listening.ListeningSelect an item.Surround. . . .  Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.Natur 1/2 . . . .  Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.OFF . . . . . . . .  Sets Listening to “OFF”.p“Natur 1/2” is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device.Function menu Operation/Explanation
342Data Display/Edit/ManagementSound effect(Equalizer)You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.EqualizerSelect an item.Normal . . . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.S-XBS1. . . . . . Enhances bass sound.S-XBS2. . . . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1.Train . . . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage.Position memory You can store a position memory in the moving image. Store it at the desired position in pause state.Position memory1 or Position memory2Edit imotion See page 343.Attach to mail See page 340.pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l( ) from the playback end display.Set imotion See page 340.imotion info See page 340.Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.Copy to phone See page 360.Add desktop icon See page 127.Display size You can set the display whether to display a moving image in the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the display size.Actual size or Fit in displaypEven if you set to “Actual size”, the moving image in excess of the display size is reduced to the display size. Also, when the moving image is QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, it is doubled at both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed.Change to full You can change the display format of moving images. Each time of selecting the item switches in order of playback on the vertical display → playback on the horizontal display fitted to the display size → playback on the enlarged full size display.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Chapter list>pWhen restrictions on chapter forward/rewind are applied, you cannot select chapters after/before the one you are currently playing back.<Slow>pYou cannot slow-play the following i-motion movies:・A streaming type of i-motion movie・An i-motion movie being played back while obtaining data・An i-motion movie played back from the Stand-by display<Quick View>pYou cannot execute Quick View for some i-motion movies.pi-motion movies are not played back in stereo sound during Quick View.pIt may be hard to hear sound during Quick View.<Position to play>pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the moving image/i-motion movie.<Sound effect>pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are shown on the display.pWhen audio format of the i-motion movie is AMR or G.726, sound effect might be unavailable.<Position memory>pYou might not be able to store the position memory depending on the moving image/i-motion movie.<Display size>pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off.<Change to full>pThe moving image of QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller is not played back in full display.pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut off.
343Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can store moving images in a playlist, and continuously play them back in the order you like. You can create up to 5 playlists, and can store up to 30 moving images per playlist.1mData boximotionPlaylistSelect Playlist 1 through 5.2Select <1st> through <30th>Select a folderSelect a moving image.3Repeat step 2l()pTo release a stored moving image, press i( ) and select “DEL one from list”. Select “DEL all from list”, then you can release all the stored moving images.pTo change the order of stored moving images, press i( ) and select “Order to play”, and select a moving image whose position to be changed. Then, select the destination position to change the order.1Playlist listHighlight a playlist and press l().Using PlaylistStore PlaylistPlaylist listInformationpYou cannot store partially saved i-motion movies in the playlist.Play Back PlaylistFunction Menu of the Playlist ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPlay See page 343.Edit playlist You can edit the playlist. Go to step 2 of “Store Playlist” on page 343.You can edit the moving image/i-motion movie. The moving image/i-motion movie you edited is saved to the folder containing the source moving image/i-motion movie.1Moving Image list/During pause/At the end of playbacki()Edit imotionpUse Bo or </ > to adjust the sound volume.2i()Edit the moving image/i-motion movie.See page 344 for how to operate.3Press Oo().pNot to save the edited moving image/i-motion movie, press r or h; then select “YES”.4YESThe edited moving image/i-motion movie is saved.pSee page 186 for when i-motion movies are stored to the maximum.Release playlist You can release all moving images stored in the playlist.YESEdit playlist name You can edit the name of the playlist.Edit a playlist name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.<Edit imotion>Editing Moving Images/i-motion MoviesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit imotion display
344Data Display/Edit/Management■Operations during editing an i-motion movie or demo playbackpYou cannot do some operations depending on the state.Operation Key operationPause Oo()pPress Oo( ) to resume play back.Fast forward Press and hold Vo.Fast rewind Press and hold Co.Forward frame by frame During pause, press Vo.Rewind frame by frame During pause, press Co.Sound volume adjustment Bo or </>InformationpYou cannot edit the following moving images/i-motion movies:・The files with “File restriction” and “Replay restriction” obtained from sites or i-mode mail・The files other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240), QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) size・The files saved to the microSD cardpYou might not be able to edit some i-motion movies.pThe image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger or smaller by executing “Edit imotion”.pWhen a call comes in, the battery level goes flat, or you close the FOMA phone while editing, the confirmation display appears asking whether to save the fixed edited contents.Function Menu of the Edit imotion DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationTrim imotion You can cut out a certain range from an i-motion movie.Use Vo to display a start frame and press l().The start frame is set and the moving image/i-motion movie is played back.Press Oo( ) at the position you want to cut out.Playing back the moving image/i-motion movie pauses.Use Vo to display an end frame and press l().The cut out range is played back.pWhen the file size reaches about 10 Mbytes, the end frame is automatically set.Press Oo().pPress l( ) to play back a demo to check the edited moving image/i-motion movie.Trim for picture You can cut out the still image and save it.Use Vo to display a frame and press l()YESSelect a folder.pSee page 186 for when images are stored to the maximum.Trim for mail You can cut out the moving image/i-motion movie to the size attachable to i-mode mail.Mail size (S) or Mail sizeMail size (S) . . . .Cut out to the size of about 500 Kbytes or less.Mail size . . . . . . .Cut out to the size of about 2,048 Kbytes or less.Use Vo to display a start frame and press l().The moving image/i-motion movie is played back. When the file size reaches about 500 Kbytes, about 2,048 Kbytes, or at the end of playback, the playback stops automatically.Oo()pPress l( ) to play back a demo and you can check the edited moving image/i-motion movie.
345Data Display/Edit/ManagementAttach to mail See page 340.File restriction See page 332.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Trim imotion>pIf you execute “Trim imotion”, the file size may become larger.Function Menu while i-motion Movie is Edited or Demo Playback is in PauseFunction menu Operation/ExplanationNormal play You can play back at the normal speed.Slow You can play back mute at half the normal speed.Quick View (1.25x) You can play back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed.Quick View (2x) You can play back at twice the normal speed.Starting point You can set the start frame for “Trim imotion” and “Trim for mail”.Ending point You can set the end frame for “Trim imotion”.Determine You can set the frame for “Trim for picture”.Stop You can stop playing back.You can play back the video saved to the microSD card.Just change the style to automatically switch between the vertical display and horizontal display when you are playing back a video. You can switch displays manually by pressing d.pYou can play back the sound of video from a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431)1mData box1SegVideoSelect a file.pWhen the position to play is recorded to the video, the playback starts from the recorded position. Press l( ) to play back from the beginning.pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:■Operations when playing videopSee page 347 for when you operate from the Function menu.<Video Player>Playing Back VideoFolder list Video listOperation Key operationQuick View l( ) (See page 341)Mute i()pi( ) or adjust the sound volume to play back sound
346Data Display/Edit/Management※1 In Data Broadcasting Mode, you cannot operate.※2 You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 30 seconds.※3 You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 10 seconds.Pause Oo() or ppOo() or p to resumePlay back frame by frame l( ) during pausepEach time of pressing proceeds frame by frame.Sound volume adjustment Bo※1 or </>pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available.Fast forward※1VopOo() or p to resumeRewind※1CopOo() or p to resumeSkip (fast forward)※1※2Vo(for at least one second) or s during playback or pauseSkip (rewind)※1※3Co(for at least one second) or a during playback or pauseProgram title※4m()pIcons and the time bar appear on the horizontal display.Switch display m( ) while displaying program titlepEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches ON/OFF of “Icon” and Caption.pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches the position of the time bar as well regardless of whether Caption is displayed or not.Full display d※5※6pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display direction.pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches between standard display and full display.Switch TV/data BC c()※6pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode.Operation Key operation ※4 When you operate immediately after “Skip”, “Fast forward”, “Rewind”, or “Position to play”, the program title stored in “File property” might appear.※5 You cannot operate this in Horizontal Open Style.※6 Close the FOMA phone to return to the vertical display. In Horizontal Open Style, the display automatically appears in the horizontal display in Video Mode and the vertical display does not appear.The display for selecting Position Memory appears. When you select “Marker to resume” or “Position memory 1/2”, the video is played back from the stored position.pTo delete “Position memory”, press i( ) and select “Delete”. You cannot delete the “Marker to resume”.pWhen the video with a position memory has been deleted or moved to another folder, you cannot play it back.When you select “Position memory” from the Folder list for videosMarker to resume This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm operates, or the battery level goes flat during playback of a video.Position memory You can store in any optional position in a video, and create up to two position memories. (See page 348)InformationpNo sound is output during frame-by-frame playback or during skipping. Further, captions are not displayed.pThe displayed time bar is for reference.pEven if you set “Sound effect setting” (or “Sound effect”) to “ON”, effect tones do not sound during pause, frame-by-frame playback, slow playback, or quick view playback.pWhen you select “YES (confirm once)” from the confirmation display for data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program or playing back video, the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet communication fee. (See page 310)pThe information about the data broadcasting is discarded when you operate skip, fast forward, rewind, or “Position to play”. You are charged a packet communication fee when you re-obtain communication contents.pYou might not be able to operate links by selecting them on data broadcasting during pause or at the end of playback.
347Data Display/Edit/ManagementpThe part of video that was not correctly recorded owing to the bad radio wave conditions is not displayed and skipped to the position where it can be displayed correctly. In that case, the video might not be played back for a few seconds, or might be distorted. Further, the time bar might not be displayed correctly.pIf you try to play back a video with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”.pIf you edit (divide) the video using a mobile phone or personal computer that supports the edit function, you might not be able to correctly play it back on the FOMA phone.Function Menu of the Video ListInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.File property You can display the channel name, the program name, etc. of the video.pYou can display the channel name, the program name, etc. also by pressing c().Add desktop icon See page 127.Reset title You can reset the title to the default.YESDelete(Delete this)Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)You can select multiple videos and delete them.Delete selectedPut a check mark for videos to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESMemory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Listing You can change the displayed contents for Video list.Select a display format.Title . . . . . . . . . . . . The title names are displayed.Title + image. . . . . The title name and image are displayed at a time. The displayed image is the first frame of video.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Delete>pIf a call comes in while deleting multiple videos, deleting is canceled.pThe video whose recording time is long might take a long time to be deleted. Make sure that the remaining battery is full enough.pYou might not be able to delete the video containing data that does not support the FOMA phone.<Listing>pThe video that was not recorded correctly owing to the bad radio wave conditions might not be played back.Function Menu during Pause/at the End of PlaybackFunction menu Operation/ExplanationNormal play The video is played at the normal speed.Slow The video is played back mute at half the normal speed.pTo cancel Slow play, perform “Normal play”.Quick View The video is played back quickly.Select an item.1.25x  . . . The video is played back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed. (See page 341)2x . . . . . . The video is played back at twice the normal speed. (See page 341)Fast forward The video is played back fast.10x or 30xpTo cancel fast forward playback, press Oo().
348Data Display/Edit/ManagementRewind The video is played back fast in the opposite direction.10x or 30xpTo cancel rewind playback, press Oo().Stop You can end playback.Position to play You can set the start point for playing the video.Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar and press Oo().pTo cancel, press r.Position memory You can store a position memory in the video. Store it at the desired position in pause state.Position memory1 or Position memory2File property See page 347.Add desktop icon See page 127.Switch display You can switch the contents on the viewer display.Select an item.pIf you set to “Enlarged V. img+DBC”, the video on the vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the video might be cut depending on the program.pIf you operate “Fast forward” or “Rewind” from the Function menu while “Data broadcasting” is set, the setting at Video Player start-up returns.pEven if you set to “Data broadcasting”, the audio from the video is played back.pYou can set “Caption” from 1Seg.Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode while watching a video on the vertical display.Icon See page 310.Image quality See page 309.Sound(Auto volume)See page 309.Function menu Operation/ExplanationAt player start-upWhen “Caption” is set to “ON”: V. img+Caption+DBCWhen “Caption” is set to “OFF”: Visual image+DBCAt player start-upVideo ModeSound(Remaster)See page 309.Sound(Listening)See page 310.Sound(Equalizer)See page 310.Sound(Main/sub sound)Main/sub soundMain sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub soundData broadcasting (Reload contents)You can reload the displayed data broadcasting site.Reload contentspThe confirmation display appears asking whether to re-send the data you entered, depending on the site.Data broadcasting (Certificate)See page 176.Data broadcasting (Set image display)See page 188.Data broadcasting(Sound effect)See page 310.Data broadcasting (Reset settings)See page 310.Back to data BC You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and return to the data broadcasting. Function menu Operation/ExplanationAt player start-upMain soundInformation<Position to play>pYou might not be able to select the position to play depending on the videos.pWhen you have selected the part that was not recorded correctly owing to bad radio wave conditions, the start point moves to the part where you can play back the video correctly.
349Data Display/Edit/ManagementChara-den is an animation character representing yourself. You can send it as your image during videophone calls. You can use the Chara-den player to play it back and shoot it.pYou can delete the pre-installed Chara-den image. You can re-download it from the “P-SQUARE” site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to it.pSome Chara-den images synchronize their movement with your voice spoken into the microphone.You can display stored Chara-den images.You can make the Chara-den image move by key operation.1mData boxChara-denSelect a Chara-den image.<Chara-den>What is Chara-den?<Chara-den Player>Displaying/Operating Chara-den ImagesChara-den list Chara-den display■Key assignment of operating Chara-denYou can use the Action list to check the actions that you can operate.pThe number of actions you can operate varies depending on the Chara-den image.※1 You cannot operate for the pre-installed Chara-den image.※2 Press s again to cancel the first s.Key operation Details1∼9s1∼s9※1※2(Whole Action Mode)Whole action: expresses an action with whole of the body.11∼99※1(Parts Action Mode)Parts action: expresses an action with a part of the body.0Suspends the running action.mDisplays the Action list.lMakes a videophone call.cRecords Chara-den images.Function Menu of the Chara-den ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChara-den call See page 74.Substitute image See page 74.Rec. Chara-den See page 350.Edit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.File property You can display the title, file name, and others of the Chara-den image.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Add desktop icon See page 127.Delete YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESpThis operation deletes the pre-installed Chara-den image as well.
350Data Display/Edit/ManagementMultiple-choice You can select and delete multiple Chara-den images.Put a check mark for Chara-den images to be deletedi()DeleteYESDisplay size You can set whether to display the Chara-den image in “Actual size” or “Fit in display”.Actual size or Fit in displayReset title You can reset the title to the default one.YESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<File property>p“Rec. file restriction” denotes whether to restrict the operation such as attaching still images/moving images created by “Rec. Chara-den” to mail, saving them to microSD card, or editing them.<Delete> <Delete all> <Multiple-choice>pIf you delete a Chara-den image set for the substitute image except “カンガルー (kangaroo)”, “カンガルー (kangaroo)” is set for the substitute image. If you delete “カンガルー (kangaroo)”, a pre-installed substitute image will be sent.Function Menu of the Chara-den DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChara-den call See page 74.Substitute image See page 74.Rec. Chara-den See page 350.Add desktop icon See page 127.Action list You can display the list for actions that you can operate.pHighlight an action, and press Oo( ) to run the action; and press l( ) to check the details of the action.pYou can display the Action list also by pressing m.You can shoot the displayed Chara-den image as a still image or moving image.1mData boxChara-denSelect a Chara-den image to be shotc()pYou can select “Rec. Chara-den” also from the Function menu of the Chara-den list or Chara-den display for recording.1Display “ ” on the Chara-den Recording display and press Oo().A still image of the displayed Chara-den image is shot.pWhile “ ” is displayed, press c( ) to display “ ”.2Press Oo().The still image you have shot is saved to the “Camera” folder.Change action You can switch the action modes between Whole Action Mode ( ) and Parts Action Mode ( ).File property See page 349.Display size See page 350.<Record Chara-den>Recording Chara-den ImagesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAt Chara-den displayWhole Action ModeChara-den Recording displayShoot Still Images
351Data Display/Edit/Management1Display “ ” on the Chara-den Recording display and pressOo().Recording of the displayed Chara-den image starts.pWhile “ ” is displayed, press c( ) to display “ ”.2Oo()Oo()The recorded moving image is saved to the “Camera” folder.Record Moving ImagesInformationpThe image size is fixed to QCIF (176 x 144).pIn Manner Mode or when “Phone” or “Mail” of “Ring volume” is set to “Silent”, the recording confirmation tone, the recording start tone, and the recording end tone do not sound.pWhen “Recording type” is set to “Video + voice”, the voice is recorded as well.Function Menu of the Chara-den Recording DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSwitch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image to be displayed.pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to Whole Action Mode.Substitute image See page 74.Action list See page 350.Change action See page 350.Display size See page 350.Recording size You can set the image size for recording and saving a still Chara-den image. You can set only in Photo Mode.QCIF (176 x 144) or Small (117 x 96)Recording type You can set whether to record video or voice for recording and saving a moving Chara-den image. You can set only in Movie Mode.Video + voice or Video1mData boxMelodypEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.2Select a folderSelect a melody.pWhen selecting folders and melodies by another function, some folders or melodies may not be displayed depending on the function. Some melodies may be played back for confirmation while being selected, or you may at times be able to play back the melody by pressing l().pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.You can repeatedly play back the melodies selected by “Edit playlist”.1mData boxMelodyPlaylistRecording quality You can set the image quality for saving a moving Chara-den image. You can set only in Movie Mode.Normal, Prefer image quality, or Prefer motion speed+m-1-6<Melody Player>Playing Back MelodiesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFolder listMelody list Melody Playback Play Back Playlist
352Data Display/Edit/Management■Operation while playing back a melody※1 If the FOMA phone is closed, playback is halted.※2 Valid when played back from the Melody list.Operation Key operationHalt Oo(), d, 0 through 9, a, s, m, c, pSound volume adjustmentBo or </ >※1pPress and hold to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 6 is available.Replay next file※2VoReplay previous file※2CoInformationpThe melodies are played back at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. When “Phone” of “Ring volume” is set to “Silent” or “Step”, they are played back at “Level 2”. However, the melody played back when it is selected does not sound.pEven if you change the volume while playing back, the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume” returns when you exit the Melody player.Function Menu of the Melody ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title Edit the title.pFor a file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.pFor a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.Edit file name Edit the file name.pYou can enter up to 36 half-pitch alphanumeric characters (except extension).Play melody See page 351.Set as ring tone Select an incoming type.p“★” indicates the set item.File restriction You can set the file restrictions on the selected melody.File unrestricted or File restrictedpSee page 164 for the file restrictions.Add desktop icon See page 127.Attach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the selected melody attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.Copy to microSD See page 359.Melody info You can display the melody title, file name and others.Copy to phone See page 360.Move to phone See page 361.Copy You can copy the melody from a folder on the microSD card to another folder on the microSD card.Select a destination folder.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Reset title You can reset the title to the default.YESDelete(Delete this)You can delete the melody stored in the FOMA phone.Delete thisYESDelete(Delete selected)You can select and delete multiple melodies stored in the FOMA phone.Delete selectedPut a check mark for melodies to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder in the FOMA phone.Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESDelete this You can delete the melody stored on the microSD card.YESFunction menu Operation/Explanation
353Data Display/Edit/ManagementDelete all You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder on the microSD card.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESMultiple-choice You can select multiple melodies stored on the microSD card and operate them.Put a check mark for the melodies to be operatedi()Select an item.Delete . . . . . . .  See “Delete this” on page 352.Copy . . . . . . . .  See page 352.Move . . . . . . . .  See page 353.Select all . . . . .  You can select all melodies.Release all . . .  You can release all selected melodies.Sort You can change displayed order.Select an order.pYou cannot sort the files on the microSD card.Move You can move the melody to another folder.Select a destination folderPut a check mark for melodies to be movedl()YESpPress l( ) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.pFor the microSD card, you do not need to put a check mark for the melodies.Move to microSD See page 361.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Edit file name>pWhen the icon of the acquired source is “ ” or “ ” and the icon such as “ ” or “ ” is displayed for that melody, you cannot change the file name.pYou cannot use some characters such as symbols for a file name.<File restriction>pYou can set the file restrictions only to the melody with the acquired source icon “ ”.pWhen the melody file exceeds 100 Kbytes by applying the restriction, you cannot set the file restrictions.<Attach to mail>pYou cannot attach the melody with “ ” or “ ”, or the melody in excess of 100 Kbytes, whose acquired source icon is “ ” or “ ”.<Melody info>pYou may not be able to attach to i-mode mail even when the file restriction in the melody information is “File unrestricted”.<Delete>pWhen a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default. (When the melody is set for an alarm tone of “Schedule”, “ToDo”, or “Book program”, or for “Alarm”, it switches to “Clock Alarm Tone”.)pYou cannot delete the pre-installed melody.Function Menu of the Melody Playback DisplayInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationSet as ring tone See page 352.Add desktop icon See page 127.Attach to mail See page 352.Melody info See page 352.Copy to microSD See page 359.Copy to phone See page 360.Play all/Play portionYou can temporarily switch the play start positions of the melody.
354Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can check the details on Kisekae Tool files.pYou can delete the pre-installed Kisekae Tool file. You can re-download it from the “P-SQUARE” site (see page 186). When you use a UIM other than the one used for downloading, the UIM restrictions (see page 40) are set to it.1mData boxKisekae ToolSelect a Kisekae Tool fileSelect an item.Selected image, ring tone or illumination are played back as a demo. If you select a color theme, the display is displayed in selected color theme.pEach time you press m from the Kisekae Tool list, you can switch between the list in the FOMA phone and the microSD card. In the Folder list on the microSD card, you can display the Kisekae Tool list by selecting a folder.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image.pWhen you select a Chara-den image in a Kisekae Tool file, you can press i( ) to use the Function menu of the Chara-den display (see page 350).pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.<Kisekae Tool>Checking Kisekae ToolKisekae Tool list Detailed Kisekae Tool displayCannot be played backNo preview imageInformationpYou cannot set Kisekae Tool files on the microSD card at a time.pClock display cannot be played back as a demo.Function Menu while Kisekae Tool File is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title See page 331.Preview You can preview the Kisekae Tool file.Set at one time You can set the Kisekae Tool file at one time. (See page 121)pYou can set the Kisekae Tool file at one time also by pressing l.File info You can display the title, file name, and others of the Kisekae Tool file.Move to microSD See page 361.Move to phone See page 361.Reset title You can reset the title to the default.YESMove See page 332.Delete this See page 332.Delete all You can delete all files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESMultiple-choice See page 333.Memory info You can check the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items.Sort See page 333.Listing You can change the displayed contents for the Kisekae Tool list.Title or ImagepYou can switch the lists also by pressing c( ) from the Kisekae Tool list.
355Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions related to the microSD card. The microSD card is available at mass retailers for home electric appliances etc.pFOMA P906i supports a commercial microSD card of up to 2 Gbytes and microSDHC card of up to 4 Gbytes (As of March 2008).For the latest operation check information such as the memory capacity and manufacturers of microSD cards, access the following sites (Japanese only). Note that the microSD cards other than published in the sites might not correctly work.・From i-mode to P-SQUARE (As of March 2008)iMenu → メニュー/検索 (Menu/Search) → ケータイ電話メーカー (Mobile Phone Maker) → P-SQUARE・From personal computershttp://panasonic.jp/mobile/Note that the published information is the result obtained from the operation check, which does not necessarily guarantee all performances of those microSD cards.pDuring processing of the card, “ ” is displayed. During processing of the card, never remove the microSD card, or turn off the FOMA phone. Check that processing of the card does not go on before turning off the FOMA phone, and then remove the microSD card.pWhen the FOMA phone or microSD card has many data files, it may take longer to access the files.pFolders and files on the microSD card are recognized up to about 65,500 items.pThe microSD card has an operating life. If you use the microSD card for a long time, you may not be able to write new data on it, or the card may be disabled.pWith the FOMA phone, you can save the downloaded still images, i-motion movies, melodies, Kisekae Tool files, Chaku-uta Full® music files, and i-αppli programs with the file restrictions to the microSD card. You cannot save the files IPs (Information Providers) do not permit.About microSD CardQR code for accessing the siteInformationpYou may not be able to use the microSD card formatted using a personal computer and other devices. Be sure to use the microSD card formatted with FOMA P906i.■Inserting1Open the cover of the microSD card slot.2Face the front surface of the microSD card upwards and insert the card.pPush it until it clicks.3Close the cover of the microSD card slot.pNote that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card.pIf you read/write data from/on a microSD card using a device other than this FOMA phone, the microSD card might become unusable depending on the device or operations.pWhen you insert a microSD card which has been used with another device such as a personal computer into FOMA P906i, new files and folders to be used in FOMA P906i are created.Inserting/Removing microSD CardInformation
356Data Display/Edit/Management■Removing1Open the cover following step 1 of “■Inserting” and push the microSD card until it stops.pPushing the microSD card inside pops up the card.2Remove the microSD card.■Icons on the displayThe following icons appear when you insert the microSD card:: You can save and read data.: The microSD card is write-protected. You cannot save data, and execute “Check microSD” and “microSD format”.: You cannot use the microSD card. Remove the microSD card and then insert it again.If “ ” is still displayed, execute “Check microSD” or “microSD format”.InformationpDo not insert or remove the microSD card with the FOMA phone turned on. It may damage the microSD card or its data.pNote that microSD card may pop out when you insert or remove it.pCheck the direction of the microSD card, and then insert or remove it straight. If you obliquely insert the microSD card into the slot, the microSD card may be damaged.pIt may take long to initially read or write data after inserting the microSD card.You can display the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks (i-mode/Full Browser) stored on the microSD card.pYou can operate in the same way on the detailed Phonebook display, detailed Mail display, and detailed Bookmark display as when you display data stored in your FOMA phone.See page 101 for detailed operations of the Phonebook.See page 227 for detailed operations of mail.See page 179 for detailed operations of bookmarks.1mLifeKitSD-PIMSelect a category.pIf you select “Schedule”, ToDo items are also displayed.2Select a fileSelect a data item.<SD-PIM>Displaying Data Items on microSD CardCategory list microSD File display(For Phonebook)Data list (For Phonebook)Detailed data display(For Phonebook)
357Data Display/Edit/ManagementFunction Menu of the Category List/microSD File Display/Data List/Detailed Data DisplayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/31 half-pitch characters.Add to phone See page 358.Overwrite to phone See page 359.Add one to phone See page 358.Add all to phone See page 358.Overwr. all to ph. See page 358.Copy to microSD See page 357.Delete this YESDelete all You can delete all files in the currently displayed category.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESmicroSD info See page 363.Property You can display the detailed data display.microSD format See page 362.Check microSD See page 362.Information<Delete this> <Delete all>pWhen the access right is set for read only by devices such as a personal computer, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the data.You can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks stored in the FOMA phone to the microSD card.You can copy a single file from the FOMA phone onto the microSD card. A copied data item is saved as a single file.You cannot copy the secret code stored in a Phonebook entry.1Display for a data item to be copiedi()Copy to microSDYESYou can copy the data items of the category selected on the Category list or of the category displayed on the microSD File display from the FOMA phone to the microSD card. The copied data items are all saved as a single file.You cannot copy secret codes or voice dial entries stored in the Phonebook entries.1Category list/microSD File displayi()Copy to microSDEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESpTo copy scheduled events, select “Schedule”, “ToDo”, or “All” (Schedule and ToDo).pTo copy bookmarks, select “i-mode”, “Full Browser”, or “All” (i-mode and Full Browser).Copy Data Items in the FOMA Phone to the microSD CardCopy one to microSDCopy all to microSDInformationpWhen you copy a file stored as secret data, the file is copied as an ordinary file.pWhen you copy all files, the files stored as secret data are also copied.pWhen you copy all the Phonebook entries, the information from the PushTalk Phonebook entry and the contents of “Own number” are also copied.
358Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks (i-mode/Full Browser) stored on the microSD card to the FOMA phone.pSee page 365 for the number of data items that can be saved to the microSD card.You can copy the data item selected on the data list or displayed on the detailed data display to the FOMA phone.1Data list/Detailed data displayi()Add one to phone or Copy to phoneYESYou can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File display to the FOMA phone.The copied data items are added to the FOMA phone.1Category listi()Add all to phoneEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESormicroSD File displayi()Add all to phoneEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESpFor copying mail, some files attached to mail may be deleted depending on file format.pWhen you copy mail containing links to start an i-αppli program, the information about starting the i-αppli program in that mail is deleted.pDuring copying, the FOMA phone is placed in the same status as it is out of the service area.Copy Data Items on the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone Add one to phoneInformationAdd all to phoneYou can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA phone.The copied data items are added to the FOMA phone.1microSD File displayi()Add to phoneEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESorData listi()Add all to phoneEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESYou can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File display to the FOMA phone.Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA phone are overwritten and deleted.1Category listi()Overwr. all to ph.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYESormicroSD File displayi()Overwr. all to ph.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYESAdd to phoneOverwrite all to phone
359Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA phone.Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA phone are overwritten and deleted.1microSD File displayi()Overwrite to phoneEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESYESorData listi()Overwr. all to ph.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYESOverwrite to phoneInformationpIf the memory capacity of the FOMA phone runs short during copying, copying is suspended midway; however, the data already copied is stored.pWhen you perform “Add one to phone” for a Phonebook entry, any group is not set if the group number or group name stored in the microSD file differs from that stored on the FOMA phone.pThe copied Phonebook entries are also stored in the PushTalk Phonebook. When you overwrite the Phonebook entries, the contents of the PushTalk group are also overwritten.When you execute “Add one to phone”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select “YES” (select a phone number when multiple phone numbers are stored) to store the entry also to the PushTalk Phonebook.pWhen you overwrite the Phonebook entries, the voice dial entries are deleted.pWhen you copy a mail message with the Outbox or Inbox full, the oldest unprotected mail message is overwritten (the read one for the Inbox).pWhen you execute “Add all to phone”, you cannot copy the following data:・Schedule events set for the same date and time・Bookmarks of the same URLpIf the number of files stored on the microSD card increases, it may take long to read or write data.pDuring copying, the FOMA phone is placed in the same status as it is out of the service area.File name and the destination folder are as follows:pWhen you copy or move a file between the FOMA phone and the microSD card, its file format might change.1Still Image list/Still image in play/Moving Image list/Melody list/Melody during playback/PDF File list/Decome-Anime Template listi()Copy to microSDpIf you have used “Multiple-choice” to select files to be copied, you can copy the multiple files at a time.Copying Still Images, Moving Images, etc.Copy Files from the FOMA Phone to the microSD CardStill image(DCF standard)The destination folder in the “Picture” folderPXXXXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)Still image(Non DCF standard)The destination folder in the “Image Box” folderSTILXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)Still image(Deco-mail pictogram)The destination folder in the “Decomail-pictograph” folderDIMGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)Moving image(With video)The destination folder in the “Movie” folderMOLXXX (X denotes an alpha-numeral.)Moving image(Without video)The destination folder in the “Other contents” folderMMFXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)Melody The destination folderRINGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)PDF file The destination folderPDFDCXXX (X denotes a numeral.)Decome-Anime template The destination folderDEATXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)InformationpYou can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF and Decome-Anime template files in the “i-mode” folder, “Camera” folder, “Decomail-picture” folder, “Decomail-pictograph” folder and a user folder.
360Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can copy files from the microSD card to the i-mode folder in the FOMA phone.(Deco-mail pictograms are copied to the “お気に入り (Favorite)” folder in the “Decomail-pictograph” folder and Decome-Anime templates are copied to the “Phone” folder.)1Still Image list/Still image in play/Moving Image list/Moving image in pause/Moving image at the end of playback/Melody list/Melody during playback/PDF File list/Decome-Anime Template list, which is on the microSD cardi()Copy to phonepIf you have used “Multiple-choice” to select files to be copied, you can copy the multiple files at a time.pSee page 186 when images/i-motion movies/melodies/PDF files are stored to the maximum.pYou can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files at a time but not others.pWhen the files in the destination folder are stored to the maximum, a new folder is automatically created and files are saved to that folder. For the files other than still images or Decome-Anime template, the message “Storage is changed to XXXXXXX” (XXXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears when copying is completed.pYou cannot copy the following files:・Files that you shot Chara-den models whose “Rec. file restriction” is “File restricted”・Files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited・Pre-installed Deco-mail pictures・Files set with playback restrictions・Partially saved i-motion movies or Chaku-uta Full® music files・PDF files partially downloaded page by pagepIf you copy the file to the microSD card, the image quality may deteriorate or the file size becomes larger.Copy Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA PhoneInformationInformationpDo not pull out the microSD card during copying.pYou can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF and Decome-Anime template files. However, you cannot copy a melody and a SWF file in excess of 100 Kbytes.pYou can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files only at a time. However, you cannot copy multiple moving images of ASF format, VGA (640 x 480) and HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size, or in excess of 10 Mbytes.pWhen you copy moving images, the images are cut out, converted or shrunk; therefore the image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger or smaller. However, a moving image whose video codec is H.264 is copied without being converted or shrunk.pWhen you copy VGA (640 x 480) size or HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size of a moving image, the image is converted into QVGA (320 x 240) size. When you copy VGA (640 x 480) size or HVGA Wide (640 x 352) size of a moving image, ASF file, or the file in excess of 10 Mbytes, it might take a longer time.pYou cannot copy the moving image in excess of 10 Mbytes in the following cases:・When the video codec is H.264・When the audio codec is AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), or Enhanced aacPlus・When the bit rate of the moving image is in excess of the restriction・When searching (fast forward or fast rewind) is disabled・When the moving image size is other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240), QCIF (176 x 144) or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)Some moving images cannot be copied in the conditions other than the above.pPlaying back a copied ASF file may take a longer time. pThe file after copying takes the title of the one set on the microSD card. When no title is set on the microSD card or the default title is unknown, the file name will be the title.Information
361Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can move the copyrighted file obtained from a site to the microSD card after encoding. The moved file is then saved to the destination folder in the “Movable contents” folder (the specified destination folder for Chaku-uta Full® music files). Some files you moved to the microSD card can be operated only with the UIM you used when moving, and some files can be operated with the UIM and the phone you used when moving.1Still image list/Moving image list/Melody list/Kisekae Tool list/Chaku-uta Full® Music listi()Move to microSDOKYou can move a copyrighted file from the microSD card to the “i-mode” folder in the FOMA phone.1Still Image list/Moving Image list/Melody list/Kisekae Tool list/Chaku-uta Full® Music list, which is on the microSD cardi()Move to phonepSee page 186 for when files are stored to the maximum.<Movable Contents>Moving Copyrighted FilesMove Files in the FOMA Phone to the microSD CardInformationpYou can move a file to the microSD card only when the acquired source icon is “ ”.pPartially saved i-motion movies, Chaku-uta Full® music files and Kisekae Tool files cannot be moved to the microSD card.pThe setting is released if you move a file set for another function.Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA PhoneSome i-αppli programs can be moved to and saved to the microSD card. You cannot start the i-αppli program moved to the microSD card. Move it back to your FOMA phone to start. However, some i-αppli programs can be operated only with the UIM you used when moving, and some other programs can be operated only with the UIM and the phone you used when moving.1Software listi()Move to microSDYESYou can move an i-αppli program from the microSD card to the FOMA phone.1Software listi()Move to phoneYESInformationpYou can move a copyrighted file (with file restriction) to the FOMA phone only if its property for “Moved to phone” is “Available” or “Available (Same model)”. In addition, you cannot move a file of “Available (Same model)” to the FOMA phone other than P906i. See “Picture info”, “imotion info”, “Melody info”, “File info”, or “Music info” to check whether the file is “Available”, “Unavailable” or “Available (Same model)”.pThe setting is released if you move a file set for another function.pThe moved files are saved to the “i-mode” folder. However, the Kisekae Tool files are saved to the “Kisekae Tool” folder and Chaku-uta Full® music files are saved to the “Initial folder” in Data Box.Move i-αppli in the FOMA Phone to the microSD CardMove i-αppli from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone
362Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can save a variety of files which are not supported by the FOMA phone, or files in BMP and PNG format obtained by Full Browser, to the microSD card. (See page 217 and page 316)You can attach the saved files to an i-mode mail message to send, or check them on a personal computer.1mData boxSD other filesSelect a folder.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.pYou cannot display the contents of the file using the FOMA phone.<SD Other Files>Managing Unsupported FilesFolder list SD Other File listFunction Menu of the SD Other File ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title See page 331.File info You can display the name and type of files.Attach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the file attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Copy See page 332.Move See page 332.Delete this See page 332.Delete all See page 332.Multiple-choice See page 333.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).When you use the microSD card for the first time, you need to format (initialize) it. Be sure to use FOMA P906i for formatting. The microSD card formatted using other devices such as personal computers may not be used properly. Note that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card.1mLifeKitSD-PIMi()microSD formatEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESYou can check and recover the microSD card.1mLifeKitSD-PIMi()Check microSDYES<microSD Format>Formatting microSD CardInformationpDo not remove the microSD card during formatting. Malfunction of the FOMA phone or microSD card could result.pIf you press +l() or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call while formatting the microSD card, formatting is canceled. Format it again.pFiles that have been saved to the microSD card whose formatting is suspended becomes unfixed.pYou cannot format the incompatible memory card.pRequired folders are automatically created when you save data to the microSD card after formatting.<Check microSD>Checking microSD Card
363Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can display the used and unused memory space (estimate) on the microSD card.pSee page 333 for checking the used memory space for the still images or moving images.1mLifeKitSD-PIMi()microSD infoInformationpDo not remove the microSD card during Check microSD. Malfunction of the FOMA phone or microSD card could result.pYou cannot execute Check microSD for the unformatted microSD card or incompatible memory card.pWhen you execute Check microSD, the microSD card may not be recovered correctly, the data existed before executing Check microSD may be deleted, or the microSD card itself may be initialized depending on the condition of the microSD card.pIf you press +l() or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call during Check microSD, Check microSD is canceled.pIf you cancel Check microSD midway, data not recovered may remain. In this case, try Check microSD again.pIt may take long to complete Check microSD depending on the data volume stored on the microSD card.<microSD Info>Displaying Capacity of microSD CardInformationpAs the microSD card contains the system files for the card, the memory space is smaller than that described on the microSD card even if it contains no data.By connecting the microSD card to the microSD card adapter, you can use the microSD card on a personal computer which supports SD card. The microSD card adapter is available at mass retailers for home electric appliances etc.For installing the microSD card adapter, refer to the instruction manual for the microSD card adapter.With a microSD card inserted, connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer; then you can read the data from or write the data onto the microSD card.The following equipment is required:pConnector Cable: FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)pPersonal Computer: Personal computer having the USB port (Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev 1.1 compliant) that can be connected with the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)pCompatible Operating Systems: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista (Japanese version in each)1mSettingsOther settingsUSB mode settingmicroSD modepWhen you set to “microSD mode”, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.pTo save WMA files from your personal computer to the microSD card, set to “MTP mode”. When you set to “MTP mode”, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.pTo use the FOMA phone for packet communication, 64K data communication, data sending/receiving (OBEX™ communication), and for calls with USB Hands-free compatible device, set mode to “Communication mode”. 2Connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option).The personal computer recognizes the microSD card.p“ ” appears on the desktop, and “ ” appears on the Stand-by display. Also, “ ” is displayed while the microSD card is in the FOMA phone.Using a microSD Card with a Personal ComputerUse FOMA Phone as microSD Reader/Writer
364Data Display/Edit/ManagementThe FOMA phone creates the following folders on the microSD card to save data files. To write files to the microSD card from a personal computer, you need to write the following configuration and file names.DCIM (Folder for DCF standard still images)△△△_PANAP△△△zzzz.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.)MISC [DPOF folder (This folder is created automatically when “DPOF setting” on page 379 is set.)]SD_VIDEO (Folder for moving images)PRL◇◇◇ (Folder for movies)MOL◇◇◇.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.)MGR_INFO (Folder for video management information)PRG◇◇◇ (Folder for videos)InformationpIf the FOMA phone and personal computer are not correctly connected, or the remaining battery level of the FOMA phone shows very low or goes flat, you cannot send or receive data. In addition, you may lose data.pWhile data is being read or written, do not pull the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 off. Not only you cannot send or receive data, but also you may lose the data.pWhile data is being read or written, you cannot set this function. Further, make sure that you do not “Reset settings” or “Initialize” during reading/writing. Malfunction of the microSD card could result.pYou cannot read from/write to a personal computer while reading from/writing to the FOMA phone, and vice versa.pTo use the DoCoMo keitai datalink, set it to “Communication mode”.Folder Configuration on microSD CardPRIVATEDOCOMOSTILL (Folder for non-DCF standard still images)SUD□□□STILzzzz.### (Extension is JPG, GIF, or SWF.)DOCUMENT (Folder for PDF files)PUD□□□PDFDC□□□.PDFRINGER (Folder for melodies)RUD□□□RINGzzzz.### (Extension is MLD, or SMF.)TORUCA (Folder for ToruCa files)TRC□□□TORUC□□□.TRCMMFILE [Folder for non-SD-VIDEO standard moving images (include music data of AAC format)]MUD□□□MMFzzzz.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.)WM_SYSTEMWMDECOIMG (Folder for Deco-mail pictograms)DUD□□□DIMGzzzz.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.)OTHER (Folder for SD other files)OUD□□□OTHER□□□.### (Extension is up to three-digit half-pitch alphabets that the FOMA phone cannot recognize.)MOVIE (Folder for PC movie files)MVUD□□□MOVIE□□□.### (Extension is WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, or ASX.)DECO_A_T (Folder for Decome-Anime template)DTUD□□□DEATZZZZ.VGTTABLE (Folder for additional information)MEIGROUPPMCDOCUMENT (Folder for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files)DOC□□□DOCDC□□□.### (Extension is XLS, DOC, or PPT.)TABLEDOCUMENT
365Data Display/Edit/ManagementSD_PIM (Folder for Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks)PIM▲▲▲▲▲.### (Extension is VCF for Phonebook entries, VCS for schedule events and ToDo items, VMG for mail messages, VNT for text memos, and VBM for bookmarks.)SD_AUDIO (Folder for SD-Audio)SD_BIND (Folder for i-αppli or movable contents)SVC▲▲▲▲▲■■■■◆◆◆◆△△△: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 100 through 999 (Use the same numerals for the folder name, and for the file name saved to that folder.)□□□: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 001 through 999◇◇◇: A hexadecimal numeral※ of 001 through FFF using half-pitch numerals of 0 through 9 and half-pitch alphabets of A through F▲▲▲▲▲: A five-digit half-pitch numeral of 00001 through 65535■■■■ and ◆◆◆◆: Hexadecimal numerals※ of 0001 through FFFF using half-pitch numerals of 0 through 9 and half-pitch alphabets of A through Fzzzz: A four-digit half-pitch numeral of 0001 through 9999###: Extension※The hexadecimal numerals are carried up every 16, unlike the way the decimal numerals are carried up every 10.pUsing a personal computer, you can write a file name of up to 64 bytes (including extension) of free characters for a PDF file, SD other file, PC movie file, Word file, Excel file and PowerPoint file. However, the file name might change when the file is copied or moved in the FOMA phone.■The number of files and time that can be saved to the microSD cardFile Folder Number of savable files/timeStill image (DCF standard) DCIM See page 152.Still image (Non-DCF standard) STILL Approx. 58,390Moving image (Movie) SD_VIDEO See page 154.Moving image (Video) SD_VIDEO 99Moving image (Non-SD-VIDEO standard) MMFILE Approx. 58,390PC movie file MOVIE Approx. 58,390Melody RINGER Approx. 58,390PDF file DOCUMENT Approx. 58,390Word, Excel, PowerPoint file PMC Approx. 58,390pThe number of savable files and time for saving vary depending on the memory capacity of the microSD card. You can save more files by adding folders to save files to.pYou might not be able to save the maximum number of files depending on the file size.pYou can check used and unused space of the microSD card by “microSD info”.SD-Audio SD_AUDIO 999ToruCa file TORUCA Approx. 58,390Deco-mail pictogram DECOIMG Approx. 58,390Decome-Anime template DECO_A_T Approx. 58,390SD other file OTHER Approx. 58,390Phonebook entry, schedule event, ToDo item, mail message, text memo, bookmark SD_PIM Approx. 58,390i-αppli SD_BIND Approx. 58,390Movable contents SD_BINDFile Folder Number of savable files/timeInformationpFolder and file names may be displayed in lowercase characters depending on the personal computer you use.pWhen the personal computer is set not to display extensions and hidden folders, change the setting and then operate. For how to change the setting, refer to the instruction manual for your personal computer or Help.pDo not use the personal computer to delete or move the folders on the microSD card. The microSD card might not be read by FOMA P906i.pYou cannot see the files in the “SD_AUDIO”, “SD_BIND” and “PRG◇◇◇” folders on a personal computer, as they are encrypted.pWhen you save data in the “PRG◇◇◇” folder by using a personal computer, you might not be able to delete the video using the FOMA phone.pWhen you delete, overwrite, or write a file on a personal computer, ensure that you do not use the same file name you have once used. Even when you have deleted that file, use a different file name.pOn the FOMA phone, you might not be able to display or play back a data item which was saved to the microSD card from other devices. On other devices, you might not be able to display or play back a data item which was saved to the microSD card from the FOMA phone.
366Data Display/Edit/ManagementMy picture, MUSIC, imotion, Melody, My documents, Kisekae Tool (SD), PC Movie, Document viewer, and SD other files in Data Box manage files in the respective folders.pSee page 397 for folder operations of MUSIC.pEven when the files in the “Movable contents” folder are listed, the Function menu in the Folder list is displayed.pTo procure a microSD reader/writer or PC card read adapter, inquire respective manufacturers for the operation of microSD card beforehand.Managing FoldersFunction Menu of the Folder ListInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationAdd folder You can create a user folder.Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in the FOMA phone.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for a folder in the “Movable contents” folder.Edit folder name You can edit the name of a user folder, or a folder in the “Decomail-pictograph” folder in the FOMA phone.Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in the FOMA phone.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for a folder in the “Movable contents” folder.Delete folder You can delete a user folder and all files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESFolder security[My picture/imotion]You can set the folder to open only when you enter your Terminal Security Code.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESThe folder changes to “ ”.pTo release it, perform the same operation.DEL all frm folder[My picture only]You can delete all the files in the folder selected in “i-mode”, “Camera”, “Decomail-picture”, “Decomail-pictograph”, and user folder in “My picture”.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESEdit playlist[Melody only]You can select up to 10 melodies and program them in order as you like. This is displayed while you are selecting “Playlist”.Select a playing order from <1st> through <10th>Select a folderSelect a melody.pTo release a programmed melody, select “Release this”.Repeat the operations and complete the playlist editingl()Release playlist[Melody only]You can release all the programmed melodies from the playlist. This is displayed while you are selecting “Playlist”.YESSelect storage You can set the destination folder for when you save the shot still/moving images or the melodies and PDF files obtained by downloading or data communication to the microSD card.YESFunction menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Add folder>pYou can add up to 20 folders in the FOMA phone.pYou cannot add folders on the microSD card in the following cases:・When the “Picture” folder contains 900 folders・When the “Movie” folder contains 4,095 folders・When 999 folders are contained in the “Image Box”, “Decomail-pictograph”, “Melody”, “Other contents”, “My documents”, “Document viewer”, or “SD other files”.
367Data Display/Edit/Management<Edit folder name>pYou cannot edit the Folder-Security-activated folder name.<Delete folder>pWhen a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default. (When the melody is set for an alarm tone of “Schedule”, “ToDo” or “Book program”, or for “Alarm”, it switches to “Clock Alarm Tone”.)<Folder security>pYou can set it only for “i-mode”, “Camera”, “User folder”, and “Voice recorder”.pWhen you select a folder with folder security, the display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears. Enter your Terminal Security Code to temporarily release folder security.<Edit playlist>pIf you change or delete the file name, title, or contents of the melody stored in the playlist, all the melodies are released from the playlist.<Select storage>pThe following icons are displayed for the folder set as a destination folder:“ ”  . . .The folders in the “Picture” folder and “Movie” folder“ ”  . . .The folders in “My documents”, “Document viewer”, and “SD other files”The folders in the “Decomail-pictograph” folder, “Image Box” folder, and “Melody” folder“ ”  . . .The folders in the “Movable contents” and “Kisekae Tool” folder“ ”  . . .The folders in the “Other contents” folderpWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again.InformationThe FOMA phone conforms to IrMC™ version 1.1 standard.You can exchange data files with the devices supporting the infrared data exchange function. However, you cannot exchange some files depending on the other party’s device.pThe distance for infrared data exchange should be within about 20 cm. Do not move the FOMA phone with the infrared data port pointed to the receiving end until data transfer ends.pHold the FOMA phone with your hands securely so that it does not move.pIf you expose the FOMA phone to direct sunlight or put it under fluorescent lights or near an infrared equipment, you may not be able to transmit infrared ray normally due to their influence.pFirst set at the receiving end and begin sending data from the sending end within 30 seconds.pDuring exchange, the FOMA phone is placed in the same state as it is out of the service area, so you cannot make/receive voice calls, videophone calls or PushTalk calls, use packet communication such as i-mode or mail, or do data communication.About Infrared Data ExchangeInfrared data portWithin ±15° from the centerWithin about 20 cm
368Data Display/Edit/Management■List of data files you can transfer○: Can be transferred ×: Cannot be transferred※1 You cannot send/receive holidays and anniversaries.※2 You can send/receive up to 30 Area Mail messages separately. (2,530 messages in total)※3 You cannot send/receive some files.※4 The file is sent/received after being converted to the vnt file.※5 Includes Flash movies.※6 You cannot send/receive original animations and still images recorded by 1Seg.※7 You cannot send/receive ASF files and videos recorded by 1Seg.※8 The i-mode bookmarks may be deleted.※9 When sending/receiving bookmarks, the folder-sort setting may not be reflected.Transfer termsTransferable data One item Multiple items All itemsPhonebook (Own number) ○×Up to 1,000 itemsSchedule※1○×Up to 1,000 itemsToDo ○× Up to 100 itemsReceived mail※2○×Up to 2,500 itemsSent mail ○×Up to 1,000 itemsDraft mail ○× Up to 20 itemsDecome-Anime template ○× ×Text memo ○× Up to 20 itemsMelody※3, ※4○× ×Still image file※4, ※5, ※6○○ ×Moving image file※4, ※7○○ ×PDF file※3, ※4, ※8○× ×ToruCa file※4○○ Up to 495 itemsBookmark (i-mode/Full Browser)※9○×Up to 100 items each for i-mode and Full BrowserLCS client information ○× Up to 5 items■Storage location and order of received filesData Storage location/OrderPhonebook (Own number)receive one dataThe phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory number in “010” through “999” in the Phonebook. If all memory numbers “010” through “999” are occupied, the phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory numbers in “000” through “009” (two-touch dial).receive all data Stored in the same memory number as that of the sender.Schedulereceive one dataStored with the starting date/time of the schedule event.receive all data Stored with the same date and time as those of the sender.ToDoreceive one dataStored on the top in the ToDo list.receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender.Received mailreceive one dataStored in the “Inbox” folder on the Inbox Folder list with the same date and time as that of the sender.receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the same date and time.Sent mailreceive one dataStored in the “Outbox” folder on the Outbox Folder list with the same date and time as that of the sender.receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the same date and time.Draft mailreceive one dataStored with the same date and time as that of the sender.receive all data Stored with the same date and time as that of the sender.Decome-Anime templatereceive one dataStored on the top in the “Phone” folder in “Decome-Anime” in “Template” inside “Mail”.Text Memoreceive one dataStored in the first <Not recorded>.receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the top of the list.Melodyreceive one dataStored on the top in the “i-mode” folder in “Melody” inside “Data box”.
369Data Display/Edit/ManagementStill Image filereceive one data/receive multiple dataStored on the top in the “i-mode” folder in “My picture” inside “Data box”.Moving Image filereceive one data/receive multiple dataStored on the top in the “i-mode” folder in “imotion” inside “Data box”.PDF filereceive one dataStored on the top in the “i-mode” folder in “My documents” inside “Data box”.ToruCa filereceive one data/receive multiple dataStored on the top in the “ToruCa” folder.receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the same order.Bookmarkreceive one dataStored on the top in the “Bookmark” folder each for i-mode and Full Browser.receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the same order.LCS client informationreceive one dataStored in the first <Not stored>.receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the top of the list.Data Storage location/OrderInformationpYou cannot send the following files:・Files whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited・Partially saved files・Pre-installed Deco-mail pictures・Phonebook entries and SMS messages on the UIMpYou cannot send the files on the microSD card. Copy or move to the FOMA phone and then send.pYou can send and receive up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters for a title of a still image, moving image, or PDF file, or up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for a title of a melody.pWhen you send a mail message, the file attached to the mail message is also sent. However some files cannot be sent depending on the file type.pDepending on the mobile phone at the receiving end, subjects of i-mode mail messages cannot be received completely.pThe mail message with an attached file which has not been obtained, or the mail message containing the link information for starting an i-αppli program is sent after the file or information is deleted.pWhen the maximum number of storable received mail messages (see page 537) is exceeded, the messages are overwritten in the following order; messages in the “Trash box” folder → the oldest received message.pWhen the maximum number of storable sent mail messages (see page 537) is exceeded, the oldest unprotected mail message in the Outbox folder is overwritten.pWhen the Decome-Anime template contains a file whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited, the mail message is sent after the file or text data is deleted.pWhen you send a ToruCa file (details) using infrared rays, the confirmation display appears asking whether to forward the file including the detailed information. In this case, select “YES” to send it with the detailed information, or select “NO” to send the ToruCa file as a file before obtaining the detailed information.pThe ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA phone is prohibited is sent as a ToruCa file before obtaining the detailed information.pYou cannot receive Phonebook entries while Restrict Dialing is activated. At sending, you can send only the Phonebook entries set with Restrict Dialing and data of Own Number.pIt may take long to forward data or you might not be able to receive data depending on the data size.pYou cannot store a still image in excess of 2 Mbytes, moving image in excess of 10 Mbytes, melody in excess of 100 Kbytes, PDF file in excess of 2 Mbytes, Decome-Anime template in excess of 100 Kbytes, ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte, or ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes.pIf the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) is connected to the FOMA phone, you may not be able to perform infrared data exchange.pYou cannot send files that are not supported by the device at the receiving end.Information
370Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can send/receive the data files one by one using infrared rays.You can send/receive multiple still images, moving images, and ToruCa files at a time.■Notes on sending/receivingpIn Secret Mode, you can send secret data as well. However, in Secret Data Only, you can send only the secret data.pIf you receive a Phonebook entry stored as secret data in “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”, the Phonebook entry is stored as an ordinary one.pWhen sending a Phonebook entry, you cannot send the stored secret code and voice dial entry.1Display for a data item to be senti()Send Ir datapTo send a Phonebook entry, select “Send Ir data” from the Function menu and select “Send phonebook”.pTo send a mail message, ToruCa file or bookmark, select “Ir/  transmission” from the Function menu and select “Send Ir data”.pTo send multiple files, select the files you want to send by “Multiple-choice”. Press i( ) to select “Send Ir data”.2YESpTo send multiple files, select “YES” by a factor of selected number of files, and send them.1mLifeKitReceive Ir datapYou can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop. (See page 127)Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data FilesSend One or Multiple Data Files+m-7-9Receive One or Multiple Data Files2ReceiveYESpWhen you receive Phonebook entries, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store them also in the PushTalk Phonebook.pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to continue receiving after receiving one data file.When you received multiple files, select “YES”.You can send/receive the following data files all at once using infrared rays: the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, text memos, bookmarks, mail messages, ToruCa files, and LCS client information.To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digit number). The receiving end needs to enter the same session number.■Notes on sending/receiving all data filespReceiving all data files deletes all data you have stored including the secret data and protected data, and the received data overwrites the existing data. The data you have stored in “Secret mode” is deleted as well. Check that no important data is stored before receiving all data files.pIf you send all Phonebook entries, the “Own number” data is also sent. All the data of “Own number” at the receiving end is overwritten except the own number. Mail address is also overwritten by sender’s address, so change it at the receiving end.pIf you send all Phonebook entries, PushTalk Phonebook entries are also sent. Information of voice dial entries are not sent.pThe Phonebook entries stored as secret data are sent not only during Secret Mode but also any other time. The sent secret data is stored as secret data at the receiving end, too.pThe group names in the Phonebook you have received are stored, so the data set in “Group setting” is also overwritten.pNote that the schedule events at the receiving end are all deleted if you send all ToDo items to the phone that does not support ToDo.pYou can send/receive the protected sent/received mail messages.InformationpWhen you receive an instruction for starting a software program, and you have already downloaded a compatible software program, that software program starts. If you have not put a check mark for “Ir iαppli To” of “Set iαppli To”, the software program does not start up automatically.Sending/Receiving All Data Files
371Data Display/Edit/Management1Display for a data item to be senti()Send all Ir dataEnter your Terminal Security Code.pTo send the Phonebook entries, select “Send Ir data” from the Function menu and select “Send all phonebook”.pTo send mail messages, ToruCa files or bookmarks, select “Ir/  transmission” from the Function menu and select “Send all Ir data”.2Enter the session numberYESpEnter any four-digit number as the session number.1mLifeKitReceive Ir datapYou can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop. (See page 127)2Receive allEnter your Terminal Security CodeEnter the same session number as that entered at the sending endYESYESThe stored data is deleted, then receiving starts.Send All Data Files+m-7-9Receive All Data FilesInformationpWhen you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored or mail to which files are attached, and the multiple same still images or files are found, only one image or file is stored.You can use the FOMA phone as a TV remote-controller by starting the i-αppli program.pTo use remote-control devices, you may need to download the software program for those devices. [The pre-installed “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote-controller)” supports the infrared remote-controller function.] The key operation for the remote-controller differs depending on the software program.pThis function does not work with some devices.pCommunication might be affected by compatible devices and the ambient light.pYou cannot use the infrared remote-controller during Self Mode.pTurn the FOMA phone’s Infrared data port to the front of a device to be operated. You can operate within about 4 meters away from the device.pThe radiation angle of the infrared rays is within ±15° from the center.For when you forward Phonebook entries using infrared rays, iC communication, SD-PIM, or DoCoMo keitai datalink, you can specify whether to forward the stored still images together.1mPhonebookPhonebook settingsForwarding imageON or OFFUsing Infrared Remote-controller FunctionInfrared Remote-controller+m-2-6<Forwarding Image>Communication SettingWithin about 4 metersInfrared data portWithin ±15° from the center
372Data Display/Edit/ManagementiC communication is the function that enables you to send/receive data files to/from another FOMA phone using the FeliCa reader/writer function. You can send/receive data files by overlapping the FeliCa “ ” mark of your FOMA phone with that of another FOMA phone supporting the iC communication function.pThe type of files and conditions of forwarding are the same as those of infrared data exchange. (See page 368) However, you cannot send multiple files at a time.pYou cannot execute iC communication while “IC card lock” is activated.pYou might have difficulty in sending or receiving files depending on the destination FOMA phone. In that case, move a FeliCa mark “ ” close to or away from the other FeliCa mark or move each side up, down, left, or right.You can send/receive the data files one by one using iC communication.pSee “■Notes on sending/receiving” on page 370 as well.pYou cannot use this function during charging.1Display of the data to be senti() transmissionpTo send a Phonebook entry, select “ transmission” from the Function menu and select “Send phonebook”.pTo send a mail message, ToruCa file or bookmark, select “Ir/  transmission” from the Function menu and select “  transmission”.<iC Transmission>About iC CommunicationSending/Receiving One Data FileSend One Data FileOverlap one another’s FeliCa mark “ ”.2YES1Overlap the FeliCa mark “ ” at the sending end with that of your FOMA phone while the Stand-by display is shownYESpWhen you receive a Phonebook entry, the confirmation display appears asking whether to store it also in the PushTalk Phonebook.You can send/receive the following data files all at once using iC communication: Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, text memos, bookmarks, mail messages, ToruCa files, and LCS client information.To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digits number). The receiving end needs to enter the same session number.pSee “■Notes on sending/receiving all data files” on page 370 as well.pYou cannot use this function during charging.1Display of the data to be senti()All  transmissionEnter your Terminal Security Code.pTo send the Phonebook entries, select “ transmission” from the Function menu and select “Send all phonebook”.pTo send mail messages, ToruCa files or bookmarks, select “Ir/  transmission” from the Function menu and select “All   transmission”.2Enter the session numberYESpEnter any four-digits number as the session number.Receive One Data FileSending/Receiving All Data FilesSend All Data Files
373Data Display/Edit/Management1Overlap the FeliCa mark “ ” at the sending end with that of your FOMA phone while the Stand-by display is shown.2YESEnter your Terminal Security CodeEnter the same session number as that entered at the sending end.The stored data is deleted, and then receiving starts.This function is for recording voices. You can record voices in a meeting instead of taking notes.pThis function is the same as the one for when “Movie type set” is set to “Voice” in Movie Mode. See page 153 for an estimate of recording time.pYou can play back the saved voice from “imotion” of “Data box”.pSee page 153 for the estimate of recordable time. 1mLifeKitVoice recorderReceive All Data FilesInformationpWhen you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored, and the multiple same still images are found, only one image is stored.<Voice Recorder>Using Voice RecorderVoice Recorder Recording display2Press Oo().Start recording.3Press Oo().pRecording ends. Voice recorder saving pre-check display appears.pPress m( ) to play back the recorded voice.4Press Oo().Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Recording displayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFile size setting Select an item.Mail restrict’n(S). . . . . .You can record up to 500 Kbytes.Mail restrict’n(L). . . . . .You can record up to 2 Mbytes.Long time . . . . . . . . . . .You can record for a long time. The voice is saved to the microSD card.Storage setting(Store in)You can set the storage location for the recorded voice.When you set to “Phone”, the voice is saved to “Voice recorder” in the “imotion” folder. When you set to “microSD”, it is saved to the folder in “Other contents” which you set for “Select storage”.Phone or microSDStorage setting(Auto save set)You can set whether to automatically save the recorded voice after you finish recording.ON・OFFStorage setting(File restriction)See page 164.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items.Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Saving Pre-check displayFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPlay See page 373.
374Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can display the PDF files saved by downloading from sites.1mData boxMy documentsSelect a folderSelect a PDF file.pEach time you press m from the Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.pIf you cannot display a preview image, any of the following images are displayed:pSee page 183 when the PDF file is set with a password.Save See page 373.Attach to mail You can save the recorded voice and attach it to i-mode mail.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing l().Store in See page 373.File restriction See page 164.Cancel You do not save the recorded voice.<PDF Viewer>Displaying PDF FilesFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFolder list PDF File listDoes not support(PDF file displayed as “ ” or “ ”)Cannot be displayedDoes not support(PDF file displayed as “ ”)■Operations when displaying a PDF filepSee page 375 for when you operate from the Function menu.Operation Key operationUpper scroll ZoLower scroll XoLeft scroll CoRight scroll VoBring up key operation guide lZoom in 3Zoom out 1Fit page 2Operation Key operationNext page c9>Previous page m7<Search 5Search next 6Search previous 4Bring up bookmark list 8Add bookmark8(for at least one second)InformationpWhen many files are stored in the FOMA phone or the microSD card, it may take long to access them. It may take long to display the PDF file depending on the PDF file.pA PDF file that contains the complicated design or in the format not compatible with the PDF viewer might not be correctly displayed.pWhen you try to display undownloaded pages while the PDF file partially downloaded is displayed, downloading of the page starts.Function Menu of the PDF File ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title See page 331.Document info You can display the PDF file name, saved date/time, etc.Attach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Send Ir data See page 370. transmission See page 372.
375Data Display/Edit/ManagementCopy to microSD See page 359.Copy to phone See page 360.Copy See page 332.Move See page 332.Add desktop icon See page 127.Delete this See page 332.Delete all See page 332.Multiple-choice See page 333.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items.Sort See page 333.Listing You can change the displayed contents of the PDF File list.Title or ImagepYou can switch the lists also by pressing c( ) from the PDF File list.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Listing>pWhen you use “Image” to display PDF files, they might appear different from the actual images depending on the PDF files.Function Menu while PDF File is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationZoom in You can zoom in the PDF file. You can zoom in the PDF file up to 1,000%. Zoom out You can zoom out the PDF file. You can zoom out the PDF file up to 8%.Go to You can move to another page of the PDF file.Select the page you want to move to.pIf you select “Specified page”, enter the page number you want to move to in the page number field, and select “OK”; then you can access to the specified page.Search You can display the screen in which the specified character string is contained. The point that matches the specified character is marked in yellow green.SearchSelect the search string fieldEnter a character string to be searched for.pYou can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.Put a check mark for search conditions to be specifiedl()pIf you select “Search next” or “Search prev.”, you can continue to search under the same condition.Bookmark/mark(Disp. bookmark)See page 376.Bookmark/mark(Add bookmark)You can set a bookmark (i-mode bookmark) for the page currently displayed and can display the desired page easily by selecting the bookmark. You can set up to 10 bookmarks.Add bookmarkYESSelect the title fieldEnter a titleOKpYou can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters.pSee page 377 when bookmarks are stored to the maximum.Bookmark/mark(Display mark)See page 377.Bookmark/mark(Add mark)You can store the currently displayed page number and the position within the page as the mark. You can use the stored mark as the sign of the reference point. You can set up to 10 marks.Add markYESpSee page 377 when marks are stored to the maximum.View types(View mode)You can change display format of the PDF file.View modeSelect a display format.pIf you select “User defined”, enter the magnification value in the magnification specification field, and select “OK”; then you can display the page at the specified magnification.pThe magnification you can specify is 8 through 1,000%.pIf you save a file after changing the display format, it is displayed at the saved magnification next time.View types(Rotate view)Rotate view90° to right or 90° to leftFunction menu Operation/Explanation
376Data Display/Edit/ManagementView types(Page layout)You can change the display layout of the PDF file.Page layoutSingle page, Continuous or Continuous-facingView types(Display link)You can display links set in the PDF file. Internal links (links set in the PDF file displayed), Web To, Mail To, and Phone To/AV Phone To are available for the links.Display linkSelect a link.pWhen multiple links are found in the display, you can select a link by pressing Bo.pWhen you select an internal link, you can move to the linked page in the PDF file. See page 187 for another link.View types(Page info ON/OFF)You can set whether to display the zoom magnification, page number, and scroll bar for displaying the PDF file.Page info ON/OFFSelect an itemDisplay or Not displayView types(Document info)See page 374.Save See page 377.Download remain You can download all pages of the PDF file which you have not completely downloaded yet such as partially downloaded page by page or failed to be downloaded owing to disconnection of communication midway.YESCapture screen You can cut out a part of the display and save it as JPEG image.Oo()YESSelect a folder.pSee page 186 when images are stored to the maximum.Attach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.Function menu Operation/ExplanationAt Viewer start-upSingle pageAt Viewer start-upDisplay You can list the bookmarks set for the PDF file and the i-mode bookmarks additionally set.By selecting a bookmark, you can display the page for which the bookmark is set.1While a PDF file is displayedi()Bookmark/markDisp. bookmarkBookmark or i-mode bookmarkSelect a bookmark.pSome bookmarks that have been set beforehand are categorized into tier-levels. Press i( ) to display the bookmarks at the lower level. However, all the bookmarks at the third-tier level or lower are displayed at the third-tier level.Information<Search>pThe search conditions work as shown below:Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search.Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a word.Search upward: When you do “Search next”, you can search backwards to the first page from the start page.Search ‘?’ as wildcard: “?” mark (half-pitch) entered in the search string field is set for a search condition as a random character.Search in this page: Searches in the currently displayed page only.<View types (Page layout)>pYou cannot change the layout of the partial PDF file.<Capture screen>pYou might not be able to cut out the display depending on the security setting of the PDF file.Display BookmarkFunction Menu while i-mode Bookmark is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters.Delete(Delete)DeleteYES
377Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can list the marked pages and positions stored in the PDF file.When you select a mark, you can display the page in which the mark is stored.1While a PDF file is displayedi()Bookmark/markDisplay markSelect a mark.Delete(Delete selected)Delete selectedPut a check mark for bookmarks to be deletedl()YESDelete(Delete all)Delete allEnter your Terminal Security CodeYESDisplay MarkFunction menu Operation/ExplanationFunction Menu while the Mark List is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationDelete YESDelete selected Put a check mark for marks to be deletedl()YESDelete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYou can save the PDF files. You can save the newly downloaded pages and added bookmarks/marks.You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537)1While a PDF file is displayedi()SaveYESThe PDF file once saved to the FOMA phone or microSD card is overwritten each time you save it. (The operation in step 2 is not required.)The PDF file that is not saved to the FOMA phone or microSD card is newly saved.pWith the PDF file that was re-downloaded from the first page owing to updating at the server’s end, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite the current data. Select “YES” to overwrite it. Select “NO” to newly save.2Select a destination folder.pSee page 186 when PDF files in the FOMA phone are stored to the maximum.If you try to add a bookmark or mark to the PDF file for which 10 bookmarks or marks have been set, or if you try to save the PDF file for which 11 or more bookmarks or marks have been set, the confirmation display appears asking whether to add/save the bookmark or mark after unnecessary ones are deleted.1. YES2. Select bookmarks/marks to be deletedYESorPut a check mark for bookmarks/marks to be deletedl()YESpContinue putting a check mark until “ ” appears.You can set a display format for when the PDF files are displayed from sites.1ii-mode settingsDoc. display settingsSelect a display format.SaveWhen bookmarks or marks are set to the maximumDocument Display Settings
378Data Display/Edit/ManagementYou can display the Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint files saved to the microSD card.1mData boxDocument viewerSelect a folderSelect a file.pSee page 366 for the Function menu on the Folder list.■Operations when displaying a document filepSee page 378 for when you operate from the Function menu.<Document Viewer>Displaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint FilesFolder list Document listOperation Key operationUpper scroll ZoLower scroll XoLeft scroll CoRight scroll VoBring up key operation guide lZoom in 3Zoom out 1Operation Key operationFit page 2Next page c9>Previous page m7<Search 5Search next 6Search previous 4Function Menu of the Document ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationEdit title See page 331.File info You can display the name and type of files.Attach to mail You can compose an i-mode mail message with the document file attached.Go to step 2 on page 198.pYou can compose it also by pressing l().Copy See page 332.Move See page 332.Delete this See page 332.Delete all See page 332.Multiple-choice See page 333.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Function Menu while Document File is DisplayedFunction menu Operation/ExplanationZoom in You can zoom in the file.You can zoom in the file up to 1,000%.Zoom out You can zoom out the file.You can zoom out the file up to 8%.View types You can change display format of the file.Select a display format.pIf you select “User defined”, enter the magnification value in the magnification specification field, and select “OK”; then you can display the page at the specified magnification.pThe magnification you can specify by “User defined” is 8 through 1,000%.
379Data Display/Edit/ManagementGo to You can move to another page or sheet of the file.Select the page or the sheet you want to move to.pIf you select “Specified page” for the Microsoft Word file or Microsoft PowerPoint file, enter the page number you want to move to in the page number field, and select “OK”; then you can more to the specified page.Search You can display the screen in which the specified character string is contained. The point that matches the specified character string is highlighted.SearchSelect the search string fieldEnter a character string to be searched for.pYou can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.Put a check mark for search conditions to be specifiedl()pIf you select “Search prev.” or “Search next”, you can continue to search under the same condition.Zoom & page You can set whether to display the zoom magnification and page number for displaying the file.Display or Not displayScroll bar You can set whether to display the scroll bar for displaying the file.Display or Not displayRotate view 90° to right or 90° to leftDocument info You can display the name and type of files.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Search>pThe search conditions work as shown below:Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a word.Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search.Search in this page (Excel file only): Searches in the currently displayed page only.Search in this file (Excel file only): Searches in the whole file.DPOF is the format for recording the print information about the still image you shot with a digital camera. You can input the information into the still image on the microSD card about whether to print it out and how many copies you print out. You can take the card to DPE service shops or use a DPOF compatible printer to print photos as you specify.1Still image in play/Still image listi()DPOF settingPrintEnter the number of copies to be printed out.pEnter “01” through “99” in two digits.pTo cancel printing the selected still image, select “Print OFF”. To cancel printing all still images, select “All print OFF”.Printing Saved ImagesSelect a Method to Print the Images Saved in the microSD CardInformationpThe classification icon of the images set DPOF Setting is “ ”.pYou can set DPOF Setting for up to 999 image files.pYou cannot set DPOF Setting for the image in excess of 2 Mbytes or 5M (2592 x 1944) size.pIf unused space on the microSD card is not enough, DPOF Setting might not be set. (The icon and Picture Information, however, indicate DPOF is set.)pStill images shot by P906i also support PRINT Image MatchingⅢ.
380Data Display/Edit/ManagementWhen you connect the FOMA phone to a TV using the Flat-plug AV Output Cable P01 (option), you can display still images, moving images/i-motion movies, and images during a videophone call, video from 1Seg and from i-αppli on the TV. You cannot display any other images.Open the cover of the Earphone/Microphone/AV output terminal on the FOMA phone and connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to it. Then connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to the video/audio input terminal on the TV.<AV Output>Displaying Still Images, Moving Images/i-motion Movies on TVConnect FOMA Phone to TVVideo(yellow)Audio L(white)Audio R(red)(yellow) (white) (red)Video/Audio input terminalEarphone/Microphone/AV output terminalFlat-plug AV Output CableInformationpYou can connect to the devices other than TV sets for output.pWhen connecting the Flat-plug AV Output Cable, make sure that you firmly insert it. Do not pull the cable forcibly, twist it by the plug, or apply an excessive force.1Play back a still image while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connectedor connect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while a still image is being played back.pPress m( ) to switch the display size.pYou can press Oo( ) to start a slide show. You can press Oo( ) again to stop it.pYou can press No to display a previous or next still image.pEach time you press l( ), you can rotate the still image clockwise by 90 degrees.pSee page 330 for how to display still images.pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When the playback ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well.pBefore connecting or disconnecting the Flat-plug AV Output Cable to and from the device such as a TV, turn off the sound volume of the connected device.pTo pull the plug out, take hold of the plug and then pull it out softly.Display Still Images on TVInformationInformationpAV output is not available in the following cases:・When playing back a still image from any other than the Still Image list or icon pasted to the desktop・When playing back a still image from any other than the “i-mode” folder, “Camera” folder, user folders, “Picture” folder (microSD), and “Image Box” folder (microSD)・When displaying a still image whose acquired source icon is “ ” or “ ”, and whose “File restriction” is “File restricted”・When playing back a Chara-den picture you shot a Chara-den model whose “Rec. file restriction” is “File restricted”・When playing back a still image in the actual size or by slide show・When playing back a Flash movie
381Data Display/Edit/Management1Play back a moving image/i-motion movie while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connectedorconnect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while a moving image/i-motion movie is being played back.pPress m( ) to switch the display size.pSee page 338 for how to play back moving images/i-motion movies and how to operate during playback.pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well.pWhen a still image is larger than the VGA (640 x 480) size, it is reduced to VGA (640 x 480) or smaller with its proportional ratio retained for displaying on the TV.pOn some TVs, still images may not be displayed correctly when the display size is switched.Display Moving Images/i-motion Movies on TVInformationInformationpAV output is not available in the following cases:・When the image is played back from any other than the Moving Image list or icon pasted to the desktop・When playing back a moving image/i-motion movie whose acquired source icon is “ ” or “ ”, and whose “File restriction” is “File restricted”・When playing back a Chara-den movie you shot a Chara-den model whose “Rec. file restriction” is “File restricted”・When a moving image/i-motion movie in the “Pre-installed” folder, or “Movable contents” folder (microSD) is played back1Make a videophone call while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connectedorconnect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable during a videophone call.p“ ” appears during AV output.pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When the videophone call ends, or another function starts up, AV output is canceled as well.pOn some TVs, moving images/i-motion movies may not be displayed correctly when the display size is switched.Display Images during a Videophone Call on TVInformationInformationpYou cannot execute AV output for the images of Remote Monitoring.pThe sensitivity of the microphone is improved during AV output.p“ ” (Hands-free icon) does not appear during AV output. However, the voice is output from the connected device. You cannot switch to Hands-free.
382Data Display/Edit/Management1Watch a 1Seg program while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connectedorconnect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable during watching a 1Seg program.pTo switch to AV output while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connected, select “AV output” from the Function menu.pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone or select “AV output” again from the Function menu. When watching 1Seg programs ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled.Display Video from 1SegAt 1Seg start-up ReleasedInformationpWhen “TV sound while closed” is set to “ON”, AV output still continues even if you close the FOMA phone.pThe caption and data broadcasting are not displayed on TV.pAV output is unavailable during recording.pAV output is unavailable for video or still images recorded by 1Seg.pThe sound during AV output is output from a connected device, so adjusting the sound volume of the FOMA phone cannot change the output sound volume.1Start an i-αppli program while the Flat-plug AV Output Cable is connectedorconnect the Flat-plug AV Output Cable while an i-αppli program is running.pTo cancel AV output, pull the Flat-plug AV Output Cable off of the FOMA phone. When an i-αppli ends, or when another function starts up, AV output is canceled.Display Video from i-αppliInformationpAV output still continues even if you close the FOMA phone. However, AV output is not available during pause in Power Saver Mode.pAV output of i-αppli programs is unavailable during Play Background.
383Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackMusic&Video ChannelWhat is Music&Video Channel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  384Setting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  384Playing Back/Operating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  386MUSIC PlayerPlaying Back Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  390Saving Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  390Using MUSIC Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  <MUSIC Player> 392Using Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  400■Handling Music FilesYou can use music files saved on the microSD card for personal use only. Before using, give enough consideration not to infringe on the third party’s intellectual property rights or other rights such as copyright.
384Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackMusic&Video Channel is a service which automatically delivers up to about one-hour programs at night by just setting your favorite music programs in advance. Further, you can enjoy high-quality moving image program of up to about 30 minutes. Programs are updated periodically and you can enjoy the delivered programs at your convenient time such as on commuting.■Before using Music&Video ChannelpMusic&Video Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. (You need to subscribe to i-mode and Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full to apply for it.)pOther than the service fee for using Music&Video Channel, you might be separately charged an information fee depending on the program.pFor the details on Music&Video Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]”.pIf you insert the UIM to the Music&Video Channel incompatible FOMA phone after you subscribe to Music&Video Channel, you cannot use Music&Video Channel Service. Note that the service fee applies unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel subscription.pYou cannot obtain or set programs during international roaming. When you try to obtain or set programs, note that you are charged a packet communication fee for the i-mode communication. Take procedures to halt the distribution of programs before departure to overseas. Then, after homecoming, resume receiving distribution.What is Music&Video Channel?If you previously set a program that you want to watch, the FOMA phone automatically downloads the program data at night.1mMUSICMusic&Video Channel2Set programFollow the instructions on the display to set a program.For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.pSee page 186 when data files are stored to the maximum.“ ” appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours before the time the program obtaining starts. However, it does not appear if you have inserted a UIM which is different from the one you used to set the program.Programs are automatically obtained at night. The display for obtaining programs does not appear but “ ” appears on the desktop when they are successfully obtained. Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Music&Video Channel display. When obtaining fails, “ ” appears.Setting ProgramsMusic&Video Channel displayWhen a program is set
385Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackInformationpWhen the communication is disconnected during obtaining a program, re-obtaining is automatically tried up to five times by an interval of about three minutes. When a display for obtaining a program is shown, however, the confirmation display appears asking whether to re-obtain the program.pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work to notify that obtaining programs starts or is completed. When you set “Music&Video ch illum.” of “Illumination” to “ON”, the Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining programs is completed. (See page 122)pYou can set up to two programs at once.pNote that a newly obtained program overwrites a saved program and you can no longer play back that saved program afterward. To avoid overwriting, perform “Move program” to move the program to the “Saved program” folder.pYou cannot save the obtained program to the microSD card.pTo set programs, you need to register the site which offers Music&Video Channel programs to your My Menu. (See page 177)pIf you have not subscribed to Music&Video Channel, select “About this service” to see the Music&Video Channel introduction page.pWhen the programs could not be obtained due to “power off” or “low battery” at the start time of program obtaining, re-obtaining is performed at night of the following day.pIt may take a time to obtain programs, so fully charge the battery and operate in the good radio wave conditions.pYou cannot perform the setting operation and automatic obtaining of the program selected on the Music&Video Channel display or the program in use.pWhen you cancel Music&Video Channel, the programs other than those moved by “Move program” are deleted.pIf you insert a UIM which is different from the one you used to set programs, programs cannot be automatically obtained. Set the programs again from the Music&Video Channel display.pWhen you select a service menu for Music&Video Channel and the message “Confirm set up information?” appears, select “YES” to delete the programs that have already been distributed. However, they may not be deleted while the distribution of programs is halted.pIf you insert the UIM of the FOMA phone that you have already set programs into another Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA phone, the programs cannot be obtained automatically. Select “Set program” again from the Music&Video Channel display to automatically update the program setting on the FOMA phone, then the programs can be obtained automatically.1Music&Video Channel displaySet programFollow the instructions on the display.You can check or cancel the set program. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”. “ ” appears on the Stand-by display when the automatic program obtaining fails or the program is not updated even after the program distribution date. When the automatic obtaining fails, you can manually obtain the program.1Music&Video Channel displaySelect a programYESpFor a partially obtained program, select “Play” to play it back.pFor a program which has not been updated, select “Play” to play it back.Check/Cancel the Set ProgramInformationpEven if the setting of a program is canceled, My Menu is not deleted.Obtain a Program ManuallyInformationpWhen obtaining of a program is suspended, the part of the program obtained up to that point is saved. To obtain remaining part, you can manually obtain it except in some time zones. When a program has been updated or switched to another program, obtaining starts not from the suspended point but from the beginning.pYou cannot re-obtain the program whose playable deadline has expired. Such a program cannot be updated until the next distribution date.pYou may not be able to manually obtain programs depending on the time zone.
386Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackpYou can enjoy playing back programs in stereo sound by connecting the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy playing back programs wirelessly by using a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431)1mMUSICMusic&Video ChannelSelect a program.“ ” is displayed while Music&Video Channel is activated, and “ ” is displayed when the program shifts to pause state during Play Background.pWhile highlighting a program, the next distribution date is displayed under the program name.pWhen information of the previously played program exists, playback starts from the position and/or in the mode accordingly.pHighlight a program and press l( ); then the Chapter list is displayed.pHighlight a program and press m( ) to connect to the URL of the program URL information.pAny of the following images are displayed when you cannot display the preview images:pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second or press h during playback or pause, playing back program ends.pYou can use mail functions, display sites, and so on, while listening to music using Music&Video Channel (Play Background). (See page 511)Playing Back/Operating ProgramsMusic&Video Channel displayCannot be played backPlayback restrictions have expired, and the like.No preview imagesUpdating programYou can play back programs also from Data Box. From Data Box, you can play back currently distributed programs as well as the programs that have been distributed in the past and moved to the “Saved program”.1mData boxMusic&Video ChannelDownloaded program or Saved programSelect a program.pYou can switch display format each time you press c( ) from the Program list.■About Music&Video Channel Playback display…Program image or program video(When no images are stored, an animation appears.)…Chapter number/The number of chapters(Chapter number only on the Private window)…Chapter name/Artist name…Program name…Playback state…Playback time/Total playback time…Play mode (No indication for “Normal”): Repeat…Equalizer: Normal : S-XBS1: S-XBS2 : TrainOperate Music&Video Channel from Data BoxProgram Folder list Program listWhen the FOMA phone is closed   
387Music&Video Channel/Music Playback…Stereo/Monaural: Stereo : Monaural…Listening (No indication for “OFF”): Surround : Natur1: Natur2…Remaster (No indication for “OFF”): ON…Icon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected): Being connected…Sound volume■Operation while playing back a Music&Video Channel programOperation Key operationHalt l()Pause Oo() or ppOo() or p to play backSound volume adjustmentBo or </>pPress and hold Bo to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available.Replay next chapterVo or >(for at least one second)Replay previous chapterCo or <(for at least one second) pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.Search(fast forward)※Press and hold Vo.Search(fast rewind)※Press and hold Co.Connect to site m()Play background c()Display next image 3Display previous image1Remaster 9pEach time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.※You cannot operate during pause.From the Music&Video Channel Playback display, you can do the following operations by using the switch of the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option) or the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option):pYou can operate them when the FOMA phone is closed as well.■Icons on the Music&Video Channel display/the Program listThe icons on the Music&Video Channel display indicate the download status.p“ ” is added to the newly obtained program.pSome programs have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or playback period. “ ” is added to the icon of the program with playback restrictions and “ ” is added to the icon of the program with restrictions expired. You can check the playback restrictions for the program by “Program info”.pSome programs have restrictions on operation. “ ” is added to the icon of the program with operation restrictions.pDepending on the program, its playable time zone is fixed. “ ” is added to the icon of the program with time zone restrictions. The time follows the time information obtained from the network.Listening 8pEach time of pressing switches in order of “OFF” → “Surround” → “Natur1” → “Natur2”.Equalizer 7pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Normal” → “S-XBS1” → “S-XBS2” → “Train”.Operation Key operationOperation Switch operationPause Press once.pTo play back, press again.Replay next chapterPress twice in succession.Replay previous chapterPress three times in succession.pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.Icon DescriptionSuccessfully obtained programBroken programPartially obtained program or unsuccessfully obtained program
388Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackpWhen obtaining a periodically-updated program fails, “ ” appears to tell the program has not been updated. “ ” disappears when obtaining the program starts.pThe file restriction is set to all the Music&Video Channel programs. See page 164 for the file restrictions.InformationpThe information of the previously played program is erased if you do the following operations:・When you turn on/off the FOMA phone・When you update the program・When you delete or move the previously played programpIf you try to play back a program with a low battery, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”. When the battery becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback.pIn the following cases, playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:・When you make/receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call・When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm preferred” or the Stand-by display is shown・When an alarm tone of “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, “Book program” or “Timer recording” soundsDepending on the function which occurred, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to end the Music&Video Channel program.pIf a black display appears after you play back a program having time zone restrictions, playback starts at the next playable time zone.p“Program info” of a Music&Video Channel program and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by date/time with “Summer time” set to “OFF”.Function Menu of Music&Video Channel Display/Program Folder List/Program ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChapter list You can display the list of chapters set for the program. Select a chapter to play back the selected chapter and afterward.pPress i() and select “Chapter info” to display the information about the chapter title, playback time, etc.Play mode setting Normal or RepeatNormal . . . Plays back the program once in the order of the chapters.Repeat  . . . Plays back the program repeatedly in the order of the chapters.Program info You can display the program title, distribution source, playback restrictions, etc.Move program Programs currently distributed are updated to new programs on the next distribution date. You can save the current programs by moving them to the “Saved program” folder before the distributed program is updated. You can check “Memory info” for unused memory space you can save to. You can save up to 10 programs sharing the memory space with other data files, however, the number of programs you can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 537)YESpSee page 186 when programs are stored to the maximum.Add desktop icon See page 127.Edit title Enter a title.pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.Reset title You can reset the title to the default.YESMultiple-choice You can select and delete multiple programs stored in “Saved program” folder.Put a check mark for programs to be deletedi()DeleteConnect to URL You can access the URL when the program has the URL information.YESDisplay image You can display the program images stored in the program.pPress r to return to the list.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).Delete/Delete this You can delete the program.YESDelete all You can delete all the programs stored in the “Saved program” folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESFunction menu Operation/Explanation
389Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackInformation<Play mode setting>pThe playable mode setting is invalid for the programs having the time zone restrictions.pEven if you set to “Repeat”, the program is not played back repeatedly if it has no time zone restrictions but has restrictions on the number of playbacks.<Move program>pYou cannot move the program when its obtaining is not completed, or the move restriction or time zone restriction is set for the program.<Edit title>pWhen the next program is delivered, the edited title is overwritten by the new title.<Multiple-choice> <Delete/Delete this> <Delete all> pEven when you delete the program, the program setting is not released.Function Menu during Playback/PauseFunction menu Operation/ExplanationChapter list See page 388.Play mode setting See page 388.Sound effect(Remaster)You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.RemasterON or OFFSound effect(Listening)You can set sound effect for listening.ListeningSelect an item.Surround  . . . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.Natur 1/2 . . . . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to earphones and plays back natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.OFF . . . . . . . . Sets Listening to “OFF”.p“Natur 1/2” is effective for the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device.Sound effect(Equalizer)You can change the sound quality of an earphone or Bluetooth device.EqualizerSelect an item.Normal. . . . .Reproduces normal sound quality.S-XBS1 . . . .Enhances bass sound.S-XBS2 . . . .Enhances bass sound more deeply than S-XBS1.Train  . . . . . .Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound leakage.Program info See page 388.Chapter info You can display the title, play time, etc. of the chapter currently played back.Connect to URL See page 388.Previous image You can display a previous image.Next image You can display a next image.Change to full You can change the display format of images. Each time of selecting the item switches in order of playback on the vertical display → playback on the horizontal display fitted to the display size → playback on the enlarged full size display.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Sound effect>pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting contents are displayed on the display.<Previous image> <Next image>pYou can display up to three images, however, you may not be able to display them depending on the program.<Change to full>pWhen the music program of voice only or moving image program of QCIF (176 x 144) size or smaller, you cannot play back on the full size display.pDepending on the image size, the image might be displayed with the right or bottom side cut.
390Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackYou can play back music files on your FOMA phone by using MUSIC Player or i-motion player.■MUSIC Player (See page 392)By “MUSIC Player” of “MUSIC”, you can play back Chaku-uta Full® music files or music files saved from music CDs to the microSD card via a personal computer.■i-motion Player (See page 338)From the “imotion” folder in “Data box”, you can play back the voice-only i-motion movie (including music data of AAC format) or AAC format files stored on the microSD card.pYou can display mail, sites, and so on, while listening to music by MUSIC Player (Play Background). (See page 511)You can download Chaku-uta Full® music files from sites. You can save up to 101.6 Mbytes of files including other data files. (See page 536)1Bring up a Chaku-uta Full® music file downloadable siteSelect a Chaku-uta Full® music fileSaveYESpSelect “Play” to play back the Chaku-uta Full® music file. See page 395 for operations while a Chaku-uta Full® music file is being played back.pSelect “Property” to display the Chaku-uta Full® music file information. (See page 398)pSee page 186 when Chaku-uta Full® music files are stored to the maximum.2Select a destination folder.pPress l( ) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.Playing Back MusicSaving Music FilesDownload Chaku-uta Full® Music FilesObtaining Completion displayWhen you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when the downloading is suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the Obtaining Completion display. Select “Save pt.” to save it to a folder in “i-mode” folder in “MUSIC” in “Data box”.You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from “Data box”.pThe title name of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full® music file takes the date and time when it is downloaded.pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full® music file has expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file. Further, the partially saved file is deleted when you save re-obtaining data.Uta-hodai files are the Chaku-uta Full® music files you can play back just for a period of the contract with a content provider. The playable deadline is specified in the license information that is downloaded together with the music file. Even when the playable deadline has expired, you can play back the music file by updating the license.pWhen a music file (Chaku-uta Full® music file downloaded on the membership service basis) whose playable deadline has expired is found at the start of MUSIC Player, the confirmation display appears asking whether to update the playable deadline. Select “YES” to update the file (Packet communication fee is charged). Select “NO” not to use the music file. See page 392 for starting MUSIC Player.pSome Uta-hodai music files are applied with surplus playable days even after the playable deadline has passed. During this period, you can play back files without updating the playable deadline information. When the surplus playable days are over, you cannot play back the files. Also if you download a music file with playable period not updated, you cannot play it back before it is saved.pWhen the upper limit of the (membership) music services you can register is exceeded, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite them. Select “YES” to overwrite a music service whose playable deadline is the oldest. You can no longer play back the music files downloaded from the overwritten service.pPacket communication fee charged for updating a playable deadline during international roaming is not supported by Pake-Houdai and Pake-Houdai Full.pIf you insert the UIM with a phone number different from the one you used to download Uta-hodai music files, you cannot download/play back the files. When you use Uta-hodai with a new UIM, execute “Initialize” (see page 433).When downloading Chaku-uta Full® music file is suspendedAbout Uta-hodai
391Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackYou can use Windows Media Player 10/11 to save Windows Media® Audio (WMA) files from a personal computer to the microSD card.You can save up to 600 WMA files.pAs well as music files, you can save playlists, jacket images, and license keys.First, prepare the devices required for saving WMA files.pFOMA P906ipmicroSD cardpFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)pPersonal computer with Windows Media Player 10 (10.00.00.3802 or later)/11 installed・When you use Windows Media Player 10/11 in Windows XP, use Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later. When you use Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.pBefore connecting the FOMA phone to a personal computer, you need to check the version of Windows Media Player.InformationpYou can save up to 5 Mbytes per Chaku-uta Full® music file.pWhen the Uta-hodai music file set for the ring tone or alarm tone needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired, the default tone sounds when a call comes in, or an alarm sounds/vibrates.pFor a Chaku-uta Full® music file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable deadline, “ ” is displayed at the head of the title. If you remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in the FOMA phone might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the Chaku-uta Full® music file that has restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See “Music info” for checking the playback restrictions.p“Music info” of a Chaku-uta Full® music file and deadline information on the display that notifies you of a playable deadline are shown by the date/time with “Summer time” set to “OFF”.pPartially saved Chaku-uta Full® music files cannot be played back from Data Box.Save WMA Files Prepare devices required for saving WMA files1Set “USB mode setting” to “MTP mode”. (See page 363)Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save WMA files to the microSD card.pYou cannot save WMA files to the FOMA phone.pFor how to operate Windows Media Player 10/11, refer to Help for Windows Media Player 10/11. pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA phone.When you remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02, remove it after finishing the software in use.You have the ability to save music files using the Napster® application.pPlease download the Napster® application from the following web page:http://www.napster.jp/ (Japanese only)pIf you have any questions about the Napster® application, refer to the following web page:http://www.napster.jp/support/ (Japanese only)Use the FOMA phone as reader/writerSave music files to the microSD cardAbout the Napster® Application23InformationpDo not remove the microSD card during saving a file. You may lose the file.pMusic files and jacket images are saved to PRIVATE/DOCOMO/MMFILE/WM/ on the microSD card.pThe WMA files saved to the microSD card using another FOMA phone might not be recognized by the FOMA P906i. Further, the files might not be recognized by the FOMA P906i even when it is connected to the personal computer with “USB mode setting” set to “MTP mode”.In that case, delete “WM” folder and “WM-SYSTEM” folder on the microSD card by using your personal computer, or format the microSD card (see page 362). Note that not only music files but also all the other files are deleted when the microSD card is formatted.
392Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackBy using SD-Jukebox (commercial item), you can save the music files on the music CDs to the microSD card as AAC format data.pBy using the microSD card adapter (option), you can save music files to the microSD card directly from a personal computer as well.※The following steps are an example for when the FOMA phone is used as a microSD reader/writer for saving music files.You can purchase SD-Jukebox from the web page below:http://www.sense.panasonic.co.jp/PanaSense/special/soft/sd_jukebox/  (Japanese only)pFor details about operating environments, refer to the web page below:http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/  (Japanese only)First, prepare the devices required for saving music files.pFOMA P906ipmicroSD cardpFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)pPersonal computer (Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Vista)pSD-Jukebox (commercial item)pMusic CD you want to savepWhen you add or delete the WMA files on the microSD card repeatedly, the size of license files might become large, and memory space on the microSD card might become low. In this case, you can delete the license files. You cannot play back the necessary WMA files of license if you delete the license files. To play back, delete the WMA files of the pertinence as well, connect the FOMA phone to a personal computer, and save WMA files again.pWhen unused memory space on the microSD card becomes 300 Kbytes or less, the card might not be recognized by a personal computer. Check the unused memory space on the microSD card, and delete unnecessary data files if the unused memory space is 300 Kbytes or less, then connect to the personal computer after setting “USB mode setting” to “MTP mode”.Save Music Files by Using SD-AudioAbout SD-JukeboxPrepare devices required for saving music filesInformation1Install SD-Jukebox on the personal computer.Set “USB mode setting” to “microSD mode”. (See page 363)Start SD-Jukebox and set a music CD on the personal computer. Then use SD-Jukebox to save music files to the microSD card.pFor how to operate SD-Jukebox, refer to Help for SD-Jukebox.pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA phone.You can play back Chaku-uta Full® music files obtained from sites or music files saved to the microSD card.To play back music files, select “MUSIC Player” from “MUSIC” on Main Menu. Play Background is available so that you can use mail functions, display sites, and so on, while listening to music.To manage folders or data files, select “MUSIC” from “Data box” on Main Menu.pNote that battery consumption will be faster when you use MUSIC Player.pYou can enjoy playing back music in stereo sound by connecting the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy listening to music wirelessly by using a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 431)pIf the number of stored files increases, it may take long to start MUSIC Player.Install SD-JukeboxUse the FOMA phone as reader/writerSave music files to the microSD card<MUSIC Player>Using MUSIC Player234
393Music&Video Channel/Music Playback1Press and hold p for at least one second.The Player Menu display appears.pThe playback display (in pause state) of the previously played music file appears when the information about it remains. You can display the playback display also by pressing and holding p for at least one second with the FOMA phone closed.2Select an item.All tracks. . . Displays all the music files saved on the FOMA phone and microSD card.Artist . . . . . . Displays all the artist names. Highlight the name of the artist you want to listen to and press Oo( ), then all the album names of the selected artist are displayed. (Go to Album)Album . . . . . Displays all the albums. Highlight the name of the album you want to listen to and press Oo().Genre. . . . . . Displays all the genres. Highlight the genre you want to listen to and press Oo().Playlist/SD-Audio . . . . . . . . . . . Displays all the playlists created by the FOMA phone and personal computer.See page 401 for the playback of playlists.Play Back Music FilesPlayer Menu displaypThe “★” mark is added to the playlist which is being played back or was previously played back.pWhen you select “Artist”, “Album”, or “Genre”, and press l( ) from the Type list, all the music files stored in the selected item are played back.pYou can switch display format each time you press c( ) from the Music list.pWhen “ ” is displayed on the Type list or the Music list, you can display the playback display of previously played back music file or music file in-play by pressing m().pYou might not be able to display all the stored music files depending on their file size.pThe image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a preview image:3Select a music file.Playback starts from the selected music file in the order listed on the Type list or playlist. “ ” is displayed while MUSIC Player is activated, and “ ” is displayed when the music shifts to pause state during Play Background.pThe “★” mark is added to the music file which is currently played back or was previously played back.pPlayback continues even if you close the FOMA phone during playback.pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second during playback, pause, or halt, or press h, MUSIC Player ends.pWhen you press m( ) during playback, the former Music list is displayed.Type list (For Artist)Music listCannot be displayedIncomplete downloadNo image, etc.
394Music&Video Channel/Music Playback1mData boxMUSIC2Select an item.MUSIC Player. . . MUSIC Player starts. (See page 393)i-mode. . . . . . . . . Displays the i-mode (Chaku-uta Full®) Folder list. Select a folder.WMA . . . . . . . . . . Displays the WMA list.pEach time you press m from the i-mode (Chaku-uta Full®) Folder list, you can switch between the folders in the FOMA phone and the microSD card.pYou can switch display format each time you press c( ) from the Chaku-uta Full® Music list and WMA list.pSee page 393 when you cannot display a preview image.pSee page 186 when you select “Search by i-mode”.pSome WMA files have playable license (number/period/deadline).Manage Folders or Music FilesMusic Folder listi-mode (Chaku-uta Full®) Folder listChaku-uta Full® Music listWMA list3Select a Chaku-uta Full® music file or WMA file.Only the selected music file is played back as a demo.pWhen you close the FOMA phone during playback, the playback stops.pTo terminate playback, press and hold p for at least one second or press h during playback or pause.pYou might be able to play back a Chaku-uta Full® music file by pressing l( ) or selecting “Play” from the Function menu while selecting it on another function.pChaku-uta Full® music files are shown by titles for control (“Music title - Artist name” in default title) when you display them from the “i-mode” folder. When you operate them from “MUSIC Player”, they are shown by titles.■About playback display during using MUSIC Player…The jacket image which is stored in the music file(When no images are stored, an animation appears.)…Track number…Title…Artist name…Playback state…Playback time/Total playback time…Play mode (No indication for “Normal”): Play only one  : Repeat one : Repeat all : Random: Random play & repeat: Demo (Displayed only in demo playbacks.)…Equalizer: Normal : S-XBS1: S-XBS2 : Train…Stereo/Monaural: Stereo  : Monaural…Listening (No indication for “OFF”): Surround : Natur1: Natur2…Remaster (No indication for “OFF”): ON…Icon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected): Being connected…Sound volumeWhen the FOMA phone is closed 
395Music&Video Channel/Music Playback■Operations of MUSIC Player in use※You cannot operate during halt or pause.pYou cannot use some operations during playback of a demo.Operation Key operationHalt l()pOo() or p to play backPause Oo() or ppOo() or p to play backSound volume adjustmentBo or </>pPress and hold Bo to adjust the sound volume sequentially.pSetting from Level 0 (Silent) through 25 is available.Replay next file Vo or > (for at least one second)Replay previous file Co or < (for at least one second)pWhen playback time is over three seconds, no previous music file is found, and “Random” or “Random play&repeat” is set, you go back to the beginning of the file.Search (fast forward)※Press and hold Vo.Search (fast rewind)※Press and hold Co.Display list m()Play background c()Display image/Display lyric/Player2pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Playback display (Jacket image)” → “Full display lyric image” → “Full display jacket image”.Display next image 3Display previous image1Remaster 9pEach time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.Listening 8pEach time of pressing switches in order of “OFF” → “Surround” → “Natur1” → “Natur2”.Equalizer 7pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Normal” → “S-XBS1” → “S-XBS2” → “Train”.From the playback display during using MUSIC Player, you can operate the following by using the switch of the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set (option) or the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option):pYou can operate them when the FOMA phone is closed as well.■Playback specifications of Chaku-uta Full® music files■Playback specifications of SD-Audio files and number of storable files※Except “All tracks”.■Playback specifications of WMA files and number of storable filesOperation Switch operationPause Press once.pTo play back, press again.Replay next file Press twice in succession.Replay previous file Press three times in succession.pWhen playback time is over three seconds, no previous music file is found, and “Random” or “Random play&repeat” is set, you go back to the beginning of the file.File format MP4Codec MPEG-4 AACMPEG-4 AAC+ (HE-AAC)Enhanced aacPlusBit rate 8 to 128 kbpsExtension 3gpFile format MPEG-2 AAC, MPEG-2 AAC+SBRBit rate 32 to 256 kbpsMaximum number of storable files999 filesMaximum number of playlist99 files (Up to 99 files can be stored in a single playlist.※)File format WMA (Windows Media Audio 9 Standard)Bit rate 32 to 192 kbpsMaximum number of storable filesMaximum 600 filesMaximum number of playlist100 files (Up to 250 files can be stored in a single playlist.)
396Music&Video Channel/Music Playback■Icons on the Music listWhen you select a music file from “MUSIC→MUSIC Player”, the following icons are displayed:■Icons on the Chaku-uta Full® Music listWhen you select a Chaku-uta Full® music file from “Data box→MUSIC”, the following icons are displayed:pSome Chaku-uta Full® music files and Uta-hodai music files have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or playable period. The following icons are added.・File with playback restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “ ”・File with playback restrictions expired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “ ”・Playable Uta-hodai music file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  “ ”・Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  “ ”・Unplayable Chaku-uta Full® music file or Uta-hodai music file. . . . . . . . . . .  “ ”You can check the playback restrictions for the file by “Music info”.Icon DescriptionStored in the FOMA phoneStored on the microSD cardSD-Audio file typeChaku-uta Full® file typeWMA file typeUIM restrictions functionChaku-uta Full® music file with playback restrictionsChaku-uta Full® music file with playback restrictions expiredPlayable Uta-hodai music fileUta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expiredUnplayable Uta-hodai music fileFile with file restrictionsIcon Audio format TypeAAC, AAC+(HE-AAC), Enhanced aacPlus MP4 file−Partially saved Chaku-uta Full® music filespAll Chaku-uta Full® music files are set with file restrictions. See page 164 for file restrictions.※For the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, “ ” is displayed.Icon Acquired source※SitesInformationpEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files.pThe information of the previously played music file is erased if you do the following operations:・When you remove/insert the microSD card・When you turn on/off the FOMA phone・When you execute “Reset settings” or “Initialize”・When you delete the previously played music file・When you delete the previously played playlist・When you do not insert the microSD card on which the previously played music file is stored・When you set “USB mode setting” to “microSD mode” or “MTP mode” and connect to a personal computer・When you played back a music file from other than a playlist last time, and then when you perform “Edit music info” or “Reset music info”, or when you newly download, save or delete a Chaku-uta Full® music file・When the music file previously played is an Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable deadline has expired・When the previously played music file is a WMA file and when you delete all the WMA licenses・When the WMA license becomes invalidpPartially saved Chaku-uta Full® music files are not displayed when you operate from MUSIC Player.pNote that the battery is consumed sooner if you perform the fast-forward and other similar operations frequently.
397Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackpIn the following cases, the playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:・When you make/receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call・When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm preferred” or the Stand-by display is shown・When an alarm tone of “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, “Book program” or “Timer recording” soundsDepending on the event which occurred, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to end MUSIC Player.pWhen a music file is switched to the previous or next one, the music file whose playable deadline or playable period has expired, or WMA file whose WMA license is deleted is skipped. When the Chaku-uta Full® music file has restrictions on the number of playbacks, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back regardless of the remaining number of playbacks. However, the music file whose number of playbacks has finished is skipped.Function Menu of the Music Folder List/i-mode (Chaku-uta Full®) Folder List/Player Menu DisplayInformationFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPlay mode setting Select a play mode.Normal  . . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist in order as listed. Finishes after the last music file is played back.Play only one . . .  Plays back the selected music file once.Repeat one. . . . .  Plays back the selected music file repeatedly.Repeat all . . . . . .  Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist in order as listed repeatedly.Random  . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist at random. Finishes after all the music files are played back.Random play&repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or in the playlist at random repeatedly.Add folder Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.pYou can create a total of 25 folders at each level up to the second-tier level in the FOMA phone. You can create folders at each level up to the seventh-tier level on the microSD card.Edit folder name Enter a folder name.pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.Delete folder You can delete a user folder and all Chaku-uta Full® music files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESSelect storage You can set the destination folder for when you move the Chaku-uta Full® music file to the microSD card. You can set it for up to seventh-tier-level folders.YESMemory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Add folder>pYou cannot create a user folder in the WMA folder.<Delete folder>pIf you delete the Chaku-uta Full® music file set for another function, the setting returns to the default.<Select storage>p“ ” is displayed for the folder set as a destination.pWhen you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the setting is changed, set the destination folder again.
398Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackFunction Menu of the Chaku-uta Full® Music List/Type List/Music List/WMA ListFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPlayer menu You can show the Player Menu display from the Type list or Music list.Play mode setting See page 397.Set as ring tone(Fullsong ring tone)You can set a full piece of Chaku-uta Full® music file as a ring tone.Fullsong ring toneSelect an item.pFor the Chaku-uta Full® music files on the microSD card, the confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to the FOMA phone. See “Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone” on page 361.Set as ring tone(Point ring tone)You can set a part of Chaku-uta Full® music file as a ring tone.Point ring toneSelect a range to be setSelect an item.pYou can check the range to be set by pressing l().pFor the Chaku-uta Full® music files on the microSD card, the confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to the FOMA phone. See “Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Phone” on page 361.Music info You can display the title, artist name, playback time, etc.pPress i( ) with the music information of Chaku-uta Full® music file displayed and select “Edit music info”; then you can edit the information contents. Select a desired item and then edit it. To return the edited information to the unedited one, select “Reset music info”. Select a desired item and select “YES”.Add to playlist Select a storing method.Add one to P-list . . . . . . . You can store the music file.Add some to P-list  . . . . . Select the music files to be stored, and press l().pThe music files are stored in the displayed order.Select a playlist you store music files to.pIf you create a new playlist and store music files to, select “New playlist”, then enter a playlist name. If the playlist is stored to 30 lists, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it.Move You can move the Chaku-uta Full® music file in the FOMA phone to another folder inside it, or can move the Chaku-uta Full® music file on the microSD card to another folder inside it.Select a destination folder.pPress l( ) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.Move to microSD You can move the Chaku-uta Full® music file to the microSD card. (See page 361)Move to phone You can move the Chaku-uta Full® music file on the microSD card to the FOMA phone. (See page 361)Edit title You can edit the title of Chaku-uta Full® music file.Enter a title.pFor a Chaku-uta Full® music file in the FOMA phone, you can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.pFor a Chaku-uta Full® music file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.Reset title You can reset the title of a Chaku-uta Full® music file to “Music title - Artist name”.YESAdd folder See page 397.Edit folder name See page 397.Function menu Operation/Explanation
399Music&Video Channel/Music PlaybackDelete folder See page 397.Multiple-choice You can select multiple Chaku-uta Full® music files and operate them.Put a check mark for Chaku-uta Full® music files to be operatedi()Select an item.Delete . . . See “Delete this” on page 399.Move . . . . See page 398.Connect to URL You can access the URL when the Chaku-uta Full® music file has the URL information.YESDisplay image You can display jacket images stored in the music file.pWhen multiple jacket images are stored, press No to display a previous or next jacket image.pWhen the image is storable, press Oo( ) and select “YES”, then select any destination folder to save it.Display lyric You can display lyric images stored in the Chaku-uta Full® music file.pWhen multiple lyric images are stored, press No to display a previous or next lyric image. You can display up to seven lyric images.pWhen the image is storable, press Oo( ) and select “YES”, then select any destination folder to save it.Select storage See page 397.Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of stored items.DEL all licenses You can delete the WMA license files.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESDelete this YESDelete all You can delete all Chaku-uta Full® music files or WMA files in the folder.Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESpIf there is a user folder in a folder, you cannot delete the user folder or Chaku-uta Full® music files in the user folder.Function menu Operation/ExplanationInformation<Set as ring tone>pWhen an Uta-hodai music file set for a ring tone cannot be played back, needs to be updated because of expired playback deadline, or is set with UIM restrictions, the default ring tone returns.pSee “Music info” for checking whether to be set as ring tone.<Add to playlist>pYou cannot add music files to the playlist created using a personal computer.<Reset title>pIf there is no music title or artist name, it is displayed as “Unknown” for each.<Display image>pSome images may not be displayed correctly. <Delete this> <Delete all>pIf you delete the Chaku-uta Full® music file set for another function, the setting returns to the default.pIf you delete the WMA file stored in the WMA playlist, it is released from WMA playlist.Function Menu during Playback/Halt/PauseFunction menu Operation/ExplanationPlayer menu You can show the Player Menu display from the playback display during using MUSIC Player.pPlayback state continues even when you show the Player Menu display.Play mode setting See page 397.Sound effect(Remaster)You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch range lost at data compression.RemasterON or OFF

Navigation menu